APM Structure3D

APM Structure3D

APM Structure3D

User's Guide

APM Structure3D

Parts and structures calculation and design system using finite element method

Version 13

User's Guide

Research and Software Development Center APM Ltd,

Oktyabrsky boulevar d 14, office №6, Korolev, Moscow Region, 141070, RUSSIA

Tel/fax: +7 (498) 600-25-10, +7 (495) 514-84-19. http://www.apmwm.com, e-mail: [email protected]

Copyright

1992

– 2015 by Research and Software Development Center APM Ltd. All rights reserved. All APM products are trademarks and registered trademarks of APM Ltd. Other brand and product names are trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Printed in Russia.

Contents

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 14

Preliminaries ..................................................................................................................................... 14

Hardware and software requirements............................................................................................ 14

Brief guidebook ................................................................................................................................ 14

Fonts used in this book ................................................................................................................... 15

How to contact APM ........................................................................................................................ 15

Chapter 1. Structure editor .................................................................................... 16

Views ................................................................................................................................................. 16

Editor elements ................................................................................................................................ 18

User interface settings .................................................................................................................... 19

Structure elements........................................................................................................................... 20

Rods ............................................................................................................................................... 20

Rod cross-section ........................................................................................................................... 21

Cross-section alignment point ........................................................................................................ 21

Plates .............................................................................................................................................. 21

Solid elements ................................................................................................................................ 21

Material.............................................................................................................................................. 22

Plate object ....................................................................................................................................... 22

View Filters ....................................................................................................................................... 25

View Filters / Nodes ........................................................................................................................ 26

View Filters / Node Numbers .......................................................................................................... 26

View Filters / Node Local CS .......................................................................................................... 26

View Filters / Wireframe Rods ........................................................................................................ 26

View Filters / Wireframe Cross-sections ........................................................................................ 26

View Filters / Solid Cross-sections ................................................................................................. 27

View Filters / Only Current Cross-section....................................................................................... 27

View Filters / Rod (Beam/Truss/Cable) Local CS .......................................................................... 27

View Filters / Vertical Rods ............................................................................................................. 27

View Filters / Inclined Rods ............................................................................................................ 27

View Filters / Horizontal Rods ........................................................................................................ 27

View Filters / Flat Plates ................................................................................................................. 27

View Filters / Wireframe Plates ...................................................................................................... 27

View Filters / Solid Plates ............................................................................................................... 27

View Filters / Plate Local CS .......................................................................................................... 27

View Filters / Plate Normals ........................................................................................................... 27

View Filters / Plate Object Mesh..................................................................................................... 28

View Filters / Solid Elements .......................................................................................................... 28

View Filters / Wireframe Solid Elements ........................................................................................ 28

View Filters / Solid Elements with Lighting ..................................................................................... 28

View Filters / Solid Local CS .......................................................................................................... 28

View Filters / Elastic Links .............................................................................................................. 28

View Filters / Couplings .................................................................................................................. 28

View Filters / Rigid/elastic Supports ............................................................................................... 28

View Filters / One-Dir Rigid Supports ............................................................................................. 28

View Filters / Node Loads ............................................................................................................... 28

View Filters / Rod Loads ................................................................................................................. 28

View Filters / Plate Loads ............................................................................................................... 28

View Filters / Solid Loads ............................................................................................................... 29

View Filters / Snow Loads .............................................................................................................. 29

View Filters / Wind Loads ............................................................................................................... 29

View Filters / Node Masses ............................................................................................................ 29

View Filters / Contact Elements ..................................................................................................... 29

View Filters / Contact Elements Local CS ...................................................................................... 29

View Filters / Target Elements ....................................................................................................... 29

View Filters / Target Elements Local CS ........................................................................................ 29

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

View Filters / Center of Mass ......................................................................................................... 29

View Filters / Only Selected Elements ............................................................................................ 29

View Filters / Zero Level ................................................................................................................. 29

View Filters / Dimension Scale ....................................................................................................... 29

Extra View Filters / Node Load Values ........................................................................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Plate Thickness Map ....................................................................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Plate Pressure Map ......................................................................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Plate Pressure Values ..................................................................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Plate Snow Pressure Map ............................................................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Plate Wind Pressure Map................................................................................ 30

Extra View Filters / Contact Elements Normal Stiffness Map ........................................................ 30

Extra View Filters / Contact Elements Tangent Stiffness Map ....................................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Fictive Contact Elements and Normal Stiffness Map ...................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Fictive Contact Elements and Tangent Stiffness Map .................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Value Range .................................................................................................... 30

Extra View Filters / Capture Image ................................................................................................. 30

Extra View Filters / Design Element Names ................................................................................... 31

Layers ................................................................................................................................................ 31

Operations with elements ............................................................................................................... 31

Select element or group of elements ............................................................................................. 31

Move .................................................................................................................................................. 31

Copy / Paste ...................................................................................................................................... 32

Multiply Structure ............................................................................................................................ 32

Loft .................................................................................................................................................... 33

Rotate ................................................................................................................................................ 33

Mirror ................................................................................................................................................. 33

Polar array ........................................................................................................................................ 33

Nodes alignment .............................................................................................................................. 34

Supports ........................................................................................................................................... 34

Loads ................................................................................................................................................. 35

Node loads ........................................................................................................................................ 35

Rod loads .......................................................................................................................................... 35

Rod temperature .............................................................................................................................. 35

Rod Prestrain .................................................................................................................................... 35

Plate and solid loads ....................................................................................................................... 35

Support displacements ................................................................................................................... 35

Dead weight ...................................................................................................................................... 37

Acceleration ...................................................................................................................................... 37

Concentrated mass .......................................................................................................................... 37

Snow load ......................................................................................................................................... 37

Wind load .......................................................................................................................................... 37

Temperature load on plates ............................................................................................................ 37

Temperature at node ....................................................................................................................... 38

Importing structure model .............................................................................................................. 38

Load cases ........................................................................................................................................ 41

Dynamic load cases ......................................................................................................................... 41

Load combination ............................................................................................................................ 43

Code combination ............................................................................................................................ 44

Current parameters .......................................................................................................................... 45

Chapter 2. Command reference ............................................................................ 47

File menu .......................................................................................................................................... 47

New / Structure ............................................................................................................................... 47

New / Cross-Section ....................................................................................................................... 47

New / Joint ...................................................................................................................................... 47

Model from Template ..................................................................................................................... 47

Extra Models from Template .......................................................................................................... 47

Open ............................................................................................................................................... 48

Close .............................................................................................................................................. 48

4

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Save ............................................................................................................................................... 49

Save As .......................................................................................................................................... 49

Import ............................................................................................................................................. 49

Export ............................................................................................................................................. 50

Import from Kompas3D .................................................................................................................. 50

Properties ....................................................................................................................................... 50

Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 50

Print ................................................................................................................................................ 51

Printer Setup ................................................................................................................................... 52

Most Recently Used Files ............................................................................................................... 52

Exit .................................................................................................................................................. 52

Edit menu .......................................................................................................................................... 52

Complex Selection by Box .............................................................................................................. 52

Complex Deselection by Box.......................................................................................................... 52

Complex Selection by Circle ........................................................................................................... 52

Complex Deselection by Circle....................................................................................................... 52

Select Object .................................................................................................................................. 52

Select Group................................................................................................................................... 52

Edit Object ...................................................................................................................................... 53

Invert Selection ............................................................................................................................... 53

Select All ......................................................................................................................................... 53

Undo ............................................................................................................................................... 53

Redo ............................................................................................................................................... 53

Undo Enable ................................................................................................................................... 53

View menu ........................................................................................................................................ 54

Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................... 54

Plane Position ................................................................................................................................. 54

Set Depth ........................................................................................................................................ 54

Set View Plane by 3 Nodes ............................................................................................................ 54

Show Dimension Scale................................................................................................................... 54

Dynamic Rotation Mode ................................................................................................................. 55

Use Local Coordinates ................................................................................................................... 55

Grid ................................................................................................................................................. 55

Cursor Step .................................................................................................................................... 55

Palette ............................................................................................................................................ 55

Units ............................................................................................................................................... 55

Scale ............................................................................................................................................... 56

Attachment ..................................................................................................................................... 56

Pane View ...................................................................................................................................... 56

Zoom .............................................................................................................................................. 57

T-square On/Of .............................................................................................................................. 57

Zoom In .......................................................................................................................................... 57

Zoom Out ....................................................................................................................................... 57

Fit to View ....................................................................................................................................... 57

Settings to All Views ....................................................................................................................... 57

View Set / Standard ........................................................................................................................ 57

Arbitrary View ................................................................................................................................. 57

Left View ......................................................................................................................................... 57

Up View .......................................................................................................................................... 57

Front View ...................................................................................................................................... 57

Draw menu ........................................................................................................................................ 57

Node / By Coordinates ................................................................................................................... 57

Node / On Rod................................................................................................................................ 58

Node / Local Coordinate System .................................................................................................... 58

Node / Mass ................................................................................................................................... 59

Rod / By Coordinates ..................................................................................................................... 59

Rod / By Length and Angle ............................................................................................................. 59

Rod | Divide Rod into N Rods ......................................................................................................... 60

Pipes| Straight Pipe ........................................................................................................................ 60

Pipes| Tee pipe ............................................................................................................................... 60

Pipes| Pipe Bend by 3 Points ......................................................................................................... 60

5

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Pipes| Pipe Bend by 2 Rod Ends .................................................................................................... 61

Pipes| Pipe Bend by 2 Rods and Radius ........................................................................................ 61

Plate / Rectangular 4-noded ........................................................................................................... 61

Plate / Arbitrary 4-noded ................................................................................................................. 61

Plate / 3-noded ............................................................................................................................... 62

Plate / Arbitrary with Mesh .............................................................................................................. 62

Plate / Divide Plate ......................................................................................................................... 62

Plate / On Free Faces of Solid Elements ....................................................................................... 63

Plate Object / Create Plate Object ................................................................................................. 63

Plate Object / Edit Plate Object ...................................................................................................... 63

Plate Object / Mesh Options ........................................................................................................... 63

Plate Object / Delete Mesh ............................................................................................................. 64

Plate Object / Explode Plate Object ............................................................................................... 64

Plate| Sphere of 4-Noded Shells .................................................................................................... 64

Plate | Cylinder of 4-Noded Shells / ................................................................................................ 65

Plate | Cylinder of 3-Noded Shells .................................................................................................. 65

Plate| Torus of 3-Noded Shells ....................................................................................................... 65

Plate | Torus of 4-Noded Shells ...................................................................................................... 65

Solid / 8-noded Solid ...................................................................................................................... 66

Solid / Divide 8-noded Solid ........................................................................................................... 66

Solid / 6-noded Solid ...................................................................................................................... 67

Solid / 4-noded Solid ...................................................................................................................... 67

Three-dimensional elements| 20-node element octahedral ........................................................... 67

Three-dimensional elements| 10-node tetrahedral element ........................................................... 67

Three-dimensional elements| Create a tetrahedron ball ................................................................ 67

Three-dimensional elements| Create a hexahedron ball ................................................................ 67

Three-dimensional elements| Create a tetrahedron cylinder ......................................................... 67

Solid / Rectangular Parallelepiped ................................................................................................. 67

Solid / Solid Pipe ............................................................................................................................ 68

Solid | Ball of Tetrahedrons ............................................................................................................ 69

Solid | Ball of Hexahedrons ............................................................................................................ 69

Solid | Cylinder of Tetrahedrons ..................................................................................................... 70

Arc .................................................................................................................................................. 70

Circle .............................................................................................................................................. 70

Support / Rigid Support .................................................................................................................. 71

Support / One-Dir Rigid Support..................................................................................................... 71

Support / Elastic Support ................................................................................................................ 72

Support / Elastic Supports for Foundations .................................................................................... 73

Rigid Link ........................................................................................................................................ 73

Elastic Link ..................................................................................................................................... 73

Hinge / At Node / Create for All ...................................................................................................... 73

Hinge / At Node / Create for Selected ............................................................................................ 74

Hinge / At Rod End ......................................................................................................................... 74

Rod Release ................................................................................................................................... 74

Plate Release ................................................................................................................................. 74

Delete Selected .............................................................................................................................. 75

Delete All ........................................................................................................................................ 75

Multiple Nodes ................................................................................................................................ 75

Loads menu ...................................................................................................................................... 75

Force on Node ................................................................................................................................ 75

Moment on Node ............................................................................................................................ 75

Support Displacements .................................................................................................................. 76

Temperature ................................................................................................................................... 77

Rod Prestrain.................................................................................................................................. 77

Local Load On Rod......................................................................................................................... 77

Global Load on Rod ........................................................................................................................ 78

Rod Temperature ........................................................................................................................... 78

Delete Rod Loads ........................................................................................................................... 79

Rod Load Type / Axial Force .......................................................................................................... 79

Rod Load Type / Lateral Force ....................................................................................................... 79

Rod Load Type / Torsional Moment ............................................................................................... 79

6

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Rod Load Type / Bending Moment ................................................................................................. 79

Rod Load Type / Distributed Axial Force ........................................................................................ 80

Rod Load Type / Distributed Lateral Force..................................................................................... 80

Rod Load Type / Distributed Torsional Moment ............................................................................. 80

Rod Load Type / Distributed Bending Moment............................................................................... 80

Plate Distributed Load .................................................................................................................... 80

Plate Linear Distributed Load ......................................................................................................... 81

Plate Snow Load ............................................................................................................................ 82

Plate Wind Load ............................................................................................................................. 83

Plate Temperature .......................................................................................................................... 83

Plate Linear Temperature ............................................................................................................... 84

Pressure on Solid ........................................................................................................................... 85

Acceleration / Linear Acceleration .................................................................................................. 85

Acceleration / Angular Acceleration................................................................................................ 85

Load Case ...................................................................................................................................... 86

Dynamic Load Case ....................................................................................................................... 86

Load Combinations ........................................................................................................................ 86

Static Load to Mass ........................................................................................................................ 87

Stochastic Load Case .................................................................................................................... 87

Graph of Dynamic Load ................................................................................................................. 88

Tools menu ....................................................................................................................................... 88

Copy ............................................................................................................................................... 88

Paste .............................................................................................................................................. 89

Loft.................................................................................................................................................. 89

Rotate ............................................................................................................................................. 92

Mirror .............................................................................................................................................. 92

Polar Array ...................................................................................................................................... 92

Node Alignment .............................................................................................................................. 93

Move Nodes ................................................................................................................................... 93

Spring ............................................................................................................................................. 93

Pattern Grid .................................................................................................................................... 94

Pattern Settings .............................................................................................................................. 94

Layers ............................................................................................................................................. 94

Add to Current Layer ...................................................................................................................... 95

Check / Model Connection ............................................................................................................. 95

Check / Materials ............................................................................................................................ 95

Check / Rod Cross-Section ............................................................................................................ 95

Check / Plate Angles ...................................................................................................................... 96

Check / Solid Elements .................................................................................................................. 96

Check / On Duplicate Rods, Plates, Solids .................................................................................... 96

Check / Aspect Ratio ...................................................................................................................... 96

Check / Tapering ............................................................................................................................ 96

Check / Jacobian ............................................................................................................................ 97

Check / Warping ............................................................................................................................. 97

Connect Nodes ............................................................................................................................... 97

Create Contact Elements ............................................................................................................... 97

Create Super Elements .................................................................................................................. 97

Node

–> Group of Nodes Connection ............................................................................................ 98

Node Group

–> Group of Nodes Connection ................................................................................. 98

Separate Solids .............................................................................................................................. 98

Additional Features / Intersection of 2 Rods .................................................................................. 98

Additional Features / Minimum Distance between 2 Intersecting Rods ......................................... 98

Additional Features / Intersection of Rod and Plate ....................................................................... 99

Additional Features / Intersection of 2 Plates ................................................................................. 99

Additional Features / Angle between 2 Rods ................................................................................. 99

Additional Features / Angle between 2 Plates .............................................................................. 100

Additional Features / Angle between Rod and Plate .................................................................... 100

Additional Features / Nodes on Rod Projection ........................................................................... 100

Additional Features / Nodes on Plate Projection .......................................................................... 100

Measure Distance between Nodes .............................................................................................. 101

Properties menu ............................................................................................................................. 101

7

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Cross-Sections ............................................................................................................................. 101

Cross-Section to Selected Rods .................................................................................................. 104

Cross-Section to All Rods ............................................................................................................ 104

Cross-Section Orientation ............................................................................................................ 104

Rod Info ........................................................................................................................................ 105

Cross-Section Alignment Point ..................................................................................................... 106

Invert Rod Local CS ..................................................................................................................... 106

Length of Selected Elements ....................................................................................................... 106

Rod Element Type ........................................................................................................................ 106

Pipeline elements properties... ..................................................................................................... 106

Thickness to Selected Plates ....................................................................................................... 108

Thickness to All Plates ................................................................................................................. 108

Enable Plate Stiffness .................................................................................................................. 108

Plate Info ...................................................................................................................................... 108

Invert Plate Local CS .................................................................................................................... 109

Orientate Local CS of All Plates ................................................................................................... 109

Orientate Local CS of Selected Plates ......................................................................................... 109

Plate LCS by Default .................................................................................................................... 109

Area of Selected Elements ........................................................................................................... 110

Plate Element Type ...................................................................................................................... 110

Solid Info ....................................................................................................................................... 110

Volume of Selected Elements ...................................................................................................... 110

Orientate LCS of All Solid Elements ............................................................................................. 110

Orientate LCS of Selected Solid Elements ................................................................................... 111

Contact Elements Info .................................................................................................................. 111

Soils Info ....................................................................................................................................... 112

Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 113

Selected Elements Moment of Inertia .......................................................................................... 121

Model Moment of Inertia ............................................................................................................... 121

Model Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 122

Model Info ..................................................................................................................................... 122

Additional Model Info .................................................................................................................... 122

Design menu................................................................................................................................... 123

Design Element Type ................................................................................................................... 123

Design Elements .......................................................................................................................... 123

Selected Objects to Design Element ............................................................................................ 123

Selected Objects to Separate Design Elements .......................................................................... 124

Selected Objects to RM Design Element ..................................................................................... 124

Selected Objects to Separate RM Design Elements .................................................................... 124

Delete from Design Element ........................................................................................................ 124

Updating of Punching List............................................................................................................. 124

Connections of Steel Structures ................................................................................................... 124

Calculation menu ........................................................................................................................... 125

Calculation .................................................................................................................................... 125

Calculation of Super Elements ..................................................................................................... 127

Fatigue Calculation for Stochastic Load Cases ............................................................................ 127

Design .......................................................................................................................................... 127

Design of Reinforced Elements .................................................................................................... 127

Checking of Reinforced Elements ................................................................................................ 128

Code Combinations ...................................................................................................................... 128

Commands for Joints Calculation ................................................................................................ 128

Fatigue Calculation ....................................................................................................................... 129

Calculation Options ...................................................................................................................... 131

Results menu.................................................................................................................................. 134

Select Super Element to get Results ............................................................................................ 134

Loads ............................................................................................................................................ 134

Result Map ................................................................................................................................... 135

Stress in Cross-section ................................................................................................................ 136

Show Element Forces .................................................................................................................. 136

Support Reactions ........................................................................................................................ 136

Quantity Survey ............................................................................................................................ 136

8

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Code Combination Results ........................................................................................................... 137

Buckling ........................................................................................................................................ 139

Natural Frequencies ..................................................................................................................... 140

Animation...................................................................................................................................... 140

Forced Oscillations ....................................................................................................................... 140

Graph of Displacements ............................................................................................................... 140

Graph of Stress ............................................................................................................................ 140

Longevity at Fatigue Stochastic Load Case ................................................................................. 140

Result Animation of Heat Transfer Analysis ................................................................................. 141

Result Map of Heat Transfer Analysis .......................................................................................... 141

Result Options of Heat Transfer Analysis .................................................................................... 141

Reinforcement Map ...................................................................................................................... 141

Reinforcement Result Options ..................................................................................................... 142

Result Options .............................................................................................................................. 142

Result Range ................................................................................................................................ 142

Window menu ................................................................................................................................. 142

Cascade ....................................................................................................................................... 142

Tile ................................................................................................................................................ 142

Arrange Icons ............................................................................................................................... 142

View 1, View 2 … ......................................................................................................................... 142

Help menu ....................................................................................................................................... 142

Contents ....................................................................................................................................... 142

About ............................................................................................................................................ 142

Chapter 3. Cross-section Editor .......................................................................... 143

Contour menu ................................................................................................................................ 143

Simple Contour ............................................................................................................................. 143

User Defined Contour ................................................................................................................... 144

Library menu .................................................................................................................................. 144

Add to Library ............................................................................................................................... 144

Get from Library ........................................................................................................................... 144

New Library .................................................................................................................................. 144

Mesh Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 144

Cross-section creation .................................................................................................................. 144

Cross-section library ..................................................................................................................... 146

Addition new section to library ...................................................................................................... 146

Loading cross-section from library ............................................................................................... 146

Editing cross-section geometrical parameters ............................................................................. 147

Exchange between libraries ......................................................................................................... 147

Cross-section library creation ....................................................................................................... 148

Chapter 4. Calculations ........................................................................................ 149

Linear Static analysis .................................................................................................................... 149

Code combination .......................................................................................................................... 149

Buckling analysis ........................................................................................................................... 150

Modal analysis................................................................................................................................ 150

Nonlinear analysis ......................................................................................................................... 150

A physically nonlinear calculation ............................................................................................... 151

Transient Dynamic analysis .......................................................................................................... 151

Fatigue calculation ........................................................................................................................ 152

Setting of fatigue parameters ....................................................................................................... 153

Definition of random load ............................................................................................................. 153

The calculation methodology ........................................................................................................ 153

A calculation of random fatigue on statics .................................................................................... 153

A random fatigue calculation through forced fluctuations ............................................................ 153

Definition of random load ............................................................................................................. 159

The calculation methodology ........................................................................................................ 165

Calculation of random fatigue on statics ...................................................................................... 168

Random fatigue calculation through forced fluctuations .............................................................. 170

Thermal analysis ............................................................................................................................ 172

9

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Heat transfer transient analysis.................................................................................................... 172

Modes of thermal loads application .............................................................................................. 174

List of BC or IC dialog................................................................................................................... 174

Load set dialog ............................................................................................................................. 174

Filters of thermal loads toolbar ..................................................................................................... 177

Thermal material creation............................................................................................................. 178

Calculation parameters ................................................................................................................ 179

Viewing calculation results ........................................................................................................... 179

Seismic calculation ........................................................................................................................ 180

Design calculation ......................................................................................................................... 181

Calculation of pipeline segments ................................................................................................. 182

Straight elastic tube section.......................................................................................................... 182

Stresses Calculation ..................................................................................................................... 183

Curved pipe with constant radius ................................................................................................. 184

Calculation of contact interaction ................................................................................................ 184

Design and checking of reinforced concrete elements ............................................................. 185

Design and checking of reinforced masonry elements ............................................................. 185

Batch calculations ......................................................................................................................... 185

Chapter 5. Design Elements, Soil Bases and Foundations .............................. 187

Design elements general information .......................................................................................... 187

Steel / Wood design elements ...................................................................................................... 188

Reinforced design elements ......................................................................................................... 189

Calculation types .......................................................................................................................... 189

Design Elements dialog box ......................................................................................................... 190

View filters of Design Elements dialog box .................................................................................. 190

Work with group of elements ........................................................................................................ 191

Reinforced concrete design elements (shells) ............................................................................. 191

Reinforced concrete design elements (rods) ............................................................................... 197

Reinforced masonry design elements .......................................................................................... 203

Soil bases and foundations calculation ...................................................................................... 207

General principles of work with Foundation dialog box ................................................................ 207

Calculation of soil base for post foundation .................................................................................. 208

Calculation of soil base for strip foundation .................................................................................. 211

Calculation of soil base for mat foundation .................................................................................. 212

Calculation of soil base for pile foundation ................................................................................... 213

Soil modeling. General definitions ............................................................................................... 218

Soil characteristics ....................................................................................................................... 218

Work with soil list .......................................................................................................................... 218

Soil stratification map ................................................................................................................... 219

Chapter 6. Results ................................................................................................ 222

Static calculation results ............................................................................................................... 222

Buckling analysis results .............................................................................................................. 227

General nonlinear analysis results............................................................................................... 229

Modal analysis results ................................................................................................................... 229

Results of forced oscillation calculation ..................................................................................... 230

Node displacements ..................................................................................................................... 230

Stresses, displacements, internal loads ....................................................................................... 230

Base reactions .............................................................................................................................. 231

Eigenfrequencies .......................................................................................................................... 231

Results of contact interaction calculation................................................................................... 232

Results of reinforcing elements ................................................................................................... 233

Reinforcement results presentation ............................................................................................ 233

Chapter 7. Design of Structure Steel Joints ....................................................... 235

Pinned column base ...................................................................................................................... 236

Fixed column base (2 hooks) ........................................................................................................ 237

Concrete column base .................................................................................................................. 238

10

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Beam to beam connection ............................................................................................................ 238

Corner of frame connection .......................................................................................................... 239

Column to beam connection ......................................................................................................... 240

Beam to column connection (angled) .......................................................................................... 240

Beam to beam connection (angled) ............................................................................................. 240

Beam to column connection (flange) ........................................................................................... 241

Beam to beam connection (flange) .............................................................................................. 241

Plate-rod connection ..................................................................................................................... 241

Plate-internal node connection .................................................................................................... 242

Plate-zone node connection ......................................................................................................... 243

Chapter 8. Specialized Editors ............................................................................ 244

Part 1. Function Editor ......................................................................................... 244

Function editor interface ............................................................................................................... 244

Toolbar command reference ......................................................................................................... 245

OK ................................................................................................................................................ 245

Cancel .......................................................................................................................................... 245

Load Data File .............................................................................................................................. 245

Save Data File .............................................................................................................................. 245

Full Scale ...................................................................................................................................... 245

Zoom In Window .......................................................................................................................... 245

Scale ............................................................................................................................................. 245

Limits ............................................................................................................................................ 246

Grid ............................................................................................................................................... 246

Cursor Step .................................................................................................................................. 246

Palette .......................................................................................................................................... 246

New Function ................................................................................................................................ 247

Lengthen Function ........................................................................................................................ 247

Analytical Function ....................................................................................................................... 247

Table............................................................................................................................................. 249

Line ............................................................................................................................................... 250

Spline ............................................................................................................................................ 250

Add Object .................................................................................................................................... 250

Line drawing ................................................................................................................................. 250

Spline drawing .............................................................................................................................. 250

Edit Function ................................................................................................................................. 250

Insert Object ................................................................................................................................. 250

Delete Object ................................................................................................................................ 251

Function ........................................................................................................................................ 251

First Derivative .............................................................................................................................. 251

Second Derivative ........................................................................................................................ 251

Help .............................................................................................................................................. 251

Part 2. A table editor ............................................................................................. 251

Filling in of the table and table editing .......................................................................................... 253

Addition and deletion of cells ........................................................................................................ 255

Part 3. Expression editor ..................................................................................... 256

Dialog of an expression definition ................................................................................................ 256

Syntax of expressions .................................................................................................................. 257

Examples of expressions ............................................................................................................. 258

Units of measurement .................................................................................................................. 258

An error check .............................................................................................................................. 258

Chapter 9. Finite Element Analysis ..................................................................... 259

Theoretical basis ............................................................................................................................ 260

Finite elements ............................................................................................................................... 261

Coordinate systems ....................................................................................................................... 261

11

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Working with finite elements ........................................................................................................ 263

Stresses in plate elements ............................................................................................................ 263

Solid elements ................................................................................................................................ 264

Glossary on Finite Element Method ............................................................................................. 264

Chapter 9. ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS ANALYSIS (EMA) ............................. 265

1. Overview of electromagnetic fields analysis .......................................................................... 265

Analysis in the low frequency and high frequency area ................................................................ 265

Types of analysis .......................................................................................................................... 265

Electrostatic calculation (Electrostatics) ....................................................................................... 265

Calculation of direct currents field (Electricity kinetics) ................................................................ 266

Static electromagnetic fields (Magneto statics) ............................................................................ 266

Variable stationary electromagnetic low frequency field ............................................................... 266

Modal analysis .............................................................................................................................. 266

Analysis in the low frequency area ............................................................................................... 267

An electrostatic calculation .......................................................................................................... 267

Calculating model development ................................................................................................... 267

Definition of loads and boundary conditions ............................................................................. 267

Electric charge ............................................................................................................................... 268

Electric charge density .................................................................................................................. 268

Electric potential ............................................................................................................................ 268

Performing calculation .................................................................................................................. 269

View of results ................................................................................................................................ 270

Calculation of direct currents field ............................................................................................... 271

Calculating model development ................................................................................................... 271

Definition of loads and boundary conditions ............................................................................. 271

Electric current ............................................................................................................................... 272

Electric potential ............................................................................................................................ 272

Performing calculation .................................................................................................................. 272

View of results ................................................................................................................................ 273

Magnetostatics calculation ........................................................................................................... 274

Calculating model development ................................................................................................... 274

Definition of loads and boundary conditions ............................................................................. 274

Electrical current density .............................................................................................................. 275

A residual magnetization vector ................................................................................................... 275

Vectorial magnetic potential ......................................................................................................... 276

Performing calculation .................................................................................................................. 276

View of results ................................................................................................................................ 277

Non stationary electromagnetic calculation ............................................................................... 278

Calculating model development ................................................................................................... 278

Definition of loads and boundary conditions ............................................................................. 278

Time integral of electric potential ................................................................................................. 279

Input section of current ................................................................................................................. 280

Electrical current density .............................................................................................................. 280

A residual magnetization vector ................................................................................................... 280

Vectorial magnetic potential ......................................................................................................... 280

Performing calculation .................................................................................................................. 281

View of results ................................................................................................................................ 282

Analysis in the high frequency area ............................................................................................. 283

High frequency modal analysis .................................................................................................... 283

Calculating model development ................................................................................................... 284

Definition of loads and boundary conditions ............................................................................. 284

Perfect electric conductor ............................................................................................................. 284

Performing calculation .................................................................................................................. 285

View of results ................................................................................................................................ 285

Brief theoretical information ......................................................................................................... 286

Electrostatics .................................................................................................................................. 288

Field of direct currents .................................................................................................................. 289

Magnetostatics ............................................................................................................................... 289

12

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Non stationary electromagnetic field ........................................................................................... 290

Electromagnetic high frequency field .......................................................................................... 291

Education examples ...................................................................................................................... 291

Calculation of a capacitor (electrostatics) ................................................................................... 291

The calculation of the magnetic circuit (magnetostatics). ........................................................ 294

Definition of materials in the model ............................................................................................. 294

Definition of loads in the model ................................................................................................... 294

Calculation and view of results .................................................................................................... 296

Calculation of direct currents field ............................................................................................... 298

Ring conductor (Non stationary electromagnetic calculation) ................................................. 301

A calculation of a waveguide resonator (High frequency modal analysis) .............................. 306

13

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Introduction

Preliminaries

APM Structure 3D is a universal system for calculation of various rod, plate, shell, solid, and hybrid constructions.

Using the system one can calculate arbitrary three-dimensional constructions consisting of rods of arbitrary cross-sections, plates, shells and solid elements under arbitrary loading and restraints. The joints between elements may be either rigid, or hinged.

As a result of the calculations, performed by APM Structure3D system, the following information is available:

 Loads at the ends of the structure elements

 Stress fields in the structure

 Strain at arbitrary point

 Stress fields in any section of a rod

 Diagrams of bending and twisting moments, transverse and axial forces, etc.

 Structure elements

’ bearing capacity estimation

 Euler buckling safety factor of the structure

 Stress-strain state of the structure at large displacements (geometrically nonlinear problem)

 Frequencies and modes of natural oscillations of the structure

 Changes in stress-strain states of the structure under dynamic loads

Hardware and software requirements

Minimal:

Operating System: Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/8;

Processor: 1 GHz;

Memory: 2 GB;

Video display adapter: OpenGL - compatible;

Hard drive: 300 MB free space.

Recommended:

Operating System: Windows Vista/7/8;

Processor: Intel Core i5/i7;

Memory: 8 GB;

Video display adapter: ATI Radeon 9600 or

NVIDIA GeForce 6600;

Hard drive: >10 GB free space.

Brief guidebook

In the Introduction (this section) general information about Structure 3D is given.

Chapter 1, Construction Editor describes the functions and operation of construction editor

APM Structure 3D.

Chapter 2, Command Reference gives a complete description of all commands, menu options, and dialog boxes available in the construction editor.

Chapter 3, Cross-section Editor describes the process of creating new cross-sections, and work with cross-section libraries.

Chapter 4, Calculations gives a complete description of all calculations made by APM

Structure3D.

Chapter 5, Design Elements, Soil Bases and Foundations describes working principles with steel, wood and reinforced concrete elements, cross-sections characteristics and reinforcement design

(columns, girders, plates, foundations) according to SNiP.

Chapter 6, Results gives a complete description of all results obtained with APM Structure3D.

Chapter 7, Design of Structure Steel Joints describes the creation process and the basic properties of the drawings of steel elements

’ joints.

14

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 8, Function Editor gives a complete description of all commands available in the function editor for setting graph of dynamic load.

Chapter 9, Finite Element Analysis gives overview of the finite element method as implemented in the system.

Fonts used in this book

To help you reading this book we used the following set of fonts a:\setup

This font represents the text the way it occurs on the screen, and

SETUP.EXE also text, which user should enter with the keyboard

We use all capital letters for the names of files and keys

Help APM Structure3D command names and buttons of dialog boxes are shown in boldface

Results Italics is used for the frame names of dialog boxes and controls

How to contact APM

To contact APM you can use one of the following ways:

Send fax. Our Moscow fax number is +7(498) 600-25-10.

Call by phone +7(498) 600-25-10, +7(495) 514-84-19 (Moscow).

Write a letter and send it to

Research and Software Development Center APM Ltd

Oktyabrsky boulevard 14, offi ce №6

Korolev, Moscow Region, 141070, Russia e-mail: [email protected] internet: www.apmwm.com

15

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 1. Structure editor

APM Structure3D editor allows you to enter construction geometry, place supports and hinges, apply static loads, assign cross-sections, thickness, and material parameters to elements.

Views

The work of the editor is based on the operation of projecting onto a plane. Such plane is called viewplane or simply view. When editing a construction, the user works with such viewplanes. The viewplane is characterized by two parameters: rotation and position. Rotation defines the direction of the vector normal to the viewplane and is set by two angles

and

like in spherical coordinate system.

The other parameter

– position in space – is set by a vector.

Y

Z

 X

Viewplane

X

Y

Fig. 1.1 Viewplane position in space

Sometimes, for example, when we move viewplane parallel, it is useful to define viewplane position with depth, a scalar value equal to distance between the viewplane and the center of the global coordinate system, similar to

in spherical coordinate system.

Viewplane

Global coordinate system

Plane depth

Fig. 1.2 Viewplane depth

Viewplane coordinate system has its Z axis coinciding with the normal vector of the plane, its X axis and Y axis lying in the viewplane. Hereafter viewplane coordinate system will be referred to as

local while world coordinate system - as global. Sometimes it is more convenient to work with local coordinates.

Views which have normal vector coinciding with one of the axes of the global coordinate system are called main views. These views are Top, Bottom, Right, Left, Front and Rear. When the direction of the normal vector doesn't coincide with any of the global axes, the view is called Custom.

In editor, user is provided with four views, which represent separate windows that can be opened, closed and arranged to the user’s convenience. By default, viewplanes are set as Front, Left, Top, and

Custom or Isometric views.

In order to ensure the optimum position of the image on the screen, the user can scale and scroll it. Image scale is the value that shows the relation of the dimensions of the image to the real dimensions of the object. Scrolling is the operation of moving or shifting the image with respect to the window.

16

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Also you can use View Plane toolbar for convenience.

Fig. 1.3 View plane toolbar

Plane Rotation

– command invokes dialog box where you can set view plane with the help of Phi and Theta angles. Toolbar buttons for standard views: - front; - top; - left; - right;

- bottom; - rear; - isometric; - isometric; - isometric; - isometric.

For the optimal view you can move, scale and rotate view with the mouse without breaking a current command.

It is convenient to use the Cube for accelerated dynamic rotation of working field. It appears by holding Ctrl key. Cube sizes increase in working field when mouse cursor is approaching to cube. To activate one of standard views left click on required face, edge or corner of cube; to rotate view use corresponding arrows.

Fig. 1.4 View plane cube

Move view

Scale view

Rotate view

Operation

Table 1.1

– View operations with a model

Holding mouse scroll

Rotating mouse scroll

Mouse

Moving mouse with pressed left button and Ctrl key

Scale can be activated with the help of toolbar commands:

– enlarge, – decrease, – zoom,

– fit to view.

View rotation can be realized with holding Ctrl key. Thus there is a circle on the screen with which it is possible to change view in required plane.

17

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

– arbitrary rotation (mouse cursor is located inside a circle).

– rotation in current view plane (mouse cursor is located outside a circle).

– rotation in vertical plane relative to current view plane (mouse cursor is located near the horizontal axis of a circle).

– rotation in horizontal plane relative to current view plane (mouse cursor is located near the vertical axis of a circle).

Fig. 1.5 Use of view rotation tool for changing view plane

– Rotate view command which can disable current command.

Editor elements

Construction editor consists of view windows, menus, toolbars and status bar. View elements are nodes, rods, load of various types, auxiliary points such as rotation center and global coordinate system center, etc. All view elements are depicted in a different color. User can change the colors of all view elements and save these color settings in groups called Palette (View / Palette command).

Editor and view elements are shown below.

18

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 1.6 Editor and view elements

Status bar is used for representation of primary information necessary for current work. This information includes: length measurement units, cursor coordinates, current operation parameters (for example radius, when you draw circle) and current operation name. Structure editor status bar is shown below.

Fig. 1.7 Structure editor status bar

User interface settings

To set toolbars it is necessary to right click on one of toolbars. In displayed context menu make left click to on/off required toolbar. When Settings option is selected the standard dialog box appears on the screen. Let's consider tabs of this dialog in details.

Commands tab contains all commands and its description.

Toolbars tab allows to on/off toolbars.

Keyboard tab allows to create shortcuts to accelerate command activation.

Menu tab allows to set animation and shadows for menu.

Parameters tab allows to set displaying of command prompts and keyboard shortcuts.

19

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Structure elements

Fig. 1.8 Toolbars and settings context menu

The basic elements of the construction are nodes, rods, plates and solid elements. Nodes are connection points of the elements. Rod is a straight-line beam. Plate is planar 3 or 4-nodal polygon.

Solid element is a three-dimensional element in the form of the 8-node hexahedron, 6-node triangular prism or 4-node tetrahedron. Special elements are rigid and elastic links, particular rod finite elements, nodes masses, etc.

The nodes, rods, plates and solid elements can be entered in arbitrary sequence. Setting nodes is a rather simple operation. At first, it is necessary to choose a viewplane that contains the point in which you want to place the node, and then, referring to the coordinates in the toolbar, specify the point with the desired coordinates by a mouse-click.

Rods

Rods can be created in two ways. The first way (Draw / Rod / By coordinates command) allows you to draw a rod using the coordinates of its nodes. You can either select existing nodes as starting points or create new ones. The second method allows drawing a rod based on the starting node, direction and length. To use this method, select Draw / Rod /

By Length and Angle

command. Besides, you can insert an additional node in rod or set it on the rod extension by Draw /

Node /

On Rod command. Draw / Rod / Divide Rod into N Rods command allows dividing a rod into arbitrary number of equal parts. For more detailed information see Chapter 2 Command

Reference.

20

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Rod cross-section

A cross-section must be assigned to each rod. It can be of arbitrary shape. Cross-sections are stored in cross-section libraries. APM Structure3D includes some cross-section libraries with standard profiles. These libraries files have *.slb extension.

Use Properties / Cross-section to Selected Rods or Properties /

Cross-section to All

Rods commands to assign cross-section to a rod or a group of rods, respectively.

Cross-section editor is used to make an arbitrary cross-section and it is launched by File / New /

Cross-section. For more details see Chapter 3 Cross-section Editor.

Cross-section alignment point

Rod axis can pass through any point in a cross-section. Cross-section alignment point (or its offset) is set by Properties / Cross-section Alignment Point command. By default rod axis passes through center of mass of the cross-section, which corresponds to zero offset (Fig. 1.9 a). Fig. 1.9 b shows an example of rod with center-bottom cross-section alignment. See also Chapter 2 Command

Reference. a) b)

Fig. 1.9 Cross-section alignment point

Plates

A plate can be set as either a parallelogram, an arbitrary quadrangle, or as an arbitrary triangle.

For these cases Draw / Plate / Rectangular 4-noded, Draw / Plate / Arbitrary 4-noded and

Draw / Plate /

3-noded commands are used correspondingly. Besides, any rectangular plate can be divided into equal parts by Draw / Plate / Divide Plate command. Any area including multiconnected areas can be meshed with plates. This is achieved by using Draw / Plate /

Arbitrary

with Mesh command. For more detailed information see Chapter 2 Command Reference.

Solid elements

Solid elements can be created as either an arbitrary hexahedron, a triangular prism or a quadrangle. For that Draw / Solid / 8-noded solid, Draw / Solid / 6-noded solid and Draw / Solid /

4-noded solid commands are used correspondingly. Besides, 8-node element can be divided into smaller elements by Draw / Solid / Divide 8-noded solid command. For creating pipes and parallelograms out of solid elements, editor has Draw / Solid / Solid Pipe and Draw / Solid /

Rectangular Parallelepiped commands. For more detailed information see Chapter 2 Command

Reference.

Cursor coordinates in the editor change according to cursor step. Cursor step determines the precision degree to which the coordinates are approximated when the cursor is moved in the view.

Two cursor steps are used in the editor: linear and angular. Linear step determines the approximation precision of coordinates and lengths, while angular step determines approximation precision of angles in such operations as drawing an arc, or a rod using length-and-angle method. To change cursor step values, use the View / Cursor Step command. Default linear cursor step is equal to 1 measurement unit and angular is equal to 1 degree.

To simplify the process of editing, the APM Structure3D editor operates in nodes snapping mode.

Each node in the viewplane has its own sensitivity zone. When cursor is placed in the sensitivity zone

21

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

of the node, the cursor coordinates are automatically assigned node coordinates. For example, while drawing circle you specify the center so that the cursor hits the sensitivity zone of some node, the center of the circle will be placed exactly in the projection of this node onto the viewplane. A node is highlighted in a different color when cursor is placed in its sensitivity zone. User can set the radius of the sensitive zone by View / Cursor Step command, while it is 10 pixels by default. Snapping is switched off when SHIFT key is pressed.

Before starting calculation, user should set the section and material parameters for every rod, thickness and material for every plate, and material for every solid element. A particular section can be set either for all rods or for selected ones only. Material parameters are set by default, but can be changed (just as the section) either for all, or for selected rods, plates and solid elements.

Material

Use Properties / Materials command to set material to structure elements. To assign a material to a group of elements these should selected beforehand, using Edit / Select Object,

Edit /

Select Group or Edit / Complex Selection by Box and Edit /

Selection by Circle commands. For more information see Chapter 2 Command Reference.

Complex

Plate object

Plate object serves to accelerate modeling and to set parameters of plate finite elements. Plate object is characterized by the same properties as a plate (thickness, material etc.). Plate object is meshed on finite elements according to the set parameters at calculation. One plate object can correspond to one design element that does creation of plate design elements (reinforced concrete and reinforced masonry) more simple and convenient.

To create plate object use the Draw / Plate / Arbitrary with Mesh command. After specifying of arbitrary contour it is necessary to check Create plate option in the appeared dialog box.

Using this command plate object creation has a number of features, for example, automatic search of intermediate nodes. It is not necessarily to specify al the nodes of closed contour (fig. 1.10), specifying only angular nodes enough: 1-2-3-4-5-1. Thus all internal nodes on perimeter of a contour and internal plate nodes will be considered automatically at FEM meshing.

Draw / Plate Object/ Create Plate command invokes APM Graph editor for creation of plate contour. Plate contour can be created by the following ways:

Import from APM Graph file (*.agp) using File / Open command.

Import from foreign graph editor through DXF file using File / Import command.

Create by means of APM Graph.

Create in APM Graph from block of current drawing or block library using Draw /

Insert Block command.

Create in APM Graph from parametric model using Draw / Insert Block command.

Fig. 1.10 Example of plate object creation with searching of intermediate nodes

To create additional nodes inside or on a contour, for example for further set of the concentrated loads, use one of the following APM Graph commands:

Draw / Point /

Free Point;

22

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Draw / Point /

Point on Object;

Draw / Point /

Point on Intersection.

Use of APM Graph as the editor of plate objects has some features in comparison with its functioning as the independent 2D editor. In the prepared drawing it is necessary to specify contours using Contour /

Simple contour and Contour / User defined contour commands.

After pressing

Simple contour it is necessary first to specify elements of external contour, and then elements of internal contours (if they are). After that closed contours should be painted in dark blue color. Corresponding contours can be selected only in the event that they are closed.

Simultaneously with pressing one of these buttons the Contour selection dialog box invokes, in which after specifying all contours it is necessary to press either

ОК button, or mouse right button, or SPACE key. The area between the selected contours will be painted in grey color. It means, that the program has adequately understood, what area will be a contour.

Note. Contour is not defined if it is created using lines connected not by means of control points, and, for example, by "Normal" object snap. To define such contour it is necessary to break a line on which the perpendicular has been dropped using Modify / Break at Point command.

Fig. 1.11 Contour is undefined

User defined contour command is used when ambiguity of contour definition takes place. In this case it is necessary to select required contour elements clicking serially the mouse left button. If the previous element was highlighted, and the subsequent is not, there is no connection between these elements i.e. the contour is non-closed.

It is possible to set contour using hatch: Draw / Hatch / Simple Hatch or Draw / Hatch /

User Defined commands. It is possible to save plate object in APM Graph file *.agp format.

After the contour will be painted in grey color select File / Ready command to transfer plate in

APM Structure3D. In the appeared dialog box it is necessary to set height (z coordinate) where the plate will be created.

Fig. 1.12 Height of plate location dialog box

APM Graph APM Structure3DFE Mesh in APM Structure3D

Fig. 1.13 Plate object with internal nodes

23

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Import from

*.dxf, *.agr

Contour /

Contour /

Drawing tools

APM Graph

Simple contour

Contour creation ways

Block APM Graph:

- current drawing block;

- block library.

Parametric model APM Graph:

- from file;

- from library.

Contour selection ways (commands)

User defined contour

Draw / Hatch /

Simple Hatch

Draw / Hatch /

User Defined

APM Structure3D

All commands which are used for editing of plates are accessible:

Editing of existing plates:

Edit /

Edit Object,

Draw / Node /

By Coordinates,

Tools /

Node Alignment,

Tools /

Rotate, etc.

Creation/Addition of new plates:

Tools /

Copy + Tools / Paste,

Tools /

Loft, Tools / Mirror,

Tools /

Polar Array, etc.

Plate object editing

APM Graph

It is possible to edit only one or several plates, laying in one plane. Use Draw / Plate Object / Edit Plate command selecting one or several plates previously.

Editing of existing plates:

Modify /

Edit, Modify / Modify, Modify / Move,

Modify /

Rotate, Modify / Scale, etc.

Creation/Addition of new plates:

Modify /

Copy, Modify / Mirror,

Modify /

Rectangular Array,

Modify /

Polar Array, Draw / Block / Insert Block,

Draw / Block /

Insert Object from DB, etc.

– Editing is impossible when plate nodes displace outside plane (in this case plates will not change and new nodes will be created.

– When editing group of plates created on the basis of the block or parametrical model the system gives warning.

Restrictions at creation and editing of plates

– It is possible to create several plates by one operation.

– If contour breaks or hatch deletes at plate editing it is necessary to set it anew.

– When modification of plate group created on the basis of parametrical models with identical variables it is necessary to check Recalc. all variables option.

– Editing of plate group created on the basis of the block or parametrical model is possible both in group and alone.

– To finish editing activate File / Ready command.

Fig. 1.14

Warning about plate’s modification

To generate plate object mesh it is necessary to select it, set maximum side length using Draw /

Plate Object / Mesh Options command and then press Create Mesh button. Thus in all nodes located inside plate contour internal plate nodes will be created. To display plate FE mesh press

Plate Object Mesh button on Filters toolbar.

It is possible to set various meshing parameters of different plates. In case of poor meshing quality (very large or, contrary, very small mesh) it is necessary to set for the selected plates other meshing parameters and generate FE mesh anew.

If meshing parameters are not set for all or some plates FE meshing will be executed automatically according to default parameters before calculation.

To delete previously generated mesh select plate and press Delete Mesh command in the Mesh

Parameters dialog box invoked by Draw / Plate Object / Mesh Options command.

24

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 1.15 Plate Object Mesh Parameters dialog box

To edit plate object it is necessary to select plate and to activate Draw / Plate Object / Edit Plate command. Thus selected plate will be opened in APM Graph editor.

Previously created mesh on plate object can be divided into plate finite elements with the help of

Draw / Plate Object / Explode Plate command.

If during modeling meshing of rods intersected with plate was carried out new FE mesh can be generated in associative mode.

To do this select a plate and press Draw / Plate Object / Edit Plate command. Editing in APM

Graph allows to take into account all nodes inside plate contour providing associative connection between finite elements and plate objects. Select File / Ready command to switch APM Structure3D.

Now at calculation the mesh will be generated with new nodes. Thus, at FE meshing for the plate two conditions are considered simultaneously:

Internal nodes and contour nodes.

Plate meshing parameters.

During modeling deletion of intermediate nodes is possible also. In this case associative meshing will be carried out accounting existing nodes.

Fig. 1.16 Plate editing with associative meshing

View Filters

In editor, the construction can be represented in many ways. While working with editor, one is often faced with the necessity to represent only elements of a certain class, for example, only nodes and loads applied to them, and to hide other elements. Besides, some elements can be represented in many ways. To control the visualization level special tools, named Filters, are used in editor. Filters define whether a certain element is shown or not, and on what level. Rods can be shown on three visualization levels:

25

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 1.17 Rods show

Plates are also represented with the help of three visualization levels:

Fig. 1.18 Plates show

Solid elements:

Fig. 1.19 Solids show

All view filters are available in the View filters (fig. 1.20) and Extra view filters (fig. 1.21) toolbars.

Fig. 1.20 View filters toolbar

View Filters / Nodes

Command: show/hide nodes

Shortcut:

View Filters / Node Numbers

Command: show/hide nodes numbers

Shortcut:

View Filters / Node Local CS

Command: show/hide nodes local coordinate systems

Shortcut:

View Filters / Wireframe Rods

Command: show/hide rods as wireframe models

Shortcut:

View Filters / Wireframe Cross-sections

26

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Command: show/hide rods cross-sections as wireframe models with sections

Shortcut:

View Filters / Solid Cross-sections

Command: show/hide rods cross-sections as solid models with sections

Shortcut:

View Filters / Only Current Cross-section

Command: show/hide only current section (which is active on Current parameters toolbar)

Shortcut:

View Filters / Rod (Beam/Truss/Cable) Local CS

Command: show/hide local coordinate system of rod elements

Shortcut:

View Filters / Vertical Rods

Command: show/hide vertical rods (slope angle to Z axis is no more 15°)

Shortcut:

View Filters / Inclined Rods

Command: show/hide inclined rods (slope angle is in range 15°-75

° to Z axis)

Shortcut:

View Filters / Horizontal Rods

Command: show/hide horizontal rods (slope angle to Z axis is no less 75°)

Shortcut:

View Filters / Flat Plates

Command: show/hide flat plates as flat polygons

Shortcut:

View Filters / Wireframe Plates

Command: show/hide wireframe plates in thickness view

Shortcut:

View Filters / Solid Plates

Command: show/hide solid plates in thickness view

Shortcut:

View Filters / Plate Local CS

Command: show/hide plates coordinate systems

Shortcut:

View Filters / Plate Normals

Command: show/hide plate normals

Shortcut:

27

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

View Filters / Plate Object Mesh

Command: show/hide plate object mesh

Shortcut:

View Filters / Solid Elements

Command: show/hide solid elements sides as flat polygons

Shortcut:

View Filters / Wireframe Solid Elements

Command: show/hide solid elements as wireframe models

Shortcut:

View Filters / Solid Elements with Lighting

Command: show/hide solid elements with lighting

Shortcut:

View Filters / Solid Local CS

Command: show/hide solid local coordinate system

Shortcut:

View Filters / Elastic Links

Command: show/hide elastic links

Shortcut:

View Filters / Couplings

Command: show/hide couplings

Shortcut:

View Filters / Rigid/elastic Supports

Command: show/hide supports

Shortcut:

View Filters / One-Dir Rigid Supports

Command: show/hide one-direction rigid supports

Shortcut:

View Filters / Node Loads

Command: show/hide nodal loads

Shortcut:

View Filters / Rod Loads

Command: show/hide rod loads

Shortcut:

View Filters / Plate Loads

Command: show/hide plate loads

Shortcut:

28

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

View Filters / Solid Loads

Command: show/hide solid loads

Shortcut:

View Filters / Snow Loads

Command: show/hide snow load

Shortcut:

View Filters / Wind Loads

Command: show/hide wind load

Shortcut:

View Filters / Node Masses

Command: show/hide node masses as concentrated masses

Shortcut:

View Filters / Contact Elements

Command: show/hide contact elements

Shortcut:

View Filters / Contact Elements Local CS

Command: show/hide local coordinate system of contact elements

Shortcut:

View Filters / Target Elements

Command: show/hide target elements

Shortcut:

View Filters / Target Elements Local CS

Command: show/hide local coordinate system of target elements

Shortcut:

View Filters / Center of Mass

Command: show/hide center of mass

Shortcut:

View Filters / Only Selected Elements

Command: show/hide only selected elements

Shortcut:

View Filters / Zero Level

Command: show/hide Z zero level (for wind load setting)

Shortcut:

View Filters / Dimension Scale

Command: show/hide dimension scale

Shortcut:

Fig. 1.21 Extra view filters toolbar

29

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Extra View Filters / Node Load Values

Command: show/hide values of loads on nodes

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Plate Thickness Map

Command: show/hide plate thickness in view of thickness map

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Plate Pressure Map

Command: show/hide plate pressure in view of pressure map

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Plate Pressure Values

Command: show/hide values of pressure on plates

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Plate Snow Pressure Map

Command: show/hide plate snow pressure in view of pressure map

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Plate Wind Pressure Map

Command: show/hide plate wind pressure in view of pressure map

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Contact Elements Normal Stiffness Map

Command: show/hide normal stiffness of contact elements in view of stiffness map. It is necessary to set result range previously in dialog box (min and max values)

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Contact Elements Tangent Stiffness Map

Command: show/hide tangent stiffness of contact elements in view of stiffness map. It is necessary to set result range previously in dialog box (min and max values)

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Fictive Contact Elements and Normal Stiffness Map

Command: show/hide fictive contact elements and normal stiffness in view of stiffness map. It is necessary to set result range previously in dialog box (min and max values)

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Fictive Contact Elements and Tangent Stiffness Map

Command: show/hide fictive contact elements and tangent stiffness in view of stiffness map. It is necessary to set result range previously in dialog box (min and max values)

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Value Range

Command allows to set value range for extra view filters maps.

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Capture Image

30

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Command saves current model view into image *.bmp or *.jpg. After command activation type in image file name

Shortcut:

Extra View Filters / Design Element Names

Command: show/hide names of design elements

Shortcut:

Layers

When designing a construction of high complexity, user has to operate with a large number of elements. To make it more efficient, elements are stored in groups called layers. By default, all elements are stored in one layer. User can create new layers, assign names to them, select an active layer, switch them on/off, and remove them. Editor always has one active layer, in which currently created elements are placed. Elements that belong to a layer that is switched off are not shown on the screen and are not accessible for selection and modification. Selected elements can be moved from the layers they belong to, to the active layer. When the layer that contains some elements is deleted the latter are moved to the active layer. Operating with layers manager is initiated via Tools /

Layers command. To place selected elements into the active layer Tools / Add to Current Layer command is used. Option "on/off" layer and deletion of empty layers are provided.

Operations with elements

Select element or group of elements

To perform various operations with the construction or some part of the construction it is necessary to select the elements involved into the operations beforehand. Elements can be selected one by one or in a group. For this purpose use Edit /

Select Object, Edit / Select Group or

Edit / Complex Selection menu commands, respectively. Commands Edit / Complex Selection

by Box and Edit / Complex Selection by Circle work in two modes: selection of object or selection of object group by box frame or circle.

Move

Any part of the construction can be moved to arbitrary position or joined with another part. This operation works with selected elements. An example of using this operation is shown below. This operation is initiated with Edit / Edit Object command. For detailed description of this command see Chapter 2 Command Reference.

31

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 1.22 Move operations

Copy / Paste

This pair of operations allows user to create a copy of a selected part of a construction in memory buffer and then paste the copied elements from memory into the construction editor. When pasted, the copy is selected and can be moved to the desired position. The copied elements can be pasted repeatedly.

See Tools / Copy and Tools / Paste commands from Chapter 2 Command Reference.

Multiply Structure

This tool allows user to create multi-sectional constructions. The parameters of the operation are intersectional distance vector and number of sections. Above that, the operation allows one to create solid elements from plates. When creating solid elements with multiplication tool it is necessary to remember that besides solid elements, plates are also created by copying the initial one on the multiplication vector. The operation is initiated with Tools / Loft command. See Chapter 2

Command Reference.

Examples of Multiply command application for different constructions with different parameters are shown below.

Fig. 1.23 Multiply operation

32

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Loft

Loft operation can be considered as modified Multiply Structure operation. It creates multisectional constructions with linear dimensions alteration and sections rotation. The parameters of the operation are extrusion vector of one section, number of sections, dimension alteration factor and sections rotation angle. Operation works with selected elements. Multiplication vector is set for single section, therefore, for N sections the aggregate multiplication vector will be N times bigger. Rotation angle and dimension alteration factor are set for the total number of sections, therefore, for each section the rotation angle will be divided into N and dimensions will be altered linearly. When creating solid elements out of plates, one should remember that besides solid elements plates are also created by copying the initial one on extrusion vector. For more detailed see Tools / Loft command

Chapter 2 Command Reference. Examples of structures built using this operation are shown below.

Fig. 1.24 Results of Loft operation

Rotate

Rotate operation allows user to rotate elements in the view plane, i.e. around the vector perpendicular to viewplane, therefore it is necessary to switch into the right view before performing rotation. Rotation is performed around the center of rotation. The operation works with selected elements. See Tools / Rotate command Chapter 2 Command Reference.

Mirror

Mirror operation allows user to create a mirror (symmetric) copy of a construction or part of a construction. Operation works with selected elements. Symmetry is built with respect to a symmetry plane, perpendicular to the view. To set the symmetry plane it is necessary to draw a line

– symmetry plane trace in the viewplane. For Tools / Mirror command see Chapter 2 Command Reference.

Polar array

Polar array operation allows user to create a polar array of elements of the construction or a part of the construction. Operation works with selected elements. The parameters of polar array are rotation vector and full rotation angle. The operation can not only to copy but also to join successive copies of the constructions with rods, plates and solid elements (see Multiply command). Rotation angle is set for the total number of sections; therefore with N copies for each section rotation angle will be divided into N. An example of Polar Array operation execution, for arc of rod elements and creation of lateral elements, is shown below. For more details on Tools / Polar Array command see Chapter 2

Command Reference.

33

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 1.25 Polar array operation

Nodes alignment

Nodes alignment operation allows user to align selected nodes by the coordinates of the base node. With the help of this tool one can “project” nodes onto a plate that goes through the basic node and is parallel to one of coordinate planes, or onto a plane that goes through the basic node and is parallel to one of coordinate axes. For more details on Tools / Node Alignment command see

Chapter 2 Command Reference.

Fig. 1.26 Nodes alignment operation

Supports

The editor operates with different types of supports. Support in editor is regarded as a parameter of a node. Support is defined by the following parameters: restrictions on node displacement along X,

Y, Z axes and restriction on node rotation around X, Y, Z axes. In an arbitrary node of a construction, displacement can be restricted in all or only in some directions. In general, it is possible to restrict 6 displacements: 3 linear and 3 rotational. Setting supports is about selecting restricted degrees of freedom (motion) of a node. Freedom degrees

’ directions are set in the node coordinate system. By default, coordinate system of a node coincides with global coordinate system. It is possible to restrict node displacement in any direction by appropriate setting of a local coordinate system in it.

Draw / Support /

Rigid Support and Draw / Support / One-Dir Rigid Support commands set a support placement mode.

Besides, elastic supports can be set in a node. Elastic supports are characterized by stiffness for corresponding degree of freedom (motion). For translational motion, it is a force in case of a unit displacement of a node in a given direction, for rotational motion, it is a torque at one-degree rotation around a given axis. Elastic support is set for the local coordinate system of a node by Draw / Support

/

Elastic Support command.

34

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Loads

Loads that act on a construction can be applied as nodal loads, rod element loads, and plate loads. Moreover, a load can be applied to a construction through supports displacement or as its dead weight.

Node loads

Concentrated forces and moments can be applied to a node. Nodal load is set in a global coordinate system. Nodal loads are set using Loads / Force on Node, Loads /

Moment on

Node menu commands.

Rod loads

The following types of loads can be applied to a bar element: concentrated forces and moments, trapezoid and uniformly distributed forces and moments, temperature loads, prestrain. Concentrated forces and moments can be applied in an arbitrary point of a rod and are set in a coordinate system of the rod. Distributed forces can be set both in the coordinate system of a rod and in the global coordinate system. Distributed moments are set in the coordinate system of a rod. Loads are applied to a rod using Loads /

Local Load on Rod, Loads / Global Load on Rod, Loads /

Rod

Temperature and Loads /

Rod Prestrain menu commands.

Rod temperature

Temperature load can be applied to rod elements using Loads / Rod Temperature menu command. Temperature values are defined as shown in the Fig. below

– 8 points in general case.

Fig. 1.27 Rod temperature in points

Rod Prestrain

For a rod element, it is possible to set prestrain in the form of: lengths of the non-deformed element, relative deformation, force operating in an element, or strain. Prestrain is set using Loads /

Rod Prestrain command.

Plate and solid loads

Plate load is represented as uniform load on a plate using Loads /

Plate Distributed Load

and Loads / Plate Linear Distributed Load menu commands, or on a solid element using Loads /

Pressure on Solid.

Support displacements

A load can be applied to a structure through of supports’ displacements. Displacements can be translational and rotational. In calculations, only the displacements in direction of the fixed degrees of

35

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

freedom are taken into account.

Supports’ displacements are set in a local coordinate system of a node using Loads / Support Displacements menu command.

36

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Dead weight

Dead weight is applied to the whole model and can be a part of any load case with an arbitrary proportionality factor. Dead weight can be specified using Loads / Load Cases menu command.

Acceleration

Acceleration is applied to the whole structure can be a part of any load case. It is possible to set linear and angular accelerations by Loads / Acceleration / Linear Acceleration and Loads /

Acceleration /

Angular Acceleration respectively.

Concentrated mass

Concentrated mass can be placed in any structure node using Draw / Node / Mass command. This mass is taken into account when calculating eigen frequencies and forced oscillations.

Before assigning mass to a group of nodes select them using Edit / Select Object, Edit /

Select Group or Edit / Complex Selection by Box and Edit /

Circle commands. Mass values are set in the node local coordinate system.

Complex Selection by

Snow load

Snow load can be applied to structure in automatic mode in accordance with building regulations

1

.

Snow load can be applied to plate/shell elements only. In order to apply this load to rod elements one should cover the area in question with plates with zero stiffness (Properties / Enable Plate Stiffness menu command) so that their only function should be load transfer. Snow load can be defined using

Loads /

Plate Snow Load menu command. See Chapter 2 Command reference for further information.

Wind load

Wind load is a pressure load varying with height of the structure. Average component of this load can be defined in automatic mode in accordance with building regulations

2

. Following parameters need to be specified: aerodynamic factor, standardized wind pressure (by selecting wind region, or manually) and region type.

Wind load can be applied to plate/shell elements only. In order to apply this load to rod elements one should cover the area in question with plates with zero stiffness (Properties / Enable Plate

Stiffness menu command) so that their only function should be load transfer. Wind load can be defined using Loads / Plate Wind Load menu command. See Chapter 2 Command reference for further information.

Temperature load on plates

Temperature can be applied either as gradient load varying with thickness or as varying over plate surface. These loads are applied using Loads / Plate Temperature and Loads /

Plate Linear

Temperature menu commands. Generally, temperature is defined by two values at each node, one at surface with positive z coordinate (along Z axis in the local coordinate system) and one on the opposite surface.

1

SNiP 2.01.07-85* w/modif. 2003 (Loads and effects) as in p. 5.1*.

37

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 1.28 Plate temperature in points

Temperature at node

In order to make thermal calculations one has to define boundary conditions - temperature in structural nodes. It can be done by Loads / Node Temperature menu command. Results from thermal analysis include temperature distribution over the model in question, which - in turn - can be used in further static analysis.

Note: thermal analysis must be done before or at the same time with static analysis in order to take temperature distribution into account.

Importing structure model

Structure model can be imported into APM Structure3D from *.DXF files, from *.FRM files created in APM Studio or from *.DAT and *.BDF files (NASTRAN Bulk Data File). An example of model imported from APM Studio and analyzed in APM Structure3D is shown below.

Fig. 1.29 Model imported from APM Studio

The design model created in Autodesk Revit Structure can be transferred to APM Structure3D.

Conformity of transferred elements is presented in the table below.

Table 1.2

– Conformity of transferred elements

Autodesk Revit Structure APM Structure 3D

Beam

Column

Brace

Rod

Rod

Rod

38

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Truss

Wall

Floor

Slab

Truss

Plate

Plate

Plate

Boundary Conditions

Point Load

Line Load / Line Load with Host

Support

Concentrated force

Local load on rod / normal distributed force

Besides the elements listed in table 1.2 material parameters, rod sections and plate thickness are transferred for all elements from Autodesk Revit Structure to APM Structure 3D.

For correct model conversion it is necessary, that the following information has been presented in revit.ini file:

[ExternalCommands]

ECCount=1

ECName1=Save Model as Structure3D

ECClassName1=APMRevitToStructure.RevitStruct3D

ECDescription1=The user can select several of the views and when OK is clicked a new sheet is generated.

To transfer model use Tool / External Tools / Save Model as Structure3D command of Autodesk Revit

Structure. After the end of converting process save the received file in APM Structure3D *.frm format.

Example of transferred steel structure model is presented on Fig. below.

Fig. 1.30 Steel structure model in Autodesk Revit Structure 2008

Fig. 1.31 Steel structure model in APM Structure3D

39

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

APM Structure3D supports Import/Export of Lira text files. Conformity of transferred elements is presented in the table below.

Table 1.3

– Conformity of transferred elements

Lira APM Structure3D Comments

1. Nodes

Constraint

Release

Support

Release

Hinge at rod end rigid constraint

Rigid links

2. Rods

FE type: 2, 3, 5, 10, 205, 210, 309, 410 Rod-Beam

FE type: 1, 4

FE type: 310

Stiffness

Local CS

Section type

Sections: standard

Sections: steel from database

Sections: arbitrary geometry

3. Plates

FE type: 11, 12, 19, 21, 22, 23, 24, 27,

30, 41, 42, 44, 221, 222, 223, 224, 227,

230, 241, 242, 244, 281, 291, 292, 294,

341, 342, 344, 441, 442, 444, 521, 522,

523, 524, 527, 530.

FE type: 45, 46, 47

Rigid links

Rod-Truss

Rod-Cable

Local CS

Section type

Section + Material

Section + Material

Section + Material

DKT plate with fictitious stiffness for all sections, except the standard: angle, nonsymmetrical T-section for standard sections cross,

1. with 3D visualization;

2. section geometric parameters are calculated in APM

Structure3D

1. without 3D visualization;

2. section geometric parameters

– for axisymmetric sections only, material properties

1. without 3D visualization;

2. section geometric parameters and material properties

8-noded FE 27, 30, 227, 230,

527, 530 as 4-noded

MITC plate with fictitious stiffness

Thickness + Material

Stiffness

4. Loads to node in Local CS and

Global CS

Force

Moment

5. Loads to rod in Local CS and

Global CS

Concentrated force

Concentrated moment

Distributed force

Distributed moment

Trapezoidal load

6. Plate load in LCS and GCS

Uniform distributed load

Non-uniform distributed load

Force at node

Moment at node

Concentrated force

Concentrated moment

Distributed force

Distributed moment

Trapezoidal load

Plate load

Global CS

Global CS

Local CS

Local CS

Local CS

Local CS non-uniform distributed force and moment in Local CS

40

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

7. Load cases

Dead weight (distributed load)

User defined

8. Materials

Distributed load

User defined for rods: linear distributed load for plates: area distributed load load case name and loads see rod and plate stiffness

APM Structure3D allows to import rod model from started Kompas3D V11

– Steel Structures 3D

(developer "Ascon") using File / Import from Kompas3D menu command. Transfer of nodes, rods, materials and sections taking into account their orientation is supported. For the subsequent analysis it is necessary to set supports and loads in APM Structure3D.

Load cases

Load case can involve combination of loads of any kinds and is characterized by name and two states: on/off and active/inactive. Behavior of a construction can be calculated for any load case or a combination of load cases. Operating with load cases is similar to that with layers. If a load case is switched off, its loads will not be displayed on the screen. If a load case is active, a new load will be placed into the active load case by default.

For creating a new load case or editing an existing load case Loads / used. This command calls a Load Case dialog shown below.

Load Case command is

Fig. 1.32 Load Case dialog box

To create a new load case click on Add button.

To change an old load case click on it in the list and push Modify button.

To remove a load case, select it in the list and push Delete button.

Push Set Active button to make the selected load case active.

Dynamic load cases

APM Structure3D allows automatic application of seismic and dynamic wind loadings in accordance with building regulations

3

.

All dynamic forces are defined using dynamic load case. All operations with dynamic load case are similar to those with static one, described above. It is recommended to use separate dynamic cases for each loading with the subsequent creation of load and code combinations.

Note: Dynamic wind load is a component of static wind load. To perform calculation for simultaneous static and dynamic wind action it is necessary to set static and dynamic wind in separate

load cases and make calculation from its load combination.

Use Loads / Dynamic Load Case menu command to create, modify or delete a load case.

Dialog window is shown below.

3

SNiP II-7-81 from 01.01.1996, SNiP II-7-81* from 01.01.2000 and SNiP 2.01.07-85.

41

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 1.33 Dynamic Case dialog box

Press Add button to create a new dynamic load case and then select the required type in the dialog window shown below.

Fig. 1.34 New Dynamic Case dialog box

After pressing OK button new dialog window with seismic loading parameters will appear.

Seismic load direction is defined in direction group by projections on global Cartesian axes.

Depending on the desired accuracy, certain number of eigen shapes can be taken into account. Soil

category, seismic type and other parameters are selected according to building regulations.

Below you can find the description of controls of the dialog box in question.

Fig. 1.35 Seismic SNiP II-7-81* dialog box

Direction of seismic loading is set by cosines values of angles with respect to axes of the global coordinate system in Direction boxes.

Box Number of eigen shapes defines number of eigen shapes which will be used in seismic calculation.

Soil category and Seismic type are selected in accordance with building regulations.

In

Factors boxes, factors

K

1

- damage and

K

- structure type are set.

Correction factor is set for initial data correction. This factor can take any positive value, and is used as multiplication factor with the results of inertial forces calculation from seismic influence.

42

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Upper limit of modal masses which should be ignored in calculation - frequencies will be ignored in seismic calculation if their modal masses are less than specified.

When calculating seismic effect, the design loads are accounted for by setting concentrated masses in corresponding nodes (see Chapter 1 section Concentrated masses).

The description of Wind pulsation dialog box is presented in Fig. below.

Fig. 1.36 Wind Pulsation dialog box

Load case edit box

the name of dynamic load case in the case list.

Static load case

– name of load case with static wind load.

Eigen shape numbers

number of considered eigenvalues (4…6 recommended).

Lowest point Z coordinate being acted by wind

can differs from coordinate of the lowest structure point.

Structure width at wind front

– structure width normal to wind direction.

Structure depth along wind direction

– length of structure along wind direction.

SNiP 2.01.07-85 Parameters

wind region, region type, wind direction, logarithmic decrement.

Correction factor is set for initial data correction. This factor can be arbitrary positive value and multiply the results of inertial forces calculation.

Load combination

Load combination represents a linear combination of load cases. For creation of a load combination Loads / Load Combination command is used. This command calls a Load Combination dialog box shown below. To add load case into a combination it is necessary to select it in a load case list box, enter a factor for it and press Add button. To change a load case factor select the desired load case from the load case list box or factors list box, enter a new value in the Factor box and press the

Modify button. To remove a load case from a combination, select the former in the load case list box or factors list box and press the Delete button.

It is provided to create several load combinations. Press the New button to create combination and type in combination name in the appeared dialog.

To add load case in combination select the combination name in the list.

43

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 1.37 Load Combination dialog box

Code combination

Calculation of the most dangerous code combination for rods is made on the basis of extreme values of several groups of parameters, namely: normal and tangent stresses in characteristic points of sections, longitudinal and lateral forces. Selection principles of load combinations and their factors are stated in building regulations

4

.

To design code combination it is necessary to specify all the load cases involved. For this purpose, firstly, select load case from the list Case name where all available load cases are presented.

Secondly, from the list Case Type, select the desired type. Types that are presented in this list, namely

"Constant", "Temporary long", "Temporary short", "Specific", - comply with building regulations. "Static wind" load case is set as a separate type only one wind load can be used in code combination calculation. In other respects static wind load case contributes to the code combination as a usual temporary short load.

Fig. 1.38 Code Combination dialog box

Proportion of duration

defines the value of load component (in proportion of unit) that is considered as temporary long in a given load case. Remaining part is considered as short-term. For constant and long-term load cases the duration is equal to 1; for short-term

– 0.

Extra coefficient

- additional multiplier for factors with which efforts from every load case are presented in the rated load combination (these factors are selected according to building regulations).

If a checkmark is placed in the Consider alternating-sign box, the corresponding load case participates in the code combination two times (both, as it is and with the opposite sign). In particular, it is used to specify seismic load. Sign-alternation can be set for Specific load case type only.

4

SNiP 2.01.07-85.

44

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

After all parameters are specified, the load case is added to the code combination by pressing

Add to Combination button. To change load case parameters select the load case, change the required parameters and press Modify button.

By pressing Group>>> button there is a list of load groups in additional part of a dialog box.

Create button invokes dialog box for creation of loading groups: alternative, associated, coacting for accounting of additional conditions of code combination.

Fig. 1.39 Additional part of Code Combination dialog box

If Consider special load combination according to item 2.1 SNiP II-7-81* (seismic) box is checked, code combination coefficients are used from table 2 of item 2.1 SNiP II-7-81*. If this option is unchecked, code combination coefficients are used according to item 1.12 SNiP 2.01.07-85*.

When generating code combinations the following rules are used:

Each load case or load combination can enter only once into a code combination except for those for which the duration is non-equal to 0 and 1. The duration shows what time loading is to be considered as long-term. Remaining part of time loading is considered as short-term.

Only one special load case can enter into a special code combination.

Only one wind load case can enter into a special code combination.

Load cases of groups included into code combinations takes into account group type: alternative, associated, coacting.

Clicking Calculation

button initiates the algorithm that calculates the most severe load combinations.

Current parameters

To accelerate selection of a current layer, material, section or load case Current parameters toolbar with drop-down menu are used.

Fig. 1.40 Current Parameters toolbar

Layers group

– invokes Layers dialog box

– shows/hides colored layers

– allows to place selected objects to an active layer

– drop-down menu for current layer selection

Material group

– invokes Material dialog box

– shows/hides color materials

– drop-down menu for current material selection

45

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Rod cross-section group

– invokes Cross-section manager dialog box

– allows to assign cross-section to all rods

– allows to assign cross-section to selected rods

– drop-down menu for current section selection

Plate thickness group

– allows to set thickness to all plates

– allows to set thickness to selected plates

– allows to show only plates of current thickness

– drop-down menu for plates current thickness setting

Load cases group

– invokes Load cases dialog box

– shows/hides color load cases

– drop-down menu for current load case selection

46

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 2. Command reference

This chapter includes a complete description of all menu commands and dialog box options in the

APM Structure3D program.

File menu

Commands of this menu allow user to create a new construction or a cross-section and to work with files and printing.

New / Structure

The command creates a new frame construction.

Shortcuts: or Ctrl+N

New / Cross-Section

The command creates a new cross-section.

New / Joint

The command invokes APM Joint for threaded, riveted or welded joint calculation.

Model from Template

The command calls the dialog window shown below, and allows to create a rod model using standard templates.

Fig. 2.1 Models from template

Fig. 2.2 Frame, type 4

After pressing the button with the Fig. of the required model there appears a dialog in which it is possible to set the dimensions and other parameters of the pattern.

Extra Models from Template

47

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The command calls the dialog window shown below, and allows to create a rod model using extra templates.

Fig. 2.3 Models from template

Open

The command loads previously saved files:

APM Structure3D Files (*.FRM)

Cross-Section Files (*.WCR)

Joint Files(*.WJT)

Plate Files (*.agr)

Connection Files (*.agr)

Shortcuts: or Ctrl+O

Fig. 2.4 Open dialog box

Close

The command closes the active document. If the active document has been modified since the last save, the dialog box will appear on the screen and offer you to save the changes.

48

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.5 Save changes dialog box

Save

The command saves the active document into a file. If the document has not been saved before, a standard dialog box appears on the screen.

File can be saved without calculation results. To do that check Save without results option.

To activate autosaving use dialog invoked by File / Settings menu command.

Shortcuts: or Ctrl+S

Fig. 2.6 Save As dialog box

Save As

The command saves the document into a file always requesting user for the file name. Besides, you can save document without results which will result in a smaller file size. This command is similar to Save command.

Import

The command allows to import documents from files:

DXF (*.dxf);

DAT/BDF (NASTRAN Bulk Data File) (*.dat, *.bdf);

Lira files (*.txt);

MS Access Data Exchange (*.mdb)

The command imports DXF drawings, DAT / BDF (NASTRAN Bulk Data File) and SFM files (finite elements mesh generated in APM Studio) into the active document. For proper functioning you have to explode the construction into composing elements (AutoCAD command explode). The following DFX file objects are transformed into models of construction: LINE, POLYLINE, 3DFACE.

49

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Export

The command allows to export models to:

DXF 2D files (*.dxf);

DXF 3D files (*.dxf);

DAT/BDF (NASTRAN Bulk Data File) (*.dat, *.bdf);

APM Graph Document (*.agr);

Lira files (*.txt)

The command exports finite elements model to a file of format *.DAT / *.BDF (NASTRAN Bulk

Data File). It can save frame model in DXF file format. All rods are converted to LINE objects and plates are converted to 3DFACE objects.

Import from Kompas3D

The command allows to import rod model from Kompas3D V11

– Steel Structures 3D (developer

"Ascon"). Transfer of nodes, rods, materials and sections taking into account their orientation is supported.

Properties

The command invokes message box which contains information about current file version and program version.

Shortcut: .

Settings

The command invokes Settings dialog box, where you can set APM Structure3D global parameters.

Fig. 2.7 Settings dialog box

50

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

 use more than one processor;

 save log file on disk;

 autosave after calculation;

 autosave with defined period during work;

 besides those autosave modes automatic restart of the program ("restart manager") is provided in case of incorrect shutdown. The model for restart saves each 2 hours;

 set a path to temporary file folder;

 select system of view rotation and display rotational cube.

Print

Shortcut: .

The command allows you to print construction data and calculation results. This command calls the dialog box shown below. Set checkmark next to the information you want to have printed.

Shortcuts: or Ctrl+P

Fig. 2.8 Printing Items dialog box (printing data and results tabs)

Button Select under Stress map checkbox is used for stress component selection. For more detailed explanation about stress components see description of Calculation menu and Chapter 5.

Button Select under Force Diagram checkbox allows you to select forces for frame force epure calculation. For more detailed description see description of Results menu and Chapter 5.

Button Select under Forced oscillation checkbox invokes following dialog box. This dialog box allows you to select time moments for base reactions and stress map.

Fig. 2.9 Forced oscillation selection dialog box

51

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Printer Setup

The command allows you to setup a printing device.

Most Recently Used Files

The command opens most recently used file. Command name corresponds to the file name.

Menu can contain up to four commands of this kind.

Exit

The command closes current file and quits the program.

Edit menu

Commands of this menu allow you to select objects, invert selection and undo/redo one of last issued command.

All commands of select/unselect

– are universal. In case of a single mouse click on an object the command works in the mode of a single select / cancel selection By pressed Shift button the unselection of earlier selected objects doesn't act.

Complex Selection by Box

This command is universal selector of editor. Clicking once command works in select object mode. Holding left button selection makes by box frame as in select group mode.

To switch editor in complex selection mode press Esc key.

Shortcut:

Complex Deselection by Box

Holding left button deselection makes by box frame as in select group mode.

Shortcut:

Complex Selection by Circle

This command is universal selector of editor. Clicking once command works in select object mode. Holding left button selection makes by circle frame as in select group mode.

Shortcut:

Complex Deselection by Circle

Holding left button deselection makes by circle frame as in select group mode.

Shortcut:

Select Object

The command enables object selection mode

– you can select rods, nodes, plates, and solid elements.

Select Group

The command turns on the selection mode for a group of elements. To select a group of elements user has to an auxiliary rectangle in any view so that it should cover elements he wants to select. The first mouse click sets the first corner of the rectangle; the second mouse click set the opposite one.

Right mouse click cancels operation.

Making selection with this command from left to right all elements which completely gets to a frame will be selected. Making selection from right to left all elements which are crossed by a frame will be selected and if one node of element at least lies inside a frame.

52

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Edit Object

The command switches editor into the mode which allows selecting elements

– nodes, rods, plates etc. To select an element, click close to it. The selected element is highlighted in a different color. When you select another element, the previous element is deselected. But it is possible to select several elements simultaneously. To do that hold SHIFT key while selecting. To deselect individual element click the right mouse button.

This mode allows you also to move selected elements. To do this, place cursor over the selected elements, press left button and holding it drag the selection across the screen. After you release the mouse button the new position will be locked.

You can also use attachment mode to attach selected elements to the specific node. To use attachment mode left-click in the sensitivity zone of the node that you want to attach and then drag the selection in the viewplane to get the node into the sensitivity zone of the node you want to attach to, and release mouse button. As a result, the whole selection moves to connect two nodes. Al coinciding nodes are connected at the same time.

You should remember that if some nodes coincide in the viewplane, then the one nearest to the viewplane will be selected. To select a particular node, it is necessary to move the viewplane closer to the desired element or perform selection in a different viewplane where node projections do not coincide.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.10 Example of movement operation

Invert Selection

The command inverts construction selection.

Select All

This command allows to select all objects of the editor.

Undo

The command cancels last command performed.

Shortcut:

Redo

The command repeats last command cancelled.

Shortcut:

Undo Enable

The command enables/disables undo/redo support.

53

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

View menu

Commands of this menu allow you to change view settings.

Note: before selecting most of these commands it is necessary to activate the view you want to change.

Status Bar

The command toggles status bar on and off.

Plane Position

The command invokes dialog box that allows you to change view plane position. This can be done in two ways: changing viewplane depth or changing viewplane position vector. Method radio-buttons allow you to select any method.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.11 View Position dialog box

Set Depth

The command switches on the mode that allows moving viewplane in the direction, perpendicular to the viewplane itself. This mode is useful when you want to work with different parallel planes. This mode changes the depth only for the main views by moving the plane trace on the screen. For example, you can set depth of the Up view in the Front or Left views. After selecting this command the trace of the chosen viewplane is shown in main views. Depth is set by clicking left mouse button in the view. This mode allows using node attachment.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.12 View depth explanation Fig. 2.13 View depth explanation

Set View Plane by 3 Nodes

The command switches on the mode that allows you to define a viewplane using three selected nodes. After calling the command select sequentially three nodes in any view. As a result, viewplane will be rotated and moved so that its origin will be located in the first node and axes will have the configuration shown in the Fig. above.

Shortcut:

Show Dimension Scale

This command shows dimension scale in active views of editor.

Shortcut:

54

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Dynamic Rotation Mode

The command enables the mode of dynamic view rotation. The first left mouse click in the view starts rotation, mouse movements along vertical and horizontal axes rotate the view at

θ and φ angles, respectively. The second mouse click stops rotation. Right mouse click cancels operation and returns the view to initial rotation.

Shortcut:

Use Local Coordinates

The command enables and disables usage of local coordinates in a view. Local coordinates are

2D coordinates related to the viewplane.

Grid

This command allows changing auxiliary grid settings. A dialog box appears on the screen as shown below.

Shortcut:

Cursor Step

This command allows you to set cursor linear and angular steps and radius of the sensitivity zone of the node. A dialog box appears on the screen, as shown below.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.14 Grid tab Fig. 2.15 Cursor property tab

Palette

This command allows you to change colors of all construction editor elements.

Shortcut:

Units

This command allows you to set units for entering initial data and viewing calculation results of current structure document. Defined units save in APM Structure3D configuration file and will be used for the next created file. A dialog box appears on the screen, as shown below.

Shortcut:

55

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.16 Palette tab Fig. 2.17 Units tab

Scale

This command allows you to change image scale for the active view. A dialog box appears on the screen, as shown below. Reduce buttons allow user to decrease image scale, Enlarge buttons

– increase it. Input box allows you to enter scale value manually.

Shortcut:

Attachment

This command allows you to choose one of the two snapping modes.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.18 Scale tab Fig. 2.19 Attachment tab

Pane View

The command enables the mode of view scrolling.

Shortcut:

56

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Zoom

The command enables the mode of enlarging rectangle region of a view to the whole window.

Shortcut:

T-square On/Of

The command enables / disables T-square tool.

Shortcut:

Zoom In

The command increases image scale.

Shortcut:

Zoom Out

The command decreases image scale.

Shortcut:

Fit to View

The command changes view ratio so that all elements can be seen in the view.

Shortcut:

Settings to All Views

Applies all property sheets settings to all views simultaneously.

View Set / Standard

Default view set with predefined Global CS of each view.

Arbitrary View

Toggles on/off arbitrary view page on/off

Left View

Toggles on/off left view page

Up View

Toggles on/off up view page

Front View

Toggles on/off front view page

Draw menu

This menu commands allow you to create and modify frame constructions.

Node / By Coordinates

The command switches editor into the mode for drawing nodes. To create a new node click in the view in the point with desired coordinates. Right mouse click near the node calls the dialog box which allows you to edit node coordinates.

Shortcut:

57

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.20 Node dialog box

Node / On Rod

The command sets the mode which allows user to create nodes on rod or on the rod extension.

Click left mouse button to select rod, then move the node that appears, using mouse, along the rod axis. Second mouse click locks node position and calls the dialog box which lets you edit node position on rod. Node position can be defined in two ways: with absolute coordinate, counting from one of the rod ends, or with the ratio between full rod length and length of one of its parts. Radio-buttons Node

Position allows you to choose one of the two methods. Radio-buttons Counting from allow to choose one of two nodes as frame. While setting node position using absolute coordinates, this coordinate will be counted from the selected node. While using relative coordinates, the used in the relation will be the one to which the selected node belongs. The selected node is highlighted in all views. Place new

objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed.

Shortcut:

Node / Local Coordinate System

Fig. 2.21 Node on Rod dialog box

The command switches editor into the mode that sets local coordinate system for selected nodes.

In the node-based coordinate system, fastenings, elastic supports, displacements in supports

(movements in the directions of fixed degrees of freedom) are set. To set a coordinate system in one or several nodes, you are to switch on this mode and select the necessary node or one of the selected nodes by clicking on it. Then a dialog box of coordinate system orientation setting will appear on the screen. A local coordinate system is set by three successive rotations of initial coordinate system that coincides with global coordinate system around Z, Y’ and X’’ axes. Y’ and X’’ markings are used instead of Y and X to show that Y and X axes change their orientation after rotation. You can also define a new position of local coordinate system by pressing Specify button and then gradually selecting two points. New X axis will pass through the node and first picked point. Second point defines new XY plane and direction of new Y axis. Z axis is created so that XYZ forms a right-hand system.

Push Delete button to delete a local coordinate system in selected nodes and use global coordinate system.

Shortcut:

58

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.22 Node Local Coordinate System dialog box

Node / Mass

The command switches editor into concentrated mass placing mode. To place mass in a node or a group of nodes click left mouse button on the required node or one of the selected nodes. Node

mass dialog box will appear as a result. Nodes are selected using Complex Selection command.

Mass values are in the local coordinate system of node.

Mass values in particular directions are specified in corresponding edit boxes.

If you want to add mass values to existing ones in a particular node, select radio button Add to

existing. Otherwise, if you want to replace existing mass by new values select radio button Replace

existing. To delete masses in selected nodes select the Delete button.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.23 Node Mass dialog box

Rod / By Coordinates

The command switches on the mode of drawing rods. In this mode, existing rods can be joined and new ones can be created. First click sets the first node, second click

– the second one. If you have selected or created the first node you can undo this command by clicking right mouse button. The command uses attachment mode while joining existing nodes. If you want to create a node instead of selecting an existing one (for example while nodes belong to different planes, but their projections coincide in the viewplane), you should cancel attachment.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.24 Delete Rod dialog box

Rod / By Length and Angle

The command switches on the mode for drawing rod based on its length and direction. A rod can be created only from existing node. Angle can be counted from horizontal or from another rod. To have angle counted from horizontal select node. To have angle counted from rod, select rod first and then select one of its nodes. After that moving mouse set desired angle. Next mouse click locks the

59

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

direction. After that moving mouse you can set only rod length. Last mouse click creates rod. Right mouse click calls a dialog box, which allows you to correct angle and length values, or cancel operation.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.25 Rod dialog box

Rod | Divide Rod into N Rods

The command switches editor into the mode which allows you to split one rod into a number of elements of the equal length. This command invokes a dialog box which allows you to enter the number of rods or the length of rods after dividing. Place new objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.26 Divide Rod dialog box

Pipes| Straight Pipe

The command allows to create straight segment of a pipe with the cross section by a type "ring".

Straight segment of a pipe is being created based on the available nodes.

It is possible to convert existing rods to pipelines. For that you need to set the properties "Pipe

Segment" to these rods.

Shortcut:

Pipes| Tee pipe

The command allows to create a straight segment of the pipeline at any place of whose one can draw the tap at the right angle.

It is possible to convert existing rods to pipelines. For that you need to set the properties "Pipe

Segment" to these rods.

Shortcut:

Pipes| Pipe Bend by 3 Points

60

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The command allows to create curved pipe (a part of a pipeline curved with constant radius) for connection of two straight segments between each other. The curved pipe by three points is also being created as the arc:

First, the center point of the arc is specified;

Then, the node of the first connecting pipeline;

The node of the second pipeline.

We will note, the curved pipe can be created between the straight segments of the pipeline where in the places of the tap connection the pipelines will be tangents to an elbow arc. Therefore the center of the curve, based on these considerations, must be chosen. In all the rest of the cases a message that it's impossible to connect chosen segments with a curved pipe.

Shortcut::

Pipes| Pipe Bend by 2 Rod Ends

The command allows to create a curved pipe (a part of a pipeline curved with constant radius) for connection of two straight segments between each other. Only the nodes of those pipelines which are separating to equal lengths from a point of their intersection can be connected by this command.

Fulfillment of the command needs next:

 click by LMB on the first pipeline that is connected close to the end to which the tap must be join;

Click by LMB on the second pipeline that is connected close to the end with which the tap being connected must be join.

Shortcut:

Pipes| Pipe Bend by 2 Rods and Radius

The command allows to create a curved pipe (a part of a pipeline curved with constant radius) for connection of two straight segments between each other. This command creates an elbow of two pipes (the ones that are being crossed or are not crossed) by the type of creation of rounding between segments. In this case the «extra» parts of pipelines will disappear.

Fulfillment of the command needs next:

Click alternately by LMB on the first pipeline and then on the second pipeline that is connected;

In the dialog window "Elbow Radius" that appeared, one must specify the value of radius with which the tap between bars will be mounted.

The connected straight segments of pipes will extend if a value of radius requiring lengthening of pipelines for their rounding with specified radius is entered and in entering will be connected by the tap with specified radius.

Shortcut:

Plate / Rectangular 4-noded

The command enables a mode for creating rectangular plates. Plate is set by four nodes. In this mode existing nodes can be joined and new ones can be created. First mouse click sets the first node; second mouse click sets the second one and so on. If you have already selected or created the first node right mouse click cancels operation. The command uses attachment mode while selecting existing nodes.

Shortcut:

Plate / Arbitrary 4-noded

The command enables a mode for creating arbitrary 4-noded plates. Present command is similar to the previous one; the difference being that the created plate can represent an arbitrary quadrangle.

Shortcut:

61

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Plate / 3-noded

The command enables a mode of creating 3-node plates. Plate is set by three nodes. In this mode existing nodes can be joined and new ones can be created. First mouse click sets the first node; second mouse click sets the second one and so on. If you have already selected or created the first node right mouse click cancels operation. The command uses attachment mode while selecting existing nodes.

Shortcut:

Plate / Arbitrary with Mesh

The command enables mesh generation mode. This mode allows you to split a complex straightline contour down to finite elements

– plates. Every mouse click adds one node to a circuit, to close a circuit it is necessary to select its first node. It is also possible to add individual nodes belonging to a circuit. Double click on a node set

’s individual node that will be included into breaking mesh. ENTER key completes contour creation and generates mesh.

Fig. 2.27 Plate Mesh Parameters dialog box

Quadrangles are preferable checkbox – if the box is unchecked, triangular FE mesh creates by default. Additional boundary points allowed checkbox – in addition, those contour sides are meshed which lengths exceed the specified maximum side length.

Perform optimization of internal points

position checkbox – if the box is unchecked, angles of plate FE can be inside the required range 30˚–

150˚. Create Plate Object checkbox allows to create plate object that characterized by the same properties as a plate (thickness, material etc.), but consisting of several plates.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.28 FE meshing

Plate / Divide Plate

The command enables a mode that allows you to split a plate into smaller plates. The mode allows splitting single plate or a selected group of plates. Number of elements defines the number of elements along each of the two directions of the plate coordinate system. Element type sets the type of elements. Initial plates are deleted. Thickness for new plates checkbox allows to set thickness for plates created by meshing. If this option is unchecked, newly created plates will be the same thickness as initial plate. Place new objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed.

Shortcut:

62

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.29 Plate Mesh Parameters dialog box

Plate / On Free Faces of Solid Elements

The command allows to create plates on free faces of solids. Such necessity can arise at creation of combined structures consisting of solids and shells.

Shortcut:

Plate Object / Create Plate Object

This command invokes APM Graph where you can create plate contour. For detailed information see Chapter 1.

Plate Object / Edit Plate Object

This command invokes APM Graph where you can modify earlier created plate contour.

Plate Object / Mesh Options

This command invokes dialog box where you can set mesh parameters for selected plate objects.

To view plate mesh use Filters toolbar /

Plate Object Mesh command.

63

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.30 Plate Object Mesh Parameters dialog box

Plate Object / Delete Mesh

This command deletes FEM mesh for selected plates.

Plate Object / Explode Plate Object

This command deletes selected plate objects and creates plate elements based on FEM mesh of plate objects.

Plate| Sphere of 4-Noded Shells

The command creates a sphere of triangular plate elements since simultaneous generation by the FE mesh.

The user specifies the spherical center by a click of the left mouse (LMB) button on a selected point of one of the windows and then specifies by dislocation of a mouse the value of radius of the sphere that is created. After the completion of the sphere creation the dialog window of the sphere creation opens, where one can specify parameters of an object that is created, and of the FE mesh.

The value of maximum size equal by default the FE is one tenth out of the sphere radius that is created, but the radius value can be changed by the user.

Fig. 2.34 Dialog window

The sphere creation. Shortcut:

64

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Plate | Cylinder of 4-Noded Shells /

Plate | Cylinder of 3-Noded Shells

The command creates a cylindrical surface of quadrangular/triangular plate elements. The user specifies the cylinder center by a click of the left mouse

(LMB) button on a selected point of one of the windows and then specifies, by dislocation of a mouse, the value of the cylinder radius and its height. After the completion of a sphere creation the dialog window of a cylinder

creation opens (Fig. 2.36), where one can specify parameters of the object that is created and the FE mesh.

The cylindrical surface seemingly can be created without ends as well as with different ends.

The value of maximum size equal the FE by default is one tenth out of the sphere radius that is created, but the radius value can be changed by the user.

Shortcut:

Plate| Torus of 3-Noded Shells

The command creates the tours surface from triangular plate elements. The user defines the center of the torus, the point defining torus axis, the center of the forming circumference and its radius by sequential clicks of the left mouse (LMB) button on the selected point of one of the windows. After the completion of a sphere creation the dialog window of a torus creation opens (Fig. 2.37) where one can specify parameters of an object that is created and the FE mesh.

A value of a maximum size equal to the FE, by default is one tenth out of the second radius of a torus that is created but the value of radius may be changed by the user.

Shortcut:

Plate | Torus of 4-Noded Shells

The command creates the torus surface of quadrangular plate elements. The user defines the center of the torus, the point defining torus axis, the center of the forming circumference and its radius by sequential clicks of the left mouse (LMB) button on the selected point of one of the windows. After the completion of the sphere creation, the dialog window of

the torus creation opens (Fig. 2.38), where one can specify parameters of an object that is created and the

FE mesh.

The value of the FE maximum size is equal by default to one tenth out of the second crating torus radius, but the value of radius can be changed by the user.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.36 Dialog window

of a cylinder creation.

Fig. 2.37 Dialog window

of a torus creation.

65

Fig. 2.38 Dialog window

of a torus creation.

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Solid / 8-noded Solid

The command enables a mode of creating 8-node solid elements. An element is defined by 8 nodes. In this mode, the existing nodes can be unified and new ones can be created. First mouse click sets the first node; second mouse click sets the second one and so on. If you have already selected or created the first node right mouse click cancels the operation. The command uses attachment mode while selecting among existing nodes.

While entering FE nodes it is necessary to observe local node numeration. The required order of nodes input is the following: 0-1-2-3-4-5-6-7, 0-3-2-1-4-7-6-5, 0-1-5-4-3-2-6-7, 0-4-5-1-3-7-6-2 and so on.

A degenerate element will be created in case of incorrect numeration order.

Examples of singular elements:

correct incorrect

Fig. 2.31 8-noded solid element creation

Shortcut:

Solid / Divide 8-noded Solid

The command enables a mode of splitting 8-noded element into smaller elements. The splitting mode allows you to split a single element or a group of selected elements. Number of Elements sets the number of fragmentations along the ribs of a solid element. After fragmentation, the initial element is deleted. Place new objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.32 Solid FE meshing

Fig. 2.33 Solid Mesh Parameters dialog box

66

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Solid / 6-noded Solid

The command enables a mode of drawing 6-node solid elements. An element is defined by six nodes. In this mode, the existing nodes can be unified and new nodes can be created. First mouse click sets the first node; second mouse click sets the second one and so on. If you have already selected or created the first node, right mouse click cancels the operation. The command uses attachment mode while selecting among existing nodes.

While entering FE nodes it is necessary to observe local node numeration.

The required order of node input is the following: 0-2-3-1-5-4, 0-3-2-1-4-5, 1-4-5-0-3-2, 1-5-4-0-2-

3, etc.

A degenerate element will be created in case of incorrect numeration order.

Examples of singular elements:

correct incorrect

Fig. 2.34 6-noded solid element creation

Shortcut

Solid / 4-noded Solid

The command enables a mode of drawing 4-node solid elements. In this mode, the existing nodes can be unified and new nodes can be created. First mouse click sets the first node; second mouse click sets the second one and so on. If you have already selected or created the first node, right mouse click cancels the operation. The command uses attachment mode while selecting among existing nodes.

Fig. 2.35 4-noded solid element creation

Shortcut:

The command enables a mode of drawing rectangular parallelepiped that consists of 8-noded increasing numbers) by clicking LMB on each of these nodes

During creation of a 20-node three-dimensional hexahedron the edge of binding in it in this step to an intermediate node will be created behind the cursor as a prompt (see Fig. 2. 47).

An accelerated choice:

Three-dimensional elements| 10-node tetrahedral element

The command sets a mode of 10-node three-dimensional tetrahedral elements creation. In this mode existing nodes can be connected or new ones can be created. The first click of a mouse command uses a binding mode when it selects already created nodes.

Fig. 2.48 shows the numbers of nodes that need to be consistently get around (in order of increasing numbers) by clicking LMB on each of these nodes

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.36 Rectangular Parallelepiped dialog box

Solid / Solid Pipe

The command enables a mode of drawing a heavy-gauge pipe that consists of 8-noded finite elements and is arbitrarily oriented in space. A pipe can be closed or open in circular dimension. In this mode existing nodes can be used and new nodes can be created. If you have already selected or created the first node right mouse click cancels the operation. The command uses attachment mode while selecting among existing nodes. First mouse click sets insertion point, second mouse click sets point that defines length and direction of the pipe, third mouse click sets the point that defines starting angle and inner radius of a pipe (radius is calculated as point-to-axis of a pipe distance), fourth mouse click sets the point that defines end angle (this angle is measured according to right-hand screw rule, so that if you look in the direction of pipe axis vector, the angle is measured clockwise) and outer radius of the pipe.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.37 Solid pipe creation

To draw a pipe section 3ABFDC4E that is open in circular dimension it is necessary to set 4 points: point 1 and 2 set the pipe axis, point 3 that defines starting angle and inner diameter of the pipe can be situated anywhere D3 straight line, point 4 that defines end angle and outer diameter can be situated anywhere along B4 straight line.

68

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.38 Solid Pipe dialog box

In this dialog window, it is possible to edit any previously entered parameters. Number of

Elements sets the number of radial, circular and axial fragmentations of the pipe. To draw a pipe that is closed in circular direction place the tick-mark at 360 degree check box. In this case the coordinates of end angle point are ignored.

Shortcut:

Solid | Ball of Tetrahedrons

The command creates a ball of tetrahedron three-dimensional elements since simultaneous generation by the FE mesh. The user specifies the center of the ball by a click of the left mouse (LMB) button on a selected point of one of the windows and then specifies by dislocation of a mouse the value of radius of the ball that is created. After the completion of the sphere creation, the dialog of

Creation of a sphere opens where one can specify parameters of an object that is created and the FE mesh.

The value of the FE maximum size is equal by default one tenth out of radius of a ball that is created, but value of radius can be changed by the user.

Fig. 2.39 Sphere Creation dialog.

Shortcut :

Solid | Ball of Hexahedrons

The command creates a ball of 8-node solid octahedral elements with simultaneous generation of FE mesh. The user specifies the center of the ball by a click of the left mouse (LMB) button on a selected point of one of the windows and then specifies by dislocation of a mouse the value of radius of the ball that is created. After the completion of the sphere creation the dialog window Creation of a sphere opens where one can specify parameters of an object that is created and the FE mesh.

The value of the FE maximum size is equal by default one tenth out of radius of a ball that is created, but value of radius can be changed by the Fig. 2.40 Sphere Creation dialog.

69

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

user.

Shortcut:

Solid | Cylinder of Tetrahedrons

The command creates a cylinder of 4 node three-dimensional tetrahedron elements since simultaneous generation by FE mesh. The user sets the center of the cylinder bottom end by a click of the left mouse (LMB) button on the selected point of one of the windows and then specifies by dislocation of a mouse the position of a cylinder axes and the value of a cylinder radius that is created. After the completion of the cylinder creation the dialog window Creation of a cylinder opens where one can specify parameters of an object that is created and the FE mash.

The value of maximum size equal the FE by default is one tenth out of the sphere radius that is created, but the radius value can be changed by the user.

Arc

Shortcut : Fig. 2.41 Cylinder creation dialog.

The command enables a mode for drawing arc elements. An arc element is created in the viewplane and is approximated with straight-line rods with user defined accuracy. First mouse click defines arc center. Second mouse click sets arc starting angle. Third mouse click sets arc radius.

Fourth mouse click sets arc ending angle and invokes a dialog box which allows you to enter the number of straight-line rods of which arc will consist, or cancel the operation. You can use attachment at any stage of this operation. Right mouse click cancels the operation. Place new objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.42 Divide Arc dialog box

Circle

The command enables a circle drawing mode. Just like the arc, a circle is created in the viewplane and is approximated with straight-line rods. First mouse click sets the circle center. Second mouse click sets the circle radius and calls a dialog box which allows you to enter the number of straight-line rods which constitute the circle. The first rod begins in zero grad point. Using attachment at second mouse click (to define radius) will create the first node at the point lying in the cut formed by

70

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

circle center and the attached node. Right mouse click cancels the operation. Place new objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.43 Circle dialog box Fig. 2.44 Divide Circle dialog box

Support / Rigid Support

The command switches editor into a mode of setting bases (supports) for existing nodes. Rigid supports are set in the node coordinate system. To set or delete a support you are to select a node.

Then a dialog box appears on the screen, as shown below. Buttons of Support Type group are used to define support as restraint or hinge. Check boxes Lock Translation can restrict node motion along X, Y,

Z direction. Check boxes Lock Rotation can restrict node rotation around X, Y, Z axes. It is possible to set rigid support also on face of plate object that can be used in particular for modeling of the foundation mat on the elastic soil base.

Shortcut:

Support / One-Dir Rigid Support

Fig. 2.45 Rigid Support dialog box

The command switches editor into a mode of setting bases (supports) for existing nodes. Onedirection rigid supports are set in the node coordinate system. Unlike the Support / Rigid Support command this command allows to lock translations and rotations only in one direction which can be positive or negative. One example of this support is the foundation which can lift off the ground.

Shortcut:

71

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.46 One-Dir Rigid Support dialog box

Support / Elastic Support

The command enables a mode for entering elastic supports in existing nodes. Elastic supports are set in the node coordinate system. In order to define elastic supports in existing nodes, it is necessary to select desired nodes using Edit / Complex Selection command.

To define spring support in a node or a group of nodes, select the desired node or one of the selected nodes by clicking on, which will call Elastic Support dialog box.

In Support stiffness entry boxes, stiffness components along coordinate axes are set. Radio button Add to existing is used for entering additional values to the existing ones for the node.

Otherwise, Replace existing radio button is used to replace existing supports with new values. To delete support in selected nodes press Delete button.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.47 Elastic Support dialog box

72

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Support / Elastic Supports for Foundations

Commands allow to set and calculate foundation parameters in design elements mode.

Elastic soil base for post foundation (activates after selection of rod-column and its base node)

Elastic soil base for strip foundation (activates after selection of rod-girder);

Elastic soil base for mat foundation (activates after selection of plate object);

Elastic soil base for pile foundation (activates after selection of rod-column and its base node);

The detailed description of th e commands is stated in section «Soil bases calculation».

Rigid Link

The command allows user to set rigid connection of nodes of different elements. This operation allows modeling of unilateral couplings, sliders

and special type connections. To define rigid link, it is necessary to specify minimum two nodes and define required degrees of freedom for this link.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.48 Rigid Link dialog box

Elastic Link

The command enables a mode for introducing special element, called elastic link between two existing nodes.

In this mode, user can connect already existing nodes or create new ones. First mouse left click sets the first node, second click - second. By pressing the right mouse button you can cancel the command. The command uses attachment mode when connecting already existing nodes. If you wish to create a new node, rather than using one of the existing ones, for example, when nodes lie in different planes, but coincide in the viewplane, attachment mode should be disabled.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.49 Elastic Link dialog box

Hinge / At Node / Create for All

The command places hinges at all nodes, thus converting frame constructions to truss construction. This command calls dialog box shown below. Checkboxes allow you to permit rotation around X, Y, Z axis.

Shortcut:

73

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.50 Hinge at Node dialog box

Hinge / At Node / Create for Selected

The command creates hinges at selected nodes in global coordinate system. The command calls a dialog box shown above.

Hinge / At Rod End

The command switches editor into a mode which allows to place a hinge at rod end. Click near end of the rod to place hinge. That will invoke dialog box shown below. Use checkboxes to permit rotation around X,Y,Z axis.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.51 Hinge at Rod End dialog box

Rod Release

The command creates degree of freedom release for rod elements. It can be helpful when modeling one direction connections, sliders and special-type connections. To define release select one or more rod elements and in dialog window shown below select degrees of freedom for both ends of each rod.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.52 Rod Releases dialog box

Plate Release

The command creates degree of freedom release for plate elements. It can be helpful when modeling special-type connections. To define release select one or more plate elements and in dialog window shown below select degrees of freedom for required nodes of plates.

74

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.53 Plate Releases dialog box

Delete Selected

The command deletes all selected elements.

Shortcut:

Delete All

The command deletes the entire construction. This command calls a message box.

Multiple Nodes

The command enables/disables a mode that allows user to create several nodes in one point of space. This mode is meant to solve problems on contact interaction.

Shortcut:

Loads menu

This menu commands allow you to apply loads to nodes and elements.

Force on Node

The command enables a mode for applying forces to existing nodes. After selecting a node, a corresponding dialog box appears on the screen. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are fulfilled in a load case selected from the list of load cases. Nodal load values command on

Extra view filters toolbar enables / disables mode for viewing load values of current load case.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.54 Force no Node dialog box

Moment on Node

The command enables a mode for applying moments to existing nodes. After selecting a node, a corresponding dialog box appears on the screen. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for a load case selected from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

75

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.55 Moment on Node dialog box

Support Displacements

The command enables a mode for assigning supports

’ displacement along fixed degrees of freedom (settlement of support). Displacements are set in the node coordinate system. Since nodes are to be selected for this operation, a dialog box shown below appears. If you want to enter additional values to existing displacements in a node, select radio button Add to existing. Otherwise, if you want to replace existing displacements with new values, select Replace existing radio button.

To delete displacements in selected nodes, click Delete button.

All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load case selected from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.56 Support Displacements dialog box

76

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Temperature

The command switches editor into a mode specifying temperature at nodes which will be used at thermal calculation.

In this mode left-click on node or one of the selected nodes. As a result there will be a dialog box for temperature specifying in these nodes. By default temperature 20 C is accepted to have no thermal stresses. You can change this value by Calculation |

Calculation Options

menu.

To take into account temperature field for stresses analysis it is necessary to carry out Steadystate heat transfer analysis with switched on

Temperature account (Steady-state heat transfer)

option for static calculation. Calculation of stationary heat conductivity is carried out for a single load case or load combination only.

Fig. 2.57 Node Temperature dialog

Shortcut:

Rod Prestrain

This command allows you to define various types of preload on rod elements using the dialog box shown below.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.58 Rod Prestrain dialog box

There are 4 different types of preload available for rod/beam or cable elements:

Strain, dL/L

– ratio of difference between distance between nodes connected by this element and initial length of the element to the distance between the nodes;

Initial element length

– initial length of element before deformation.

Note: valid only for cable elements.

Force

– internal axial force acting in element;

Stress

– normal stress in element (axial direction).

Local Load On Rod

The command enables a mode for load application to a rod or a group of rods.

To apply load to a single rod, you are to select the rod in this mode by clicking on it. Then, a window of rod loads editor appears on the screen. Commands for switching into mode of setting a certain type of load from Load Type menu are available in this editor. Previously entered loads are edited by right mouse click (in XY plane or axial direction) or by right mouse click together with SHIFT button (in XZ plane).

77

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

To set load for a group of rods, first select the necessary rods with the help of Select command and click on any rod in this mode. After that, the window of the rod loads editor appears on the screen.

Then select one of the commands from Load Type menu for setting a corresponding load.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.59 Rod Loads editor window

Global Load on Rod

The command enables a mode of applying load to a rod or a group of rods.

To apply load to a single rod, you are to select rod in this mode by clicking on it. After that, the window of the rod loads editor appears on the screen.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.60 Distributed Force on Rod dialog box

To set load for a group of rods, first select the necessary rods with the help of Select command and click on any rod in this mode. After that on the screen appears window of the rod loads editor.

Forces direction is set by a vector in three-dimensional space. The coordinates of this vector are set in

Direction In Local or Global Coordinate System entry field. For example if it is necessary to set load of

2N/mm in the direction reverse to Z axis, you can enter 2 in Force Value entry box and 0, 0, -1 in

Direction boxes or enter -2 in Force Value entry box and 0, 0, -1 in Direction box. The load is added to a load case from the load case list.

Rod Temperature

This command applies temperature to a single rod or a group of selected rod elements. Click on one or group of selected elements with left mouse button, and Temperature Load on Rod dialog box will appear. Various types of temperature distribution can be selected using Load type radio buttons.

Shortcut:

78

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.61 Temperature Load on Rod dialog box

Delete Rod Loads

The command deletes all loads applied to selected rods.

The commands that are available only in rod loads editor are reviewed below.

Shortcut:

Rod Load Type / Axial Force

The command allows you to apply axial concentrated axial force to a rod. Selecting this command switches editor into the mode of setting an axial load or editing an axial load for a single rod. To enter a new load click left mouse button in the force allocation point. Enter the values in the dialog that appears and push OK. To edit or delete a load, click right mouse button. All operations with load

(setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases selected from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Rod Load Type / Lateral Force

The command allows you to apply concentrated radial force to a rod. Selecting this command switches editor into the mode for setting or editing a radial force to rod. To enter a new load, click left mouse button in the force application point. Enter the values in the dialog box that appears, and click

OK. To edit or delete a load in XY plane, click right mouse button, or right mouse button together with

SHIFT button for XZ plane. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases selected from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Rod Load Type / Torsional Moment

The command allows you to apply concentrated moments of torsion to a rod or a group of rods.

Command operation is completely similar to that of Rod Load Type / Axial Force command. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases selected from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Rod Load Type / Bending Moment

The command allows you to apply concentrated bending moments to a rod or a group of rods.

Command operation is completely similar to that of Rod Load Type / Radial Force command. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases selected from the list of load cases.

79

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Shortcut:

Rod Load Type / Distributed Axial Force

The command allows you to apply axial distributed forces to a rod or a group of rods. Selecting this command switches editor into the mode for setting an axial load or editing the axial load for single rod or right away calls force setting dialog for a group of rods if they were selected by Select command at first. To enter a new load, click in the starting and ending points of force application section in setting mode for a single rod. Enter the values in appeared dialog and then click OK. To edit or delete a load, click right mouse button. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases chosen from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Rod Load Type / Distributed Lateral Force

The command enables a mode which allows you to apply radial distributed forces to a rod or a group of rods. Selecting this command switches editor into mode of setting or editing an axial load for a single rod or immediately calls distributed the force setting dialog box for a group of rods if they were selected by Select command at first. To enter a new load, click to specify the starting and ending points of the zone of force application in the load setting mode for a single rod. Enter your values in the dialog box that appears and click OK. To edit or delete a load, click right mouse button in XY plane or right mouse button together with SHIFT button for XZ plane. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases chosen from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Rod Load Type / Distributed Torsional Moment

The command allows you to apply distributed torsion moments to a rod or a group of rods.

Command operation is completely similar to that of Rod Load Type / Axial Distributed Force command. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for a load case chosen from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Rod Load Type / Distributed Bending Moment

The command allows you to apply distributed bending moments to a rod or a group of rods.

Command operation is completely similar to that of Rod Load Type / Radial Distributed Force command. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases selected from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Plate Distributed Load

The command enables a mode which allows you to apply normal load to plates. Load is applied to plates marked with the help of Select command. Click left mouse button on one of desired plates in this mode. After that, a load setting dialog box appears on the screen.

Shortcut:

80

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.62 Distributed Load on Plate dialog box

To delete a normal load from selected plates push Delete button in this dialog box. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases selected from the list of load cases.

Plate Load command on Extra view filters toolbar enables / disables mode for viewing load map of current load case.

Plate Load Values command on Extra view filters toolbar enables / disables mode for viewing load values of current load case.

Plate Linear Distributed Load

This command enables a mode which allows you to apply linear distributed load to plates.

After command activation select plates using Complex Selection mode and press Enter/Space key. Specify 3 nodes in order as in Fig. 2.60 a. After selection of 3-d node the dialog box appears on the screen (Fig. 2.60 c). In the bottom part of dialog box there are node coordinates and in the upper part - corresponding values of pressure.

Plate Load command on Extra view filters toolbar enables / disables mode for viewing load map of current load case.

Plate Load Values command on Extra view filters toolbar enables / disables mode for viewing load values of current load case.

To delete load on selected plates from current load case press Delete button of dialog box.

81

2

3

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

а)

1 б)

Fig. 2.63 Linear Distributed Load set on plates

Plate Snow Load

The command enables a mode, which allows you to apply snow load to a single or a selected plate. Load is applied to plates marked with the help of Select command. In this mode, click left mouse button on one of the desired plates. After that, a load setting dialog box appears on the screen. All operations with load (setting, change, removal) are performed for load cases chosen from the list of load cases.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.64 Snow Load on Plate dialog box

Snow Load command on Extra view filters toolbar enables / disables mode for viewing snow load map of current load case.

82

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Plate Wind Load

The command enables a mode which allows you to apply wind load to plates. A mouse click on selected plates calls the dialog box shown below. In this mode, click left mouse button on one of necessary plates. After that, a load setting dialog box appears on the screen.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.65 Wind Load on Plate dialog box

Wind Load command on Extra view filters toolbar enables / disables mode for viewing wind load map of current load case.

Plate Temperature

The command enables a plate temperature definition mode. You can apply temperature load to one or a group of plates selected with Select command. In this mode, click left mouse button on the desired plate to call the Temperature Load dialog box shown below. All operations with this type of load are performed for selected load case.

Shortcut:

83

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.66 Temperature Load on Plate dialog box

There are two types of temperature distribution available: Temperature

– applies uniform temperature to a whole plate and Gradient

– uniform temperature distribution through plate thickness.

dT1

– temperature change for surface with positive z coordinate (local plate coordinate system) and

dT2 - temperature change for reverse surface.

Plate Linear Temperature

The command enables a mode, which allows you to apply temperature load that changes linearly along a certain direction. This operation can be performed on one or a group of plates selected with

Select command. In this mode, you define the beginning by clicking left mouse button and with next mouse click you select the end of direction vector.

Shortcut:

Note: in this mode you can select existing nodes as well. Numerical values are entered in the dialog box shown below. All operations with this type of load are performed for selected load cases.

Fig. 2.67 Linear Temperature Load on Plate dialog box

84

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

There are two types of load distribution available: Temperature

– defines temperature change along the surface, Gradient

– defines temperature distribution through thickness. Groups Begin and

End designate values for direction starting and ending points of the vector respectively. dT1

– temperature change for surface with positive z coordinate (local plate coordinate system) and dT2 - temperature change for opposite surface. Group Direction allows you to edit the direction vector.

Pressure on Solid

The command allows you to apply pressure to solid element faces. It calls a dialog box where numerical values and creation options are entered.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.68 Normal Distributed Load on Solid dialog box

Acceleration / Linear Acceleration

The command calls a dialog box in which you can define linear acceleration acting upon the whole model by entering a direction vector and its numerical value in [mm/s

2

].

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.69 Linear Acceleration dialog box

Acceleration / Angular Acceleration

The command calls a dialog box in which you can apply angular velocity and acceleration by defining their numerical values, center of rotation and rotation vector (acceleration and velocity vectors are considered collinear).

Shortcut:

85

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.70 Angular Acceleration dialog box

Load Case

Load case can involve a combination of loads of any types and is characterized by name and two states: on/off and active/inactive. State of construction can be calculated for any load case or load cases combination. Work with load cases is similar to work with layers. If a load case is switched off, it loads will not be represented on the screen. If load a case is active, then by default it will be suggested to place a new load in the active load case.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.71 Load Case dialog box

To create a new load case press Add button.

To change an old load case click on it in the list and press Modify button.

To remove a load case, select it in a list and press Delete button.

Press Set Active button to make active a load case selected from the load case list.

Dynamic Load Case

APM Structure3D allows automatic application of seismic loading in accordance with building regulations.

All dynamic forces are defined using dynamic load cases. All operations with dynamic load cases are similar to those for ordinary (static) ones, described above.

For detailed description see Chapter 1.

Load Combinations

Load combination represents a linear combination of load cases. This command calls a Load

Combination dialog shown below. It is possible to create several load combinations. To add a load case into a combination, it is necessary to select it in a load case list box, enter a factor for it and press

Add button. To change a load case factor, select a necessary load case from a load case list box or factors list box, enter a new value in a Factor field and push a Modify button. To remove load case from a combination, select it in a load case list box or factors list box and push Delete button.

86

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.72 Load Combination dialog box

Static Load to Mass

Static loads to mass conversion allows to consider not model dead weight only, but also the masses which set as a loads. It allows to perform calculations of eigen frequencies, seismicity and wind pulsations competently. Command calls dialog box shown below.

Load to mass conversion order:

1. In the Add in drop-down list select one of dynamic load case in which masses will be added.

The Dynamic mass means that load case will be added in mass matrix at calculation of eigen frequencies. If dynamic load cases were created earlier (seismic or wind pulsations) there is possible to select one of them.

2. Select load case for conversion in the drop-down list, enter factor and press Add button.

Loads components along Global Z axis will be converted to node masses.

Note: The model dead weight is considered once in mass matrix and there is no need to convert load case with structure weight multiplier.

The list of static and dynamic load cases for conversion is presented in the bottom part of dialog box. Load case can be deleted from the list if necessary.

Fig. 2.73 Load to Mass Conversion dialog box

Stochastic Load Case

The command calls dialog box where stochastic load for load cases can be defined for fatigue calculation.

87

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.74 Stochastic Loading for Load Cases dialog box

It is possible to set accidental fatigue loading for all load cases or for separate ones.

The Set button respectively includes the earlier set accidental fatigue loading in calculation. It is possible to set the loading, but not to include it in the calculation. In more detail about fatigue calculation it is stated in chapter 10.

Graph of Dynamic Load

The command calls an editor in which you can define graph of load changing in time for dynamic analysis. Here you define variation law for a proportionality coefficient, by which static load is multiplied, to obtain load value at certain time moments. All loads applied to the structure are variable in time according to the defined graph.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.75 Graphs of Loads for Load Cases dialog box

Tools menu

This menu contains commands that allow you to perform different operations with a structure to create more complicated geometrical models.

Copy

88

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The command creates copies of selected elements into clipboard. To paste a created copy of elements into editor it is necessary to call Tools / Paste command.

Shortcuts: or Ctrl+C

Paste

The command pastes selected elements from clipboard into editor. Upon this, the pasted copy is selected and can then be moved to a desired position. When you select this command, a copy remains in the clipboard and can be pasted many times. The command is enabled after you select Tools /

Copy command.

Shortcuts: or Ctrl+V

In the appeared dialog box it is necessary to select previously in what layers the copied objects will be inserted.

Fig. 2.76 Layer selection for insertion

Loft

This command enables Loft tool which allows you to create constructions that consists of repeated sections. These constructions are characterized by a single section vector and a number of sections.

At first, it is necessary to select a node, a rod, a plate or a group of arbitrary combination of these elements, to make the command available. Then you are to set the lofting vector and the number of sections. Use first mouse click to set its starting point and second mouse click to set its ending point.

Then, a dialog box shown below appears on screen which prompts you to enter sections number or edit the lofting vector. While creating solid elements out of plates with the help of lofting tool, it is necessary to remember that besides solid elements plates are also created by lofting the initial one.

Place new objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed. Copy option allows to copy objects with all properties (loads, hinges, etc.)

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.77 Loft Construction dialog box

89

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.78 Explanation for Loft tool

Fig. 2.79 Explanation for Loft tool (solid elements)

Modified Loft tool allows creating multi-sectional structures with linear dimensions change and sections rotation. These structures are characterized by displacement vector of a single section, number of sections, dimensions change factor and rotation angle of sections. At first, it is necessary to select a node, a rod, a plate or a group of arbitrary combination of these elements to make the command available. Then you are to set the vector that characterizes single section. First mouse click defines its starting point; the origin of the vector should be an existing node. This node becomes base for dimensions change, and rotation of sections will be made around this node in a plane perpendicular to displacement vector. Second mouse click defines the ending point of the vector. Then a dialog box appears that allows you to edit the vector value, set the number of sections, full rotation angle of a section and dimensions change factor. Lofting vector is set for a single section, so for N sections the aggregate lofting vector will be N times bigger. Rotation angle and dimensions change factors are set for the total amount of sections, so for single section rotation angle will be divided into N, and dimensions will vary according to the linear law. While creating solid elements out of plates with the help of extruding tool it is necessary to remember that besides solid elements plates are also created by copying the initial one by extruding vector.

Extrusion is performed in several stages:

Copying selected nodes and nodes that belong to selected elements by extruding vector;

Turning the copied nodes around the base one;

Ranging the nodes with respect to the base one;

Creating rods, plates and solid elements.

90

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.80 Explanation for Loft tool (solid elements)

91

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Rotate

The command enables a mode which allows you to rotate selected elements. The mode allows rotation of selected elements in the viewplane i.e. around a vector perpendicular to the viewplane.

Rotation is done around the rotation center. Therefore you must choose correct viewplane first. After you have selected elements you need to rotate, click on them in the viewplane and rotate with mouse around the rotation center to reach the desired rotation angle, and then click with mouse again to lock the new position of the elements. Toolbar shows you the current rotation angle. The angle is increased or decreased according to angular step. Right mouse click cancels the operation.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.81 Rotation Angle dialog box

Mirror

The command enables a mode which allows you to create a mirror copy (symmetry) of the selected elements. Symmetry is done with respect to a symmetry plane which is perpendicular to the view plane. To set a symmetry plane it is necessary to draw the symmetry plane track in the view. First mouse click sets the first point of the track; second mouse click sets the second point and creates the mirror copy. This mode allows you to use attachment to nodes while drawing the track line. Right mouse click cancels the operation. Place new objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed. Copy option allows to copy objects with all properties (loads, hinges, etc.)

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.82 Mirror Reflection dialog box

Polar Array

The command enables a mode of creating polar array of selected elements. Array is characterized by a rotation vector and a full rotation angle. The command copies selected elements around the rotation vector. This tool has a possibility not only to copy, but also to join consecutive copies with rods, plates and solid elements (see Loft command). Rotation angle is set for the total amount of sections, so if the total number of copies is N, then the rotation angle for each section will be divided into N. You should select a node, a rod, a plate, a solid element or a group of arbitrary combination of these elements at first to m ake command available. Then it’s necessary to set a vector

– the axis of rotation. First mouse click sets the starting point of this vector; it must be an existing node.

The axis of rotation will run through this node. Second mouse click defines the ending point. After that, a dialog box appears on the screen where other parameters: number of sections, angle are set and the mode of joining copies with rods, plates and solid elements is switched on. Place new objects in option allows to select layer in which new objects will be placed. Copy option allows to copy objects with all properties (loads, hinges, etc.)

Shortcut:

92

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.83 Polar Array dialog box

Node Alignment

The command allows you to align a selected node by base node coordinates. With the help of this tool, it is possible to “project” nodes on the plane that runs through the base node and is parallel to one of the coordinate planes, or on the straight line that runs through the base node and is parallel to one of the coordinate axes. To project nodes on the plane that is parallel to XY plane of the global coordinate system, it is necessary to select a node that lies in this plane and check off Align By Z Axis in the dialog box. If you check off Align By X Axis and Align By Y Axis, then the nodes will project on the straight line parallel to Z axis.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.84 Node Alignment dialog box

Move Nodes

This command allows to move nodes. In the appeared dialog box you can set offsets along X,Y,Z directions.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.85 Move Nodes dialog box

Spring

The command creates springs. This command calls a dialog box shown below that allows you to enter basic spring parameters: radius, step, coils number and also the number of straight-line rods per one coil. This parameter defines the degree of accuracy of spring model. Spring is placed in (0, 0, 0) point. Its axis is a vertical line.

93

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.86 Spring dialog

Pattern Grid

Command activates special mode that allows you to create rods with a single mouse click using pattern grid which appears after command calling in active state. Grid consists of horizontal, vertical and inclined segments. Pattern grid is set by three parameters: horizontal step, vertical step and rotation angle of the whole grid. Click on the necessary segment to create rod. Created rod will duplicate the selected segment. To delete rod it is enough to click on it again. Pattern grid creates rod lying in the viewplane.

Fig. 2.87 Pattern grid

Pattern Settings

Command allows setting parameters of pattern grid shown above. Command invokes dialog box shown below.

Fig. 2.88 Pattern Grid Settings dialog box

Layers

The command calls a dialog box for layer management.

Mouse click on sign switches layer on/off.

Active button makes selected layer active.

Delete button deletes selected layer. Elements are replaced into active layer. Active layer cannot be deleted. New button makes new layer.

Color button allows to set color to each layer.

Shortcut:

94

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.89 Layers dialog box

Add to Current Layer

The command transfers all selected elements into the active layer.

Shortcut:

Check / Model Connection

The command checks the structure for connections between elements. All separate elements are selected automatically.

Fig. 2.90 Elements connection message box

Check / Materials

The command checks materials of model elements. For example, laminate property of material can be set for plate element only.

Check / Rod Cross-Section

The command determines whether any rod has an undefined cross-sections. All rods with undefined cross-section are selected automatically.

Fig. 2.91 Undefined cross-section message

95

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Check / Plate Angles

The command checks whether plate angles fall in a given range. Minimum and maximum angles are set in the window shown below.

Check / Solid Elements

Fig. 2.92 Plate angles range dialog box for checking

The command invokes dialog box with the information about solids. After pressing Calculate button the following criteria of solid elements are calculated: Volume, Jacobian, Aspect ratio, Collapse.

The criterion selection is carried out in the drop-down list. The maximum, average and minimum values of model are read out in the upper part of dialog box for the selected criterion after calculation.

Further the upper and lower limits are set for checking the selected criterion.

After pressing Check button system will allocate solids, checking for which is not carried out.

Fig. 2.93 Solid Checks dialog box

Check / On Duplicate Rods, Plates, Solids

This command allows to check coincidence of elements. The warning message appears on the screen if check don't meet the conditions.

Check / Aspect Ratio

This command displays color map aspect ratio that is the ratio of an element side (edge) maximum length to a minimum. Ratio value should not exceed 5:1.

Check / Tapering

This command displays color map tapering. Tapering is equal to zero for 3-noded plates or 4noded tetrahedrons. The value range is 0...1. 0 is the ideal value.

96

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Check / Jacobian

This command displays color map jacobian. The value range is 0...1. 1 is the ideal value. 0.7 is acceptable value.

Check / Warping

This command displays color map warping. Warping is equal to zero for 3-noded plates or 4noded tetrahedrons. 5 degrees is acceptable value.

Connect Nodes

The command joins the nodes lying closer than entered in dialog box shown below.

Если предварительно выделить группу узлов и провести ту же операцию, то она будет производиться только для узлов выделенной части конструкции

Fig. 2.94 Join Nodes dialog box

Create Contact Elements

That tool is intended for contact zone creation (contact elements on free sides of the allocated solid elements). Before performance of that command, it is necessary for the model of contacting details to arrange in different layers and to allocate solid elements, which, presumably, will participate in contact interaction. If more than one contact area is expected, the command should be executed consistently for each prospective area is supposed. The command will create contact finite elements on one part, and target contact finite elements

on the other part.

Create Super Elements

The command allows to separate whole model to set of super elements (SE). This makes it possible to perform static analysis for models of larger DOF number.

Fig. 2.95 Super Elements dialog box

Restrictions:

- all of the nodes and elements of each SE must be connected (linked);

- set of SE must contain all of the nodes and elements of whole model;

97

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

- static analysis can be performed only for set of SE.

+ button switches to SE operation mode (add/delete SE and etc.).

Info button switches to SE information mode.

Calculation results will be available for whole model as well as for each SE.

Node

–> Group of Nodes Connection

This tool is intended for creation of the several elastic links connected to one node. At first it is necessary to select group of nodes, after command activation specify nod to which elastic links should be attached.

In the appeared dialog box it is necessary to select what elements will connect nodes: rods or elastic links. At elastic link selection set its stiffness.

Fig. 2.96 Connection element type dialog box

Node Group

–> Group of Nodes Connection

This tool is intended for creation of the several elastic links connected by pairs. After command activation it is necessary to select first group of nodes (they will be highlighted by blue color), second group of nodes (they will be highlighted by green color) and then press ENTER key. In the appeared dialog specify type of connection.

Separate Solids

The command allows to separate solid elements of one detail from another. For example, for contact problem solution, it is necessary to disjoin two details which are represented as FE model with the united nodes. For this purpose place solid elements of each detail in separate layers, select the solids located in different layers and having united nodes and activate Tools / Separate Solids command. Thus in each join node 2 disconnected nodes will be created that are corresponds to first detail (layer) and the second one. Join nodes will be shown on model at hiding of any one layer.

Additional Features / Intersection of 2 Rods

This command is used to intersect two rods that are in one plane. As a result there will be new node. a) b)

Fig. 2.97 Intersection of two rods

Additional Features / Minimum Distance between 2 Intersecting Rods

This command is used to connect two rods that are not in same plane. As a result there will be a new rod with two end nodes which connects two initial rods by minimum distance.

98

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

a) b)

Fig. 2.98 Minimum distance between 2 intersecting rods

Additional Features / Intersection of Rod and Plate

Select intersected rod and plate that are not in the same plane and activate command. As a result there will be a new node in the intersection zone. a) b)

Fig. 2.99 Intersection of Rod and Plate

Additional Features / Intersection of 2 Plates

Select two intersected plates that are not in the same plane and activate command. As a result there will be nodes, which defines intersection zone. a) b)

Fig. 2.100 Intersection of two plates

Additional Features / Angle between 2 Rods

Select two rods and after command activation there will be dialog box with angle between in degrees.

Depending on rods LCS the real angle or adjacent angle value will be shown.

Fig. 2.101 Angle between two rods

99

a)

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Additional Features / Angle between 2 Plates

Select two plates and after command activation there will be dialog box with angle between in degrees.

Depending on plates LCS the real angle or adjacent angle value will be shown.

Additional Features / Angle between Rod and Plate

Select intersected rod and plate and after command activation there will be dialog box with angle between in degrees.

Depending on the elements LCS the real angle or adjacent angle value will be shown.

Fig. 2.102 Angle between two plates

Fig. 2.103 Angle between rod and plate

Additional Features / Nodes on Rod Projection

Select one rod and required nodes and after command activation there will be new nodes on roddirected line. a) b)

Fig. 2.104 Nodes on rod projection

Additional Features / Nodes on Plate Projection

Select one plate and required nodes and after command activation there will be new nodes lying in plane of plate.

b)

Fig. 2.105 Nodes on plate projection

100

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Measure Distance between Nodes

After command activation specify two nodes and there will be distance between them in current units and it projections to X,Y,Z global axes in the appeared dialog box.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.106 Distance between nodes dialog box

Properties menu

The commands of this menu allow you to set cross-sections and material parameters for rods.

Cross-Sections

The command calls a dialog box for cross-sections management. You can choose a current section that will be assigned to all newly created rods.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.107 Sections dialog box

With the help of Color button it is possible to set color for each section which will be used for rod visualization. Besides, it is possible to set cross-section for all or only selected rods with the help of

Assign to All and Assign to Selected buttons. Replace Section buttons allow to replace completely in a design the selected section with another one.

Load from Library button invokes dialog box for selecting sections from libraries. Libraries are located in program installation folder.

101

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.108 Library dialog box

Edit button calls a dialog box where you can change geometrical properties for current section.

Get Library Info button calls a dialog box with library information.

Fig. 2.109 Library Information dialog box

Library Exchange button allows you to import and export sections between two libraries.

Fig. 2.110 Library Exchange dialog box

This icon means that section belongs to that library.

This icon means that section was imported from another library.

Load Library button opens another library.

102

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Delete section button deletes selected cross-section from the library.

New Library button creates a new library.

Fig. 2.111 New Library dialog box

Load from DB button allows to add section in model from database of parametrical sections, passing libraries. To call database manager make right click in a database tree.

Open in a tree interesting section type by the left double click, then select required section parameters in the list and press OK button. You can change section parameters in Variables dialog box if necessary. Do not change the standard section dimensions needlessly.

Fig. 2.112 Section selection from parametrical model database

Note: For correct reinforcing design it is necessary to specify section type: -1

– not defined, 0 – equal flange I-section, 1

– non-equal flange I-section, 2 – T-section, 3 – channel, 4 – angle, 5 – square pipe, 6

– rectangle, 7 – round, 8 – circle.

103

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.113 Variables dialog box

Further the system will automatically define section dimensions suggest to enter section name. It is recommended to use section dimensions in its name. After that the section will be added in the list of sections of the current document.

Export button transfers the section to section library. Thus there will be a dialog in which it is necessary to specify a path to library and enter the name of added section.

Edit button calls a dialog box where you can change geometrical properties for current section.

In the right part of a dialog you can view image and geometrical characteristics of section. Section type and values of geometrical characteristics can be changed the subsequent calculation of design elements.

Cross-Section to Selected Rods

The command assigns section to selected rods. This command calls a Library dialog box. Cross-

section Name list shows cross-sections contained in the library, Section Parameters group shows the main geometric characteristics of selected section, Preview group shows you cross-section reduced view.

Shortcut:

Cross-Section to All Rods

The command allows you to assign cross-section to all rods.

Shortcut:

Cross-Section Orientation

The command enables a mode which allows you to review cross-section orientation with respect to rod axis and to rotate cross-section about its axis. To do that, select a rod first. Then, the rod will be highlighted with another color and its coordinate system will be displayed as well as cross-section attached to this system (if it has been assigned). To rotate the coordinate system, click on it again to enable rotation mode. Moving mouse left or right sets the desired rotation angle. Angular cursor step is set using View / Cursor Step.

This mode allows you to direct Y axis of the rod system toward any node. That means that you can get rod axis, Y axis and the line between rod end and the selected node lie in the same plane. To do that, click in node sensitivity zone while in rotation mode. Here is an example. In the Fig. below we want to rotate cross-section of the selected rod. We will orient the rod system to have Y axis lying in the plane set by X axis and bp line. In rotation mode we click at p point. The result of the operation is shown below.

104

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.114 Explanation of cross-section orientation

By default, the coordinate in the system of a rod X axi s lies along rod’s axis from the first node towards the second one. Y axis lies in the X axis plane of a rod and global Y axis. Z axis adds up to X and Y axes to form a right-hand triple.

You can use grey keys "+" and "-" to zoom cross-section in and out.

Shortcut:

Rod Info

The command enables a mode that helps you review information about the rod. After you select a rod, a dialog box appears on the screen. Rods list in the left contains all construction rods and allows you to select rod to review. You can also use this list to change the name of any rod. Double click on the rod name in the list to call a dialog box which allows you to enter a new name. Section group contains information about the cross-section with its preview. Material group contains information about material. You can change type of selected rod element using the list box under Rods list to any of

BEAM, TRUSS or CABLE.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.115 Rod Info dialog box

105

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.116 Rod Name dialog box

Cross-Section Alignment Point

This command allows you to set alignment point for rod elements. By default rod elements are connected at center points of cross section. In the dialog box shown below you can select one of predefined alignment points as well as define a point yourself entering offsets from cross section center in Offset group.

Fig. 2.117 Cross-section alignment dialog box

Invert Rod Local CS

The command replaces rod Local CS origin to other rod node. X axis directs along rod length, but already contrariwise; Y axis direction is not change; Z axis direction makes opposite and Local CS remains right.

Length of Selected Elements

The command allows user to see the length of the allocated rod elements (BEAM / TRUSS /

CABLE).

Rod Element Type

The command allows you to set current and change rod element type (BEAM / TRUSS / CABLE).

Fig. 2.118 Rod Element Type dialog box

Pipeline elements properties...

With help of this command the dialog window "Modeling of pipelines" is called.

106

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.119 Pipe Modeling dialog.

The defined name is being assigned to the group of bar elements with a ring section (the pipeline sections) and identical parameters of load are specified to the elements of this pipeline section.

With help of this window buttons one can specify for the selected pipeline section:

Color

– to set certain color to a selected pipeline section;

Assign to Selected or Assign to All

– to add either selected pipeline elements or all elements into the selected pipeline section;

Delete

– is removing previously set properties of a selected pipeline section (there remain the pipeline elements of a construction themselves);

Modify… previously set properties of a pipeline section opens dialog window Pipeline elements

property (Fig. 2. 138) for the selected section.

Fig. 2.120 Pipe Properties Parameters dialog.

"New"

Pipe Properties Parameters dialog window opens for the selected section. o

Name

– specifies the section name; o

Internal environment density

– determines the density of internal environment, filling a pipeline; o

Isolation material density and thickness

– parameters of a pipe insulation material are set if it exists; o

Acceptable corrosion

– acceptable corrosion of a pipeline wall is set (its thinning); o

Flexibility is a value affecting a moment of pipe bending inertia. By default it is equal to 1, but the user can define it himself, above 1 by number. o

The factor of load intensity shows how many times the stress at the end of a rectilinear area of a pipeline will be more than stress in its middle from external/internal

107

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

pressure. The factor is specified for two nodes

– the beginning of a segment (0) – and its end

(1). By default these factors are equal in a one, but the user can specify his own values. o

External and internal pressure on pipeline elements, respectively outside and from inside;

Shortcut:

With help of the button "Color Properties of the Pipeline Elements" can be switched on/switched off pipeline sections disabling

– color assigned to these sections.

Thickness to Selected Plates

The command allows you to set thickness for selected plates. This command calls a dialog box shown below.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.121 Plane Thickness dialog box

Show Plate Thickness command on Extra view filters toolbar enables / disables mode for viewing plate thickness map.

Thickness to All Plates

The command allows you to set thickness for all plates. This command calls a dialog box shown above.

Shortcut:

Enable Plate Stiffness

The command allows user to enable/disable attribute of plate stiffness. Plates without stiffness only transfer loads and do not add the stiffness to the system. The command is applied to the allocated plates and when initiated, it calls a dialog window. To make plates without stiffness, check on Without

stiffness

in the dialog window. To return to plate stiffness switch off flag Without stiffness.

Plate Info

The command enables a mode that allows previewing plate info. After you select a plate, a dialog box shown below appears on the screen. Plates list in the left contains all construction plates and allows selecting plates for review. You can also use this list to change the name of any plate that is named by default. Double click on the rod name in the list to call a dialog box, which will allow you to enter a new name.

Shortcut:

108

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.122 Plate Info dialog box

Invert Plate Local CS

The command changes the direction of selected plate’s coordinate system normal to opposite.

Shortcut:

Orientate Local CS of All Plates

The command invokes dialog box for changing plates LCS orientation. Group of plates LCS orientation can be helpful for viewing of load values, stress states etc.

Fig. 2.123 Plate Local CS Orientation

In the left part of dialog box it is necessary to select plate local axis, which direction you wish to change.

In the right part of dialog box the direction of the selected axis can be set by point coordinates (it is possible also to specify point by mouse click using snap). Thus the LCS axis of each plate will be directed as projection of LCS origin-specified point vector. Since X and Y axes are always lying in a plate plane, Z axis will be directed normally to that half-space where the specified point are located, X and Y axes will be directed in accordance with point to plate plane projection.

The second way of plate LCS orientation is use of Global CS. Thus selected axis of plate LCS will be codirected with specified axis of GCS.

Notes:

Axes of newly created LCS remain right orthogonal.

X and Y axes are always located in a plate plane.

Orientate Local CS of Selected Plates

The command is similar to the previous command, but applicable to selected plates.

Plate LCS by Default

109

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The command sets default local coordinate system for all plates.

Area of Selected Elements

The command allows user to see area of allocated plates.

Plate Element Type

The command allows to set and edit plate type (DKT or MITC) and considers torsion stiffness

(Fictive stiffness or Allman stiffness).

DKT (Discrete Kirchhoff Theory)

– thin shell element, which is described by the theory based on

Kirchhoff hypothesis: the section of an element remains plane in the deformed state, and a thickness is not less its maximum linear dimension than ten times. DKT shells are used by default in APM

Structure3D.

MITC (Mixed Interpolation of Tensorial Components)

– thick shell element, which thickness is not less than 1/5 their maximum linear dimension. For these finite elements not only shearing forces, but also internal lateral forces are considered.

Allman stiffness accounting should be selected when it is necessary to consider torsion moment in plate plane. In other cases use the fictive stiffness accepted by default.

Fig. 2.124 Type of Plate Elements dialog box

Solid Info

The command enables a mode that helps you review information about the solid element. After you select an element, a dialog box appears on the screen. Solid Elements list in the left contains all construction solid elements and allows selecting them for review. You can also use this list to change the name of any element. Double click on the element name in list calls a dialog box, which allows you to enter a new name.

Fig. 2.125 Solid Info dialog box

Volume of Selected Elements

The command allows user to see volume of selected solid elements.

Orientate LCS of All Solid Elements

This command allows to orient local coordinate systems of all solid elements (if no solid selected) or selected solids (if some solids were selected before the command). It can be used for structural analysis of an orthotropic/anisotropic material, or displaying stress in given direction.

110

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

After command activation specify the first node (Local CS origin), the second node defines X axis direction, third node - Y axis and Z axis automatically completes the right-hand system.

Orientate LCS of Selected Solid Elements

The command is similar to the previous command, but applicable to selected solids.

Contact Elements Info

The command enables a mode, allowing to see information and to change properties of contact areas and elements. For this purpose, it is necessary to click the left mouse button on contact/target element, which will call the dialog box on the screen.

There is a list of existing contact areas in model in the left upper part of the dialog box. In the right upper part of dialog box, there is information about contact and target elements in the current area, and also buttons that allows you to invert coordinate systems. For correct performance of calculation algorithm, it is necessary that axis Z of local coordinate system of contact elements should be directed towards target elements, and axis Z of local coordinate system of target elements be directed towards contact elements. It is more preferable to have contact elements on more massive, less movable detail with a rougher grid. Interchange button interchanges the position of contact and target elements. In the lower part of dialog box, there are parameters of a current contact area that can be changed by pressing Change properties button.

Using Delete button you can delete the selected contact area from the contact area list.

In the lower part of dialog there are parameters of the current contact zone which can be changed by pressing Apply and Set for all zones button. Pressing of the button Ok allows to accept changes of parameters of the chosen contact zone and to close the "Contact Elements Information" dialog box.

Normal stiffness and Tangent stiffness are characteristics of the fictitious elements connecting details in contact. It is preferable to choose rigidity equal to that of a surface layer of contacting parts if the clearance between details is absent, and several orders less if the clearance is present.

Radius - parameter used for initial contact area determination. If the distance between a contact and a target element from one area is less than a given parameter, it is supposed that this pair of elements participates in contact at the initial stage.

Maximum allowable penetration - the accuracy parameter that specifies maximum allowable penetration of one detail into another.

Extra stiffness - the parameter used at calculation of efforts in contact area. It is preferable to choose stiffness equal to stiffness of a surface layer of contacting details.

Search factor is considered for correction of convergence process (if derivative is used).

111

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.126 Contact Elements Info dialog box

Soils Info

The command invokes Soil List dialog box for creation, editing and deleting of soils. Dialog contains soil list and image of the selected soil.

Fig. 2.127 Soil List dialog box

Edit button invokes Soil Layers dialog box for selected soil where you can change soil structure.

112

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

New button invokes Soil Name dialog box for new soil creation. After that it will be accessible in

Foundations dialog.

Delete button allows to delete selected soil. The ground cannot be deleted to those while it is used in calculation of any foundation.

Fig. 2.128 Soil Layers dialog box

The soil list is presented in the left part of dialog. You can set soil structure according to engineering-geological estimation. To set soil layer it is necessary to select its type from the drop-down list. It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc. All edit fields can be changed by mouse double click after selection of predetermined variant.

Materials

The command calls a dialog box shown below for materials management. This dialog contains the materials that are directly used in the model or suggested for use.

Shortcut:

Fig. 2.129 Materials dialog box

Add button allows to add new material to the dialog list. In the appeared dialog box you can select the basic material type (steel, concrete, masonry) with predefined characteristic properties.

Fig. 2.130 Basic Material Types dialog box

113

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Edit button allows you to change the properties of already existing material. It calls the Groups of

Material Properties dialog.

Assign to All assigns current material to all elements.

Assign to Selected assigns current material to selected elements.

Color button allows to select color for current material.

Delete button deletes current material. If the deleted material is used in model, system will display warning.

Fig. 2.131 Groups of Material Properties dialog box

After selecting the type of basic material in the dialog box, you can specify the name of the material and define a set of its characteristic properties, which are separated in different groups by the various properties.

Groups of material properties:

- General,

- Isotropic,

- Anisotropic,

- Physical NL,

- Thermal,

- Laminate.

Strength are presented in General Properties group; physical properties such as Modulus of Elasticity,

Poisson's Ratio, etc. are presented in Isotropic Properties group.

For example, such general mechanical properties of the material as the Yield Point and Ultimate

<< button allows to add groups of properties from available list to current.

>> button allows to remove groups of properties from current list.

Edit button allows to edit properties of selected group in Current Properties list. For example, dialog box as shown below appears when editing the material properties from the group of Isotropic

Properties.

Fig. 2.132 Material Isotropic Properties dialog box

114

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

But dialog box content may depend on basic material type as shown below when editing the material properties from the group of General Properties. a) for basic type Steel b) for basic type Concrete

Fig. 2.133 Material General Parameters dialog box

DB button allows you to select the material properties from the database. Thus if the button was pressed in Groups of Material Properties dialog box, when selecting material, all the properties in the current groups of properties will be replaced with the properties that characterized material from the database. But when you press the same buttons in dialog boxes shown above and select material from database, only those properties will be edited that are available in these windows.

Anisotropic Properties

Anisotropic material can be set for plate and solid finite elements. Accounting of anisotropic properties for materials is carried out for all calculation types but with condition that local coordinate system of model finite elements must be codirectional.

Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's Ratio and Shear Modulus can be set in local coordinate system of finite elements for orthotropic materials.

The stiffness matrix is set in local coordinate system of FE for anisotropic materials. The flexibility matrix can be set alternatively.

Fig. 2.134 Additional tab for orthotropic properties

115

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.135 Additional tab for anisotropic properties

Fig. 2.136 Additional tab for anisotropic properties

Physical Nonlinear Properties

Addition of this group of properties to current invokes dialog window for stress-strain curve definition for nonlinear materials.

Fig. 2.137 Type of Stress-Strain Curve dialog box

Function editor is launched to define material nonlinearity graph after selection of nonlinearity type: Perfectly Plastic or Arbitrary Law.

Note! The plasticity account is possible for plate and solid elements at performance of

physically nonlinear analysis.

116

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.138 Function editor window

Shear Modulus of Elasticity dialog box appears on the screen when select Bilinear Hardening.

Fig. 2.139 Tangent Modulus of Elasticity dialog box

Thermal Properties

It is necessary to set material thermal properties for structure elements to perform steady-state or transient heat transfer analysis.

Thermal Properties of material can be set as constant values, graphs, tables or functions in

Thermal Properties dialog box. This dialog contains Anisotropic Material option using which you can set Heat Conduction on X, Y and Z directions.

117

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.140 Thermal Properties dialog box

Laminate Properties

This group contains layered composite (laminate) properties. Laminate is a plate with a thickness which is small compared with other two dimensions. The plane of the laminate is usually XY, Z axis is perpendicular to this plane. Laminate consists of thin layers of an orthotropic material, each layer is laid in a plane at predetermined angle.

Fig. 2.141 Laminate local coordinate system

118

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.142 Laminate layers

In the dialog box shown below you can create a laminate with layers each of which can have own characteristics and parameters such as material, thickness and fiber direction.

Fig. 2.143 Laminate Properties dialog box (Layers page)

Add button allows to add layer to a set of laminate.

Edit button allows to edit selected layer parameters.

There are various options in the right part of the page that can help in work with layers.

The final characteristics of a laminate are presented in Final Characteristics page of the dialog.

119

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.144 Laminate Properties dialog box (Final Characteristics page)

Basic material type Masonry

Fig. 2.145 Material Masonry dialog box

Stone type

– drop-down list of stone types.

Stone subtype

drop-down list of stone subtypes, for the set of additional properties of separate stone types.

Voidage

drop-down list for the set of stone voidage. Voidage is set in percentage of material volume. There will be a choice between light and heavy stones for natural stones in the list.

Masonry row height edit field is intended for row height setting.

More button invokes dialog box where can be set additional parameters of material.

120

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.146 Extra parameters of Material Masonry dialog box

Design resistances button opens additional part of dialog which is used for setting of additional design resistances of masonry.

Restore data button sets material parameters by default.

Fig. 2.147 Additional part of Material Masonry dialog box

Values of design resistances are taken from SNiP II-22-81* by default. Those values can be displaying taking into account reduction factors of design resistances. For this purpose it is necessary to mark option opposite to the corresponding factor.

Factors by SNiP button pressing gives information dialog about factors.

Values of design resistances are highlighted with different colors: black - value by default, dark blue - the user value, red - incorrect value.

Selected Elements Moment of Inertia

The command calls a dialog window with the information on weight, coordinates of the center of mass and the moments of inertia concerning axes of global coordinates of the selected elements.

Model Moment of Inertia

The command calls a dialog window with the information on weight, coordinates of the center of mass and the moments of inertia concerning axes of global coordinates of all model.

121

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Model Dimensions

The command invokes window with the information about model dimensions and the maximum deviations relative to global coordinates.

Fig. 2.148 Model Info dialog box

Model Info

The command calls a dialog window with the information about model. The information about number of nodes, elements, etc. is presented in window.

Fig. 2.149 Model Info dialog box

Additional Model Info

The command invokes dialog box with the expanded information about model

characterizing hardware requirements for performing calculation. To display information about current model it is necessary to press Calculate button.

122

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.150 Additional Model Info dialog box

Design menu

Design Element Type

These commands allow to select type of design elements: steel, reinforced (concrete and masonry) or wood. The detailed description of this menu commands and work with them is presented in chapter 5.

Design Elements

The command invokes dialog box where it is possible to work with design elements, and also look through calculation results. External interface of a dialog depends of selected design element type.

Shortcut:

Selected Objects to Design Element

The command places the selected elements in ONE RC design element. Warning appears on the screen if impossible to create design element. The reasons, according to which elements cannot compose a design element, are checked in dialog.

Fig. 2.151 Unable to create rod design element warning

123

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.152 Unable to create plate design element warning

Shortcut:

Selected Objects to Separate Design Elements

The command places each selected element (finite element) to separate RC design element.

Shortcut:

Selected Objects to RM Design Element

The command places the selected elements in ONE RM design element. Warning appears on the screen if impossible to create design element. The reasons, according to which elements cannot compose a design element, are checked in dialog.

Fig. 2.153 Unable to create plate design element warning

Shortcut:

Selected Objects to Separate RM Design Elements

The command places each selected element (finite element) to separate RM design element.

Shortcut:

Delete from Design Element

The command deletes selected objects from design elements.

Shortcut:

Updating of Punching List

The command updates punching list of design elements

– RC shells.

Shortcut:

Connections of Steel Structures

These menu commands allow to create parametrical models of steel joints automatically in APM

Graph.

124

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Calculation menu

The commands of this menu allow calculation and calculation parameters setting.

Calculation

The command executes a calculation of the construction. After a command call, on the screen appears a dialog window requiring a type of calculation that is performed and its parameters.

The calculation parameters are being duplicated with the command

Calculation | Calculation

Parameters.

See in detail about the calculations and results of them in Chapters 4 and 6. The static calculation is executed for all available load cases and load combinations. Calculations of buckling, nonlinear, stationary and nonstationary conductivity, the forced oscillation, natural frequencies are carried out only for the current load case. The calculation of contact interaction is executed during a nonlinear calculation.

By the selection of one (or several) the calculation stations the additional parameters for the selected analysis open. Check Temperature account

(steady or/and transient heat transfer) by static analysis to take into account thermal stress in static calculation.

Fig. 2.154 Analysis dialog

The calculations of direct currents, the electrostatic calculation, and the magnetostatic calculations, as well as the stationary electromagnetic calculation and high frequency modal analysis are carried out for specially prepared models with corresponding loads and boundary conditions threedimensional 4-node, 6-node and 8-node elements as well.

125

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.155 Analysis Types dialog box

Clicking OK button calls the following dialog box for selecting parameters of dynamic calculation

(if checkbox Transient Dynamic is selected):

Fig. 2.156 Forced oscillation dialog box

Damping characteristics of the structure is defined by Logarithmic Decrement of damping. This decrement is considered to be frequency independent.

You can define number of considered eigen shapes in the title field. The calculation uses natural modes decomposition method.

You can define desired time interval in the field Time interval, and number of desired time moments in the next input field.

In Result map group you can select whether to use a deformed shape of structure or not to show the result parameter map. You can also select parameters to be displayed by pressing Select button.

126

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.157 Result Selection dialog box

During the calculation, a dialog box that reflects calculation stage is shown on the screen.

Fig. 2.158 Calculation in progress dialog box

Calculation of Super Elements

This command starts static calculation of super elements.

Fatigue Calculation for Stochastic Load Cases

This command starts fatigue calculation for previously defined stochastic load cases.

Design

The command performs bearing capacity check of design elements. It demands preliminary performance of static calculation since it uses values of stresses and loads. All parameters of calculations and properties of design elements can be set in

Results / Design Elements. See also

Chapter 1 Design elements.

Design of Reinforced Elements

The command starts reinforcing calculation for all design elements. For reinforcing design it is necessary to perform static calculation and load or code combination calculation. Results are presented in Design Elements dialog box.

127

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Checking of Reinforced Elements

The command starts reinforcing checking calculation for all design elements. For reinforcing checking it is necessary to perform static calculation and load or code combination calculation. Results are presented in Design Elements dialog box.

Code Combinations

The command invokes Code Combination dialog box where table of load cases can be defined for code calculation.

Calculation of the most dangerous code combination for rods is performed on the basis of extreme values of several groups of parameters, namely: normal and tangent stresses in characteristic points of sections, longitudinal and lateral forces. Selection principles of load combinations and their factors are stated in building regulations

5

.

To perform code combination, it is necessary to set all considered load cases. For this purpose, select load case from Case name list where all available Load cases are presented. Then from the list

Case Type select the necessary type. Types presented in this list, namely "Constant", "Temporary long", "Temporary short", "Specific", correspond to building regulations. "Static wind" load case allocates to separate type, because no more than one wind load can participate at code combination calculation in each combination. Except for this property, static wind load case enters code combination as a usual temporary short load.

Fig. 2.159 Load Combination dialog box

The detailed description see in Chapter 1.

Commands for Joints Calculation

These commands transfer initial data from APM Structure3D to APM Joint for joint calculation.

Select rods which have common node for joint calculation and press required button.

Shortcuts:

– Threaded Closed Joint

– Threaded Opened Joint

– Riveted Joint

– Single-Sided Welded Joint

5

SNiP 2.01.07-85.

128

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

In the appeared dialog box select load case with the joint nodal loads. APM Sturcture3D will transfer joint geometry according to the selected section and loads to APM Joint. Each rod and nodal load are placed to a separate layer in APM Joint.

The next stages of joint calculation are stated in APM Joint documentation.

Fatigue Calculation

minimum force influence on the structure at cyclic loads. It is supposed that the forces acting on the structure change following one law.

The command calls a window with installations for fatigue calculation of a structure.

Initial data for fatigue calculation are stress-strain states corresponds to the maximum and

Fig. 2.160 Fatigue Calculation dialog box

Вкладка Simple Calculation предполагает задание границ изменения внешней нагрузки по результатам статического расчета.

The group

Static results are considered as... allows user to set the maximum and minimum values of the load acting on model of design. So, if static calculation has been performed for an average level of loading it is necessary to choose radio

button Arbitrary point (2), and then, in edit boxes

Factor for maximum (1) and Factor for minimum (3) to enter dimensionless factors, by which it is necessary to increase the system of forces to have extreme load cases. If static calculation has been lead for a level of loading corresponding the maximal pressure it is necessary to choose radio button

Maximum (1)

and in edit box Factor for minimum (3) to specify dimensionless factor by which it is necessary to increase system of forces to have the level of loading corresponding the minimal pressure.

The table of the factors used at calculation is located in the bottom part of dialog. A certain set of factors can be set for each material.

129

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.161 Dialog window " Fatigue Calculation Parameters" tab "Materials".

The tab "Materials" of the dialog "Parameters of a Fatigue Calculation" contains a list of the fatigue limit of all materials reduction coefficients for an editable model.

Fig. 2.162 Fatigue Calculation Parameters dialog tab "Asymmetry of Loading".

The tab "Asymmetry of Loading" is presented in Fig. 2.180. The content of the tab allows to carry out an asymmetric load to symmetric load, with the asymmetry index of R = -1.

130

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.163 Fatigue Calculation Parameters tab Parameters of Destruction dialog.

The tab "Parameters of Destruction" contains two groups of specified parameters, Fig. 2.181.

The group "Wohler Parameters of a Fatigue Curve" allows to specify quantities defining a type of fatigue curve.

The group "Parameter of Adjusted Linear Density of Destruction" - allows to introduce the

Experimental correction of a sum of damages.

Buttons of a calculation start of different fatigue calculations methods are located at the bottom of a dialog that is examined.

The push on "1" button carries out a start for a calculation on the simplest algorithm when load consists of alternating sequences with a constant value of maximum and minimum, see a scheme with the tab "Simplest calculation" of this dialog.

The push on «2» button leads to a start for a calculation of a fatigue algorithm for random load based on the results of a static calculation.

The push on «3» button leads to a start for a calculation of a fatigue algorithm for random load based on the calculation results of forced fluctuations for super-elements.

More detailed information about coefficients is in Chapter 4 of the Fatigue Detachment.

Calculation Options

The command calls a Calculation options dialog window with pages corresponding to each calculation type. Calculation options are saved to *.frm file with the model. After opening of model is no needed to set calculation options anew.

131

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.164 Analysis Options (static analysis tab) dialog box

Stresses in rods are calculated in a discrete number of cross-sections. You can define the number of cross-sections in Number of cross-sections for stress calculation input field. In order to calculate stress distribution in the rod cross-section, the cross-section is meshed into small finite elements. There are two meshing algorithms: with regular and non-regular mesh. Regular algorithm is faster than the non-regular on the same number of elements, but requires more elements to keep sufficient precision. Here you can choose one of these algorithms and also define the approximate number of elements. Push Default button to restore program initial number of finite elements.

Checkbox Check structure connection before calculation allows you to turn off this option. You can perform this checking using Tools / Check connection menu command.

Checkbox Use Shear Center for Cross-Section Calculation allows you to take into account shear effects for rod calculation.

Using Equation solve method list you can select the most suitable method for static calculation.

In LDL method global stiffness matrix of the whole structure is factorized into the form of [L]

T

[D][L] and then solved using Gauss procedure. Using LDL method stiffness matrix is in RAM and if it is not enough Windows automatically creates temp files on a hard disk. The method has restriction on problem dimensions - 300 thousand DOFs approximately.

Frontal method is most suitable for models with great number of degrees of freedom. Its main feature is that global stiffness matrix is assembled implicitly and stored on disk and the system of linear equations is solved with some kind of front propagating through all DOFs.

The following parameters are valid only for frontal method:

Working RAM size

– RAM size used for solver to store “front” and other frequently accessed data.

File size for matrix storage

– selected according to the operating system installed and file system used.

MT_Frontal is the modified frontal method for multiprocessor computers and in many cases works much faster, than LDL and Frontal. However its efficiency strongly depends on half-width value of stiffness matrix.

Sparse is the improved method for work with the sparse matrixes, a providing increment of calculation speed. By Sparse method only nonzero elements are stored in a stiffness matrix, and in temp files located on a hard disk. It is intended for large models with the high half-width of a stiffness matrix.

132

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.165 Analysis Options (nonlinear analysis tab) dialog box

To perform nonlinear analysis you must define type of nonlinearity; it can be geometric or physical. Available analysis types:

- Geometric NL;

- Analysis with one-dir supports;

- Physical NL (small strain theory);

- General NL (small strain theory);

- Physical NL (large strain theory) - flow theory;

- General NL (large strain theory) - flow theory;

Account of general or physical nonlinearity is available for solid elements only.

You can define relative nonlinear analysis accuracy and maximum number of iterations for nonlinear analysis. Calculate unloading is the additional option for physically nonlinear problems. LDL or Sparse can be set as a solution method.

Fig. 2.166 Analysis Options (buckling analysis tab) dialog box

There are three available solution methods for buckling analysis:

The Arnoldi iterations is a method of a generalized eigenvalue problem solution, allowing to get the reserve coefficient with relatively low costs of processor time. But the method does not let to get a solution for systems with a great number of freedom degrees, therefore is available only to a version of x32 system. The method determines only one minimum resistance reserve coefficient.

Determinant or Determinant (Sparse)

– procedure for models with high number of DOF. For this method you can define maximum value of buckling safety factor in corresponding field to narrow seek area. Parameters of analysis accuracy and maximum number of iterations are set for the methods.

Maximum value of buckling safety factor, memory size for algorithm work, MB and file size for matrix

storage (size of segment), MB are parameters only for determinant method.

Note: the general size of files on hard drive will depend on dimension and topology of the problem.

133

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Lanczos allows to calculate previously defined number of buckling shapes in the neighborhood of the rough value of buckling safety factor.

FEAST allows to calculate previously defined number of buckling shapes in the search interval of buckling safety factors.

Fig. 2.167 Analysis Options (modal analysis tab) dialog box

For eigen frequencies calculation there are different solvers: Arnoldi's iterations, subspace

Iterations, subspace Iterations (Sparse), subspace iterations (Sparse) without orthogonalization,

Lanczos iterations.

Fig. 2.168 Analysis Options (reinforcement tab) dialog box

Structure model can be recalculated with accounting of reinforcement stiffness that can be takes from design or checking calculation.

Design and checking calculation of reinforced concrete elements are realized in this version as a nonlinear and linear (strength calculation is performed by limiting loads criteria) problems.

Results menu

This menu contains commands that allow you to view and analyze calculation results.

Select Super Element to get Results

This command allows to select one of the super elements to get results or whole model. The command will be activated only when calculation of super elements will be performed.

Loads

134

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The command calls a window, which allows you to view a set of numerical parameters of rods and plates: nodal loads, displacements, frame forces in rods and construction mass.

Result Map

The command calls a window to have a look at a number of design parameters. Besides, it allows user to set different result presentation options.

Result type is selected in Result Type list. Rods, Plates, Solids lists specify specific parameter to display.

Below we give a description of some parameters.

UX

– displacement in X axis of global coordinate system.

ROTX

– rotation angle around X axis in global coordinate system.

USUM

– total displacement.

ROTSUM

– total rotation angle.

SX

– normal stress in X axis of element local coordinate system.

SXY

– tangent stress in surface with normal X and in Y direction of element local coordinate system.

SVM

– effective stress von Mises.

SMAXTAU

– equivalent stress by maximum shearing stress theory

SMOHR

– equivalent stress by Mohr theory

S

MAXTAU

S

1

S

3

;

S

MOHR

S

1

k S

3

,

S

1

,

S

3

– first and third principal stresses; k – relation of tensile yield stress to compressive yield stress for materials of plates.

Signs “+” and “–“ in designation of plate parameter mean the plate surface it calculated on. “+” means plate surface in Z axis (normal) direction of plate coordinate system. “-” means plate surface in opposite Z axis (normal) direction of plate coordinate system.

“max” – maximum absolute value by plate thickness.

Similar stress components with an index 0 (SX0, SXY0, SVM0 etc.) are corresponding to stress components for median plate surfaces. Normal and tangent stresses can be both positive, and negative unlike positive equivalent stresses. Positive value

– tensile stress, and negative – compressive stress.

For more detail, finite element information see Chapter 7.

Fig. 2.169 Result Selection dialog box

Scale Factor text field specifies the scale factor for drawing a deformed structure.

Averaged Node Values flag concerns parameter map drawing in isoareas form. If this flag is switch on the values of selected parameters in a node will be averaged over all elements with this node.

Meaning of other fields is obvious from their designation.

When result map is displayed, you can see numerical value of specified result by pressing left mouse button in Selection mode at area in question.

135

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Stress in Cross-section

The command enables a mode, which allows you to view stress map in arbitrary cross-section of the rod. To view a stress map, select a rod then move the arrow that appears on the rod to reach desired position. After you have set the arrow at a desired position, click to call a stress map window.

The command is available only in Stress Map and Results views.

Show Element Forces

The command calls a force selection dialog box that allows you to select force components for epures shown below.

The group of radio buttons is used to select force component. Select checkbox Show values on

Diagram to see values on frame forces epures. See also chapter 4.

Fig. 2.170 Rod Forces dialog box

Support Reactions

The command calls a window with base reactions represented by a table of values. Each row in the column represents reactions in one node. When a row is selected, the corresponding node is highlighted in a different color. More detailed information about reactions can be found in chapter 6.

Quantity Survey

The command displays the summary table of rod elements.

Fig. 2.171 Quantity survey table of model rod elements dialog box

136

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Code Combination Results

The command displays table with results of code combination calculation.

Fig. 2.172 Results of code combination for rod

Rods

At code combination calculation extreme values of normal and tangent stresses in section characteristic points are defined.

For normal stresses:

i

N

F

M y z i

I y

M

I z z z i

, i

– section point (i = 1…8).

If

y

 

b

2 и

z

 

h

2

, it will be:

i

F

N

M y l z

,

j

M z l y

,

j

.

For tangent stresses:

y

F

Q y

2

2

l

M

ip l y

2

y

1

;

z

F

Q z

2

2

l z

1

M

ip l z

2

.

Fig. 2.173 Rod cross-section points

137

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Table 2.1

– Designation of RSU criteria for rods

Symbol in

RSU table

S1+

S2+

S3+

S4+

S5+

S6+

S7+

S8+

S1-

S2-

S3-

S4-

S5-

S6-

S7-

S8-

Symbol in equations

1

2

3

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

4

5

6

7

8

Symbol in

RSU table

T5+

T6+

T7+

T8+

T5-

T6-

T7-

T8-

N+

N-

Qy+

Qy-

Qz+

Qz-

Plates

Symbol in equations

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

N

N

Q y

Q y

Q z

Q z

Fig. 2.174 Results of code combination for plate

138

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Stresses are calculated in upper and lower faces taking into account bending on following dependences: step

H

X

(

B

)

N

X

6

M h

2

X

;

H

Y

(

B

)

N

Y

6

M h

2

Y

;

H

(

B

)

T

XY

6

M

2

XY

;

h

where h

– plate thickness, В and Н – indexes of upper and lower plate faces. Angle changes with

22 , 5

.

Table 2.2

– Designation of RSU criteria for plates

Angle, grad.

90

90

67,5

67,5

45

45

22,5

22,5

0

0

-22,5

-22,5

-45

-45

-67,5

-67,5

Symbol in

RSU table

Sh90+

Sh90-

Sh67_5+

Sh67_5-

Sh45+

Sh45-

Sh22_5+

Sh22_5-

Sh0+

Sh0-

Sh_22_5+

Sh_22_5-

Sh_45+

Sh_45-

Sh_67_5+

Sh_67_5-

Symbol in equations

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

В

Symbol in

RSU table

Sl90+

Sl90-

Sl67_5+

Sl67_5-

Sl45+

Sl45-

Sl22_5+

Sl22_5-

Sl0+

Sl0-

Sl_22_5+

Sl_22_5-

Sl_45+

Sl_45-

Sl_67_5+

Sl_67_5-

90

90

45

45

0

0

Th90+

Th90-

Th45+

Th45-

Th0+

Th0-

В

В

В

В

В

В

Tl90+

Tl90-

Tl45+

Tl45-

Tl0+

Tl0-

Symbol in equations

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Н

Qx+

Qx-

Qy+

Qy-

Q

X

Q

X

Q

Y

Q

Y

Buckling

The command calls a buckling safety factor dialog box. This factor can be obtained after buckling or deformation calculation.

139

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 2.175 Buckling dialog box

Press Shape button to see buckling shape of the structure. See chapter 6 for more information.

Natural Frequencies

The command calls a window with natural frequencies for the structure. Press Shape button to see mode shape corresponding to selected frequency.

Fig. 2.176 Natural Frequencies Results dialog box

Animation

This command allows to display maps of results (stress, strain, displacements, eigen shapes, etc.) in animation mode.

Fig. 2.177 Animation parameters dialog box

Forced Oscillations

The command shows animated result map for dynamic response of the structure based on forced oscillations calculation results.

Graph of Displacements

The command allows you to see graphs of displacements in time in global axes for arbitrary node.

Graph of Stress

The command allows you to see stress-time diagram for arbitrary rod cross-section.

Longevity at Fatigue Stochastic Load Case

140

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The command displays the results of fatigue calculation.

Result Animation of Heat Transfer Analysis

The command invokes animation window with heat transfer results.

Result Map of Heat Transfer Analysis

The command invokes dialog box with available heat transfer results.

Result Options of Heat Transfer Analysis

The command invokes dialog box for setting options of heat transfer results map.

Reinforcement Map

The command invokes a window for viewing the results of reinforced elements. Besides, it allows to set various options for representation of reinforcing map according to table.

Table 2.3

– Reinforcing parameters

Results

Design/Checking status

Element type

Rods

Plates

Status

Status

Parameters Comments

Reinforcement ratio

Rods

Plates

Reinforcement ratio

1

– reinforcing is designed

0

– reinforcing was not designed

-1

– reinforcing is not designed

Reinforcement ratio in area extent

Reinforcement ratio in area extent

Rod reinforcement

Plate reinforcement

Reinforcement utilization factor of rods

Reinforcement utilization factor of plates

Rods

Plates

Rods

Plates

Summary reinforcement ratio

Reinforcement ratio along X axis

Reinforcement ratio along Y axis

ASSUM

Upper longitudinal reinforcement

Bottom longitudinal reinforcement

Upper lateral longitudinal reinforcement

Bottom lateral longitudinal reinforcement (for T and I sections)

Transverse reinforcement along Z axis

Transverse reinforcement along Y axis

Along X axis on both sides

Along Y axis on both sides

Along X axis on top

Along X axis on bottom

Along Y axis on top

Along Y axis on bottom

Longitudinal reinforcement along Z axis

Longitudinal reinforcement along Y axis

By time point of crack occurrence along Z axis

By time point of crack occurrence along Y axis

By skew bending

By concrete strip between oblique plane along Z axis

By oblique plane on shear force action along Z axis

By oblique plane on moment action along Z axis

By concrete strip between oblique plane along Y axis

By oblique plane on shear force action along Y axis

By oblique plane on moment action along Y axis

By strength of an element between dimensional sections

By strength of dimensional sections

By combined action of torsion and bending moments

By combined action of torsion moment and shear force

Maximum along

Х axis along Y axis

Reinforcement area, mm^2

Reinforcing intensity, mm^2/ mm

From 0 to 1

From 0 to 1

141

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Crack opening width

Rods

Plates

Short-term

Long-term

Short-term along

Х axis

Short-term along Y axis

Long-term along X axis

Long-term along Y axis

Reinforcement Result Options

The command invokes a window for setting options of reinforcement map.

Result Options

The command invokes a window for setting options of results map.

Result Range

Actual width of crack opening, mm

The command allows user to define values range for result map drawing. It calls a dialog box shown below.

Fig. 2.178 Result Range dialog box

Window menu

This menu contains commands that allow you to activate and arrange windows.

Cascade

Tile

This command arranges all child windows in a cascade format.

This command arranges all child windows in a tiled format.

Arrange Icons

This command arranges icon windows.

View 1, View 2

The command activates view.

Help menu

Contents

The command shows help contents.

About

The command calls APM Structure 3D dialog box that contains information about the program.

142

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 3. Cross-section Editor

APM Graph is used as the cross-section editor.

Difference between the cross-section editor and

APM Graph are additional functions for working with sections. The description of the main menu and toolbar commands can be found in the APM Graph user’s guide. Cross-section editor allows user to draw a cross-section and save it in single file or add to the cross-section library. Further cross-sections stored in library can be used to set rod cross-section in 3D frame construction editor. Cross-section editor is enabled by File / New / Cross-Section.

Cross-section editor window is shown below.

Fig. 3.1 Cross-section editor window

Contour menu

These menu commands give the opportunity of cross-section creation through simple, and user defined contour.

Fig. 3.2 Contour menu

Simple Contour

This command activates the mode of automatic contour selection. To select a contour click the mouse on any contour element. First you should specify external contour and after that, the internal ones, if any. The resulting contours are highlighted in dark blue color. Corresponding contour can be found only if it is closed. Press OK button in contour dialog box after contours selection. The area inside the selected contours will be filled with a color. It means that contour is defined.

To remove contour click mouse inside the contour area in Delete mode .

Shortcut:

143

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

User Defined Contour

This command activates the mode of closed contour selection manually. It is used when contours cannot be defined automatically. For contour selection click mouse on contour elements one by one.

To remove contour click mouse inside the contour area in Delete mode .

Shortcut:

Library menu

These menu commands allow you to work with libraries.

Fig. 3.3 Library menu

Add to Library

This command enables a dialog box, which allows you to add created section to cross-section library.

Get from Library

This command enables a dialog box, which allows you to load created section from cross-section library to editor.

New Library

This command enables a dialog box, which allows you to create new cross-section library.

Mesh Parameters

This command enables a dialog box, which allows you to set mesh type and number of section elements.

Cross-section creation

The cross-section can be created in four ways:

Create in the cross-section editor.

Open in cross-section editor earlier created file in *.agr format.

Import to the cross-section editor through *.dxf file format.

Insert from section database in the form of parametrical model.

Let's consider each ways in detail.

1. Process of section creation consists of several stages. Cross-section seems to be a twodimensional area, and two-dimensional area is determined in editor as set of contours. The contour is the closed curve consisting of basic elements. First, it is necessary to draw section contours, using drawing tools such as line segments, arcs, etc. The next step is contours specifying by Contour /

Simple contour and Contour / User Defined Contour commands. The resulting surface is filled with grey color. Explanatory example is given in a Fig. below.

144

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 3.4 Example of cross-section and contours forming it

You can save document at any time using Save (File menu, File toolbar or Ctrl+S) or File /

Save As command. Cross-section file can be saved in *.wcr (cross-section file) or *.agr (APM Graph file).

2. Open button (File menu, File toolbar or Ctrl+O) allows to open a file saved before (*.wbc cross-section file or *.agr APM Graph file).

3. Section import from *.dxf file format is carried out by File / Import command.

4. At section creation, it is possible to load available parametrical models created in APM Graph.

Databases are managed by APM Base kernel (databases management system). The standard APM

Graph command Draw / Block /

Insert Object from Database is used for access to databases.

Parametrical sections are located in APM Mechanical Data and APM Section Data (C: / Documents and Settings / All Users / Application Data / APM Winmachine / DataBase).

It is possible to load parametric model from *.agp file. Use Draw / Block /

Insert Block command.

It should be noted that any block or parametric model needs to be unblocked before contour selection. Use Modify /

Explode Block command for unblocking.

Fig. 3.5 Example of parametrical model insert from database

145

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Cross-section library

Addition new section to library

APM WinMachine supply libraries of standard sections, which are enlarged and updated. Section libraries are installed to APM WinMachine directory (by default C:\Program Files\APM

WinMachine).

Cross-section editor tools allow user to create user libraries that can be used for nonstandard sections.

After a section is drawn, it is necessary to select Library

/ Add to Library command to add it to the library. On the screen there will be a dialog box shown below.

Fig. 3.6 Add Cross-Section to Library dialog box

Except for section drawing commands, commands for creation of cross-sections library are added in the editor.

Loading cross-section from library

For loading cross-section from a library, select Library / Get from Library command. Dialog box

Library shown below will appear on the screen. This dialog box allows you to load cross-section from library, create a new library, delete a section from the library and make cross-sections exchange between two libraries.

Fig. 3.7 Library dialog box

For loading cross-section, select its name in the list-box and press OK. Section parameters are shown in dialog box center, cross-section preview is shown on the right. For library selection, press

Load library button. To delete cross-section, press Delete section button. New Library button allows you to create new library. This action is identical to New Library menu command. Get Library Info button calls a dialog box showing library information. Library exchange button allows you to import and export sections between two libraries.

146

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Editing cross-section geometrical parameters

Necessary geometrical parameters of section are calculated automatically at section addition to library and can be edited. For editing section select Library / Get from library menu command. There will be Library dialog box on the screen. Press button Edit for modifying section parameters. Set demanded parameters in Section Parameters dialog box.

Fig. 3.8 Section Parameters dialog box

There is a triangular finite element meshing during new section geometrical parameters calculation. By default, the approximate number of final elements equals 3200 for uniform mesh and

600 for irregular mesh. User can change meshing parameters of section having selected Library /

Mesh Parameters main menu command. This command enables a Mesh Parameters dialog box where you can enter the required values.

Fig. 3.9 Mesh parameters

The default meshing parameters correspond to a solved problem and do not need to be corrected in most cases.

Exchange between libraries

It is necessary to press Library exchange button for sections exchange between libraries. This command calls a dialog box shown below.

147

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 3.10 Library Exchange dialog box

Load button allows to load library into a corresponding part of box (left or right).

>> button copies selected sections from left library to right.

<< button copies selected sections from right library to left.

All >> button copies all sections from left library to right.

<< All button copies all sections from right library to left.

This icon means that section belongs to that library.

This icon means that section was imported from another library.

Cross-section library creation

Different ways let you create new library:

1. Library / New Library menu command.

This command will call a New Library dialog box shown below.

2. New library button in Library dialog box.

Fig. 3.11 New Library dialog box Fig. 3.12 Section types

Use Save library to edit box to enter library file name. Set Path button sets path to the file.

Library Description edit box allows you to write additional information about the library.

148

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 4. Calculations

This Chapter describes different calculations performed in APM Structure3D.

APM Structure3D allows you to make the following types of calculation:

Linear Static analysis

Buckling analysis

Modal analysis

Transient Dynamic analysis

Nonlinear analysis (geometric, physical and general with contact interaction)

Steady-State and Transient Heat Transfer analysis

Fatigue calculation

Seismic calculation

Code combination calculation

Design calculation

Transient heat transfer

Constant current analysis.

Electrostatic analysis.

Magnetostatic analysis.

Nonstationary electromagnetic analysis.

High-frequency modal analysis.

Brief description of all types of calculation is given in this chapter. Detailed theoretical examination can be found in books on finite element method and buildings design.

Linear Static analysis

Static calculation is based on the matrix displacement method, in which unknown node displacements are obtained. The main equation for this method is the equilibrium equation

K

x

F

, where K

– stiffness matrix of the system, F – external loads vector, x – vector of unknown node displacements. Dimension of this system is equal to the number of degrees of freedom of the structure. In general case, every node has 6 degrees of freedom (3 linear and 3 angular). Solving this system, i.e. after we obtain all node displacements of the structure we find all other unknown parameters, such as deformations, stresses and internal forces.

In static calculation it is assumed that structure scheme is undistorted, and longitudinal loads acting in rods and plates does not affect bending moments.

You can obtain the following results after static calculation:

Linear and angular node displacements

Loads at rod ends, plate nodes and solid elements

Stresses acting in rods, plates and solid elements

Stress distribution in arbitrary cross-section of any rod

Force epures for entire structure

Specified parameters for separate beam such as: bending moments, torsion moments, lateral and axial forces, bending and torsion angles, stresses and strains along beams length. All these parameters are represented in the form of graphs and plotted in local rod coordinate system. You can obtain both relative deformation (displacements comparative to the line connecting two deformed edges of rod) and deformation in global coordinate system. In case of a structure consisting of only one rod, relative and total deformation are the same

Reactions (forces and moments) acting in supports

Total construction mass

Code combination

149

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Definition of code combination is made for design elements only. Code combination purpose is definition for each design element of such combinations based on existing load combinations, under which certain parameters tend to their respective extremum. Thus, the group of 30 criteria including values of normal and tangent stresses in characteristic points, and also axial and radial forces are considered. Selection principles of combinations and factors, with which combinations enter in code combinations, comply with those stated in building regulations. Calculation represents a search for all load combinations for each design element, and definition of criteria values, resulting from these load combinations. Then, the extremum criteria value is selected which represent the result of the calculation, together with the respective code combination. Calculation results can be used in calculation of bearing capacity of design elements.

Buckling analysis

Buckling calculation (by Euler) is applicable for structures in which elements are in a straight state under given loading, that is they work in tension or compression. For every structure with a given loading diagram, there is fixed load value, under which initial equilibrium shape becomes unstable.

Another stable

– strained – state becomes possible. When the structure gets out of its initial equilibrium shape we can say that the structure has buckled by Euler. The corresponding load that allows new steady shape is called critical load.

P

During calculation, all loads are reduced to nodes. Nodal loads vector is represented as

p

F

, where p is a scalar, called loading parameter, F

– external loading vector. Thus we consider simple loading, when all loads increase proportional to loading parameter p.

Result of buckling calculation is buckling safety factor that shows how many times more one need to increase external load (all force factors simultaneously) to make the system buckle, and buckling shape. Buckling calculation is made together with static calculation as far as we need to know axial forces in rods and stresses in plates that are received during static calculation. Buckling calculation (by

Euler) as well as static calculation is carried out regarding to strainless structure.

Mathematically buckling analysis is defined as eigen-value problem.

(

K

L

)

  

0 where

K

is stiffness matrix,

L

is geometry matrix,

is loading bottleneck and

is eigen displacement vector.

Modal analysis

Eigen frequencies calculation is carried out using distributed mass matrix. Calculation is based on solving generalized eigenvalue problem.

(

M

K

)

 

0 where

- circular eigen frequency,

M

- mass matrix,

K

- stiffness matrix,

- eigen shape vector.

Nonlinear analysis

In linear static analysis we assumed displacements to be small, but in many cases this assumption leads to inaccurate or wrong results even for strains remaining in linear elastic region. It is necessary to include geometrical nonlinearity into calculations in order to determine accurate displacements. I.e. membrane stresses can significantly decrease displacements in plate structures under bending loading, although they are usually excluded from computations. In some other cases displacements could be bigger than those predicted by linear theory

– important for load-carrying ability calculation.

For linear static calculation we used following relationship between strain and nodal displacements for element:

 

0

 

In nonlinear calculation we assume that strain depends nonlinearly on nodal displacements:

 

(

  

0

B

NL

(

q

)

)

 

This nonlinear component occurs from full expression for strain tensor:

150

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

ij = (Ui,j + Uj,i + Uk,i*Uk,j)/2

Using this nonlinear relationship and equating external and internal forces for finite element assembly we obtain nonlinear matrix equation that can’t be solved at once. To obtain solution we modify this matrix equation and apply iterative Newton-Raphson procedure. Final equation includes stress-stiffening (geometry) matrix used in buckling analysis and large displacement matrix.

For solution accuracy estimation we use maximum value of internal loads discrepancy. User can control solution process by defining accuracy of calculation and maximum number of iterations.

Transient Dynamic analysis

Forced oscillation calculation implies that structure is acted upon by loads that vary in time according to a certain law. Main equilibrium equation that describes system behavior is

M

 

C

 

K

  

P

(t ) where

M

- mass matrix,

C

- damping matrix,

K

- stiffness matrix,

- node displacements vector,

P

(t )

- time dependent external loading vector. Damping matrix

C

is approximated as linear combination of

K

and

M

matrices: where coefficients

1

and

C

K

M

2

1 2

are chosen so as to make oscillation decrements at eigen frequencies constant. This provides frequency independent damping that is typical for most construction materials and structures.

According to equilibrium equation notation all loads vary according to the same law. This equation is solved using mode shape decomposition:

 

i n

0

v i q i

(

t

) where

v i

- vector of i th

mode shape,

q i

- generalized displacements of i

th

mode shape.

Base matrix equation is reduced to n independent equations:

q

i

q

i

i

2

q i

R i

(

t

) where

i

-eigen frequencies for i

th

mode shape,

- damping coefficient, that can be represented as

, where

- logarithmic decrement of oscillation, equal to the logarithm of the ratio of amplitude at some moment in time to amplitude after oscillation period

  ln

A t

A t

1

.

M

i

Q i

v i

T

Mv i

- generalized mass for i

th mode shape

v i

T

P

- generalized load for i

th mode shape

Calculation is done under the assumption of zero initial conditions with the help of Duhamel integral. where

q i

A i e

n i t

sin(

i t

0

i

)

1

M i

i

t

0

Q i

(

t

)

e

n i

A

and

i

0

i

are determined out of initial conditions,

n i



T i



i

2



i

2

(

t

) sin(

i

(

t

))

d

,

For most structures consideration of different shapes of calculation is decreased with increase of frequency number i. For practical calculations consideration of first 3-5 mode shapes is sufficient. Use command Loads / Graph of Dynamic Load to define load

– time diagram.

To make calculation it is necessary to indicate the following parameters:

Load-time diagram

Logarithmic decrement for oscillations

151

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Number of mode shapes considered in calculation

Period of calculation

Number of time design moments

Results of forced oscillation calculation are:

Nodes displacements

Stresses acting in rods, plates and solid elements

Base reactions

Eigen frequencies and mode shapes

Fatigue calculation

After static calculation, it is possible to lead fatigue calculation. Parameters are set in the dialog box called from Calculation / Fatigue calculation / Definition of safety factor menu.

To perform such calculation, we find ranges of limiting values of normal and tangent stress components in points of design, which are designated as:

x

max

,

x

min

,

y

max

,

y

min

xy

max

,

xy

min

xz

max

,

xz

min

,

z

max

,

,

yz

max

,

z

min

yz

min

Calculations of equivalent stresses:

*

ex

amx

K

mx

Long-term strength value on normal stresses:

1

0 .

55

0 .

0001

b

b

Long-term strength value on tangent stresses

1

0 .

5

0 .

6

1

Correction factor of geometry, material and processing:

K



K

K

d

K

1

F

1

K

1

V

Busy hour-to-day ratio

K

1

q

(

c

1 )

q q q q

0

0

0

.

15

.

5

- low-carbon и low-alloy steels,

.

65

0 .

9

- cast iron,

- alloy steels,

- high-alloy steel here q - sensitivity coefficient

of material to local stresses and

c

- theoretical stress concentration factor. These parameters are set in Fatigue calculation dialog.

K

F

1

0 .

22 lg

Rz

 lg(

b

20

1 )

 here Rz - surface roughness Rz, is set in Fatigue calculation dialog.

K

F

0 .

575

K

F

0 .

425

K d

1

- scale factor, is set in Fatigue calculation dialog.

K

V

1

- strengthening factor is set in Fatigue calculation dialog.

Strength condition

e

s

2

ex

*

*

ey

*

ey

*

ez

*

ez

*

ex

2

2

1

1

* 2

exy

* 2

eyz

* 2

ezx

1

Safety factor of long-term strength

152

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide s

ex

*

*

ey

2

 

ey

*

*

ez

2

 

2

1

*

ez

ex

*

2

2

1

1

* 2

exy

* 2

eyz

* 2

ezx

Cycle number definition

In addition time of one cycle

of load

t c

is to be entered

m

5

80

b

- exponent of curve endurance

N

G

2 10

6

- base number of load cycles

Admissible number of load cycles at level of external stresses

e

If

e

1

- operating time is not limited

N

N

G



1

e



m

if

e

1

in this case operating time

t

t c

N

Results of fatigue calculation are accessible after static calculation at viewing Results Map.

Setting of fatigue parameters

For setting of fatigue material properties the point "Calculations" -> "Parameters of a fatigue calculation..." must be selected in the main menu. In the open dialog with the same name bookmarks for a reference to corresponding fatigue property fields, are available, Fig. 4.41.

Fig. 4.1 Dialog of fatigue parameters setup.

153

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The tab "Simple Calculation" contains an explanatory scheme for definition of parameters in the group "Static Calculation

Corresponds". All the fatigue methods of a calculation are based on the fact of the model's being assumed to work in an elastic zone. If during the calculation of stress in the node of one of the finite elements it exceeds the value of the limit of variability, a warning,

Fig.s 4.2, will be given.

Fig. 4.2 the Warning

about exceeding in the calculation of the yield stress.

The results of the «Simple Method» calculation are available after a static calculation in the point "Fatigue" of the dialog "Results Options", Fig. 4.3.

Fig. 4.3 Choice of simple fatigue calculation results.

Among the available values calculated after calculating the statics for "Simple Calculation of

Fatigue" - is "The Safety Factor" and "Number of Cycles ". The safety factor is defined as the ratio of the fatigue limit, to the calculated (the equivalent of the damaging effects of symmetrically loaded) stress in the elements of the construction.

Setting of fatigue strength endurance limit for normal (n) stresses and tangents (k) stresses is specified not in the dialog "Parameters of a Fatigue Calculation" but in the material parameter setup dialog, Fig. 4. 44. If the given fatigue limit values turn smaller than 0,001 MPa, calculation is carried out by the statistical formulae applicable for carbon and low alloyed steels:

For brittle materials (high carbon steel, cast iron) the statistical formula is another:

Therefore in this case computed values must be specified manually and one must set them in corresponding fields of a material properties setup dialog.

154

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.4 Dialog of general properties of the material.

For materials with fatigue curve, reflected on Fig.4.5, the basic number of cycles is corresponding to the physical endurance limit .

Fig. 4.5 Wohler's Curve for carbon and middle

alloyed steel.

The base number of N

G

cycles is accepted in determination of the fatigue limit for ferrous metals as [1,2,7]. For the materials near which the limit of a horizontal Wohler section of a fatigue curve is not detected, the concept «of the conditional fatigue limit» for which the base number is defined as for loading cycles is used.

The zone of unlimited fatigue corresponds to the lower stresses and the zone of limited fatigue

– to the high ones. Wohler's curve defines the number of cycles, probabilities of destruction corresponding to 50% for matching stress, definition

– symmetric load and the uniaxial intense one of state. One of the analytical descriptions of a curve of stamina:

Or

(1), where m is an exponent depending on material, the quality of machining process and thermo processing [1,2,7] its:

(2),

155

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Where K is the coefficient of reduction of the fatigue limit, the tensile strength in the MPa.

If the reserve in fatigue coefficient is larger than the unit which corresponds to the area of unlimited stamina, the derived number of cycles is limited with a value specified in the field "Number of

Cycles Before a Change of a Fatigue Curve " in the tab "Parameters of Destruction" (it is described below by the text). This is done in order not to display the infinite quantities in the charts.

The tab "Materials" of the dialog "Parameters of a Fatigue Calculation" contains a list on the coefficients of the fatigue limit reduction for all materials of an editable model.

Fig. 4.6 the Tab of parameters decreasing fatigue limit setup.

Description of used values and calculation for a final coefficient of reduction of the fatigue limit are described in [1,2].

The content of the tab "Asymmetry of Loading" allows to use a symmetric loading with the indicator of an asymmetry of R = -1 to carry out provision of asymmetric loading.

156

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.7 the Tab of properties of cast to symmetric loading cycle.

On basis of numerous experiments with samples of defined material R = -1 with use of statistical methods [3] the diagram of the limit of amplitudes limit of stresses is being revealed in coordinates of the average and half-span of stresses of cycle for specified durability.

Fig. 4.8 Diagram of the stresses limit for specified

durability.

See for the formulae of calculation of a st resses mean value (the subscript "м") and amplitude or halfspan (the «am» subscript) by:

(3),

σk

Where

Σn

, and tk and

τn are

– final values obtained in semi-cycle. starting values of stresses,

For approximation of a diagram of the stresses limit different dependencies one of which

– the correlation of Serensen

– Kinasoshvili is used:

(4).

The coefficients of sensitivity to an asymmetry of stresses cycle [1] approximate the diagram of the stress limit only in that part of a diagram where the mean values of stresses are far from the tensile strength. A linear dependence of the stress limit is assumed to be upset precisely in the range of fluidity. As has already been described above, a warning about the fact of excess over the limit of variability of calculated stresses equivalent in Mieses in an element of a model, Fig. 4.42 is issued in the program during the calculation.

157

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The tab "Asymmetry of Loading" exhibited switches for coefficients of sensitivity to an asymmetry of cycle «Calculate from » allows to make calculations on the following equations:

Where

σ b

is the tensile strength in the MPa.

But this formula is applicable only for steels and for light alloys that are deformed, the value calculated by the formula must be manually specified:

.

The tab "Parameters of Destruction" contains two groups of defined parameters; the Group

"Wohler Parameters of a Fatigue Curve" allows fig. 4.49 to define quantities defining a type of the fatigue curve which in the logarithmic coordinates consists of two segments, Fig. 4.45.

Fig. 4.9 the Tab of failure parameters.

A switch near the field "Exponent of a Segment of the Fatigue Curve" with the name «Calculate from

» is allowed to specify an exponent by the statistically revealed formula (2).

If the exponent is approximated by the other formula, these calculations must be manually made and specify in a matching field, becoming available after deactivation of a switch that was specified above.

Besides tabs, in the dialog "Parameters of fatigue calculation" some more important buttons are present. Pressing the button "OK" to save of all fatigue parameters specified in the dialog and closing of the dialog. Pressing the button "Apply" leads to the fact that, besides data save, (as for the "OK" button) data received in all methods of the fatigue calculation will be cleared.

Buttons of a calculation start of different fatigue calculations methods are located at the bottom of a dialog that is examined. The "1" and "2" buttons turn out inaccessible for the press before that point until all the following conditions are satisfied:

 windows of results of cards display are absent;

 finite elements type of plate and 8-node three-dimensional element are presented;

158

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Implemented calculation of statics.

The "3" button will be unavailable, until the same conditions are fulfilled except the latter one, instead of which, it is owing the calculation of forced fluctuations for super-elements (SE) described below is carried out.

Before to press of the "

1», «2» and «3» buttons new parameters for fatigue calculations must be saved by a press of an "Apply" button if they were. After a press of one of three buttons the dialog will be closed and a calculation will be made on a chosen algorithm.

The push on "1" button carries out a start for a calculation on the simplest algorithm when load consists of alternating sequences with a constant value of maximum and minimum, see a scheme with the tab "Simplest calculation" of this dialog.

The push on «2» button leads to a start for a calculation of a fatigue algorithm for random load based on the results of a static calculation.

The push on «3» button leads to a start for a calculation of a fatigue algorithm for random load based on the calculation results of forced fluctuations for super-elements.

Definition of random load

Random load is specified for dedicated loading or simultaneously for all loadings. The mechanism is the same as at definition of loading graphs. For a call to the dialog "Fatigue Stochastic Loadings for Load

Cases" the menu item "Stochastic

Loading

...» Fig. 4.50 must be selected in

"Loads" submenu.

The status of fatigue load can be as follows:

– "Not specified" when there is no load;;

– «Switched on» when load is set and turned on for a calculation;

– «Switched off» when load is specified, but disconnected for a calculation.

Fig. 4.10 Dialogue installation of random

load for loadings.

Only with the status "switched on" the block of load loading will be used in a random fatigue calculation. If load is absent, for its setting one must press the "Specify" button for a call to the dialog

"Fatigue Multistage Random Loading"; if load has already been specified, the same button will the name of "Change".

If setting of random load is selected «For all loadings», precisely this load will be used in a calculation at the choice of any loading in a calculation dialog, but only under a condition that a graph of load is set i n a point «For all Loadings» in the dialog "Graphs of Loads for Loadings". If a calculation must be made with random load specified for particular loading, a graph of load must be removed in the dialog "Graphs of Loads for Loadings" in the point «For all loadings».

The dialog "Fatigue Multistage Random Loading" allows combining several stages of loading each of which possesses its statistical parameters.

Group "General Parameters for a Calculation" fig. 4.51, is allowed to carry out determination of general for all stages parameters. The switch "Switch on for a Calculation" allows specifying from a dialog the status of load for the further calculation.

159

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.11 Dialog of definition by a multistage random loading

of all loadings; see the name of the dialog.

The parameter "Estimated Time of Loading Operation" responds in necessary time of multistage loading (for example, calculation of vibration). All the random fatigue calculation bases on an assumption about ergodicity of random impact that is synthesized. This property allows to switch from a calculation of a random function in all the wondered interval of time to the realization much lower in time, but possessing the same statistical characteristics. Such a necessity is caused mainly by a desire of calculation time reduction. Therefore the ratio of necessary calculation time to time of specified loading determines the number of repetitions which will subsequently be taken into consideration during calculation of reserve in durability.

In determination of stresses its maximum magnitude is the defining parameter of load, therefore for correct description of perturbing effect specified frequency it is recommended to specify digitization frequency as exceeding this quantity of frequency by a notch. If the spectrum of perturbing effect is specifying, in the field "General Digitization Frequency" a characteristic increased value of maximum significant frequency this will be specified for one of the loading stages. This parameter is defined before definition of the very first stage and is unavailable if at least one stage is already specified.

The parameter "Number of Points of an Inter-stages Smoothing" allows to specify the time interval where smoothing the joints will be facing each other involved in the calculation of the loading stages. If the stadium is one only, this parameter value is ignored.

The smoothing of joints is being drawn in two stages.

3) The smoothing of the ends (or only one end if the stage is initial or final) of each stage to a zero value with a linear function.

4) An inter-blocks smoothing, at the fact that already smoothed loading ends participate in a linear transition from the level of mathematical expectation (ME) of the previous stage to the

ME level of the next stage, Fig. 4.52.

160

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

With blue color the number of points of a smoothing is 10, with red color the number of points of a smoothing is 100.

Fig. 4.12 Fragment of the two stages graph with the different number of smoothing points.

The first stadium with МE = 3, the second stage with МE = -4.

The smoothing between stages with the different ME level makes sense only at setting of the value of a power factor or movement, when setting the value of acceleration and speed in knots CE,

MO value should be zero.

The list of random loading stages allows to clearly carry out comparison of determined statistical characteristics between each other on the below described parameters.

12. The number of a stage.

13. A type of the stage which can be read from a file, specified based on the correlation function and specified through spectral power density.

14. The name of the stage is a field defined by a user, allowing to identify the stages in a list between themselves.

15. The status of the stage speaks of the fact of its be ing able to be «switched on» and being able to be «switched off» for a calculation. If the status is specified as «switched on», it does not take part in a calculation.

16. The flag of a stage speaks of whether a stage has a resulting graph which is already smoothed at ends.

17. The number of points specifies size of a resulting graph of a stage.

18. Duration in seconds is determined by a ratio of the number of stage points to digitization frequency.

19. The number of repetitions reports about the number of repetitions of a stage of loading graph during a calculation process.

20. Rationing, "Switch on", or "Switch off".

21. KA and KB are introduced rationing coefficients.

22. Statistical parameters that were determined, if synthesis of a graph on a stage of loading was implemented, but if the synthesis was not implemented, the corresponding table columns will be blank.

For the current stage, the control buttons are available for including operations such as editing, deleting and reordering stages, .working with prescribed stages. For setting of a new stage of random loading one must press one of the buttons the name of which starts as "Add a stage...» Three possibilities of setting are implemented:

A stage specified by the correlation function;

A stage specified by spectral power density;

A stage being loaded from a file created by a third-party application in text format.

Consider setting the properties dialog of the new stage, given by power spectral density accelerations Fig. 4.53.

161

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.13 Dialog loading stage, given by power spectral density.

The best orientation in a roster of stages from Fig. 4.51 needs the field "Name of a Loading

Stage".

The group "Calculated

Parameters" will contain blank fields until their calculation is made by a push on the button "Compute". Four below described groups of parameters are input data for a calculation.

The first group "Parameters of

Spectral Power Density" contains a button for a call of the dialog which allows to select among the predefined in a program on [5] the spectra which must be implemented for a current stage of loading in the group "PSD Template",

Fig. 4.54. There is accessibly in the group "Current Point Value" is able to change the current situation in terms of power spectral density graphics acceleration. In the fields of the group

"Point" are accessibly removal of a current point or addition of a nova one before or after a current point. Resulting values characterizing editable PSD are collected in the group "Calculated

Parameters". The push on the group buttons "PSD Table" allows to execute

Fig. 4.14 Dialog of power spectral

density setup. save or load of an in advance saved spectrum.

.The second group of "Frequency Options" dialogue with Fig.4.54 has three options. The "Jk" field affects randomness of a distribution that is synthesized. The range of possible integer values of

0

… 4e+9, in addition, the zero value means each recount will give a new distribution. All the non-zero values allow to reproduce a defined random distribution every time.

The "KOm" field defines a frequency number, participating in the synthesis of a random disturbance. If this value is equal to one, it will eventually be given not random and fixed effect of the sinusoidal root mean square value (rms) equal to the value obtained in the "RMS" dialogue,

The switch «Log10 Frequency» allows to set a logarithmic distribution involved in the synthesis of a random distribution of frequencies. If the switch is deactivated, there will be a distribution based on the frequencies from minimum frequency to maximum frequency (see dialog fields «f_min» and

162

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

«f_max» of the group "Calculated Parameters" dialog, ) will be linear. If the switch is deactivated, the distribution will be logarithmic when in the area of low frequencies in comparison to high frequencies greater unloading occurs between frequencies participating in the synthesis of random effect.

The third «Linear Transformation" group: F(x) = Ax+B» allows to pass shift of a mean value

(mathematical expectation) of a distribution and scaling, which leads to change of a final value of RMS.

The parameters of this group do not influence a synthesis of a distribution itself, after participation of these parameters the distribution is only converted, therefore there is no need to make recalculation. If the "Apply" switch is turned off, standard quantities of transformation A=1, B=0, regardless of the values which are specified in corresponding fields, will be used.

The fourth group "General Calculation Parameters" for a current stage of random loading contains a field of "T, s", this is time for the synthesis of a stage graph. For this time it is recommended to set to not less than order of a larger reciprocal from a value of minimum frequency «f_min» in RMS from Fig. 4. 54. Then the synthesized graph will satisfy specified spectral power density and the calculated statistical parameters will be consistent. The "Points" field is not intended for editing; it is informative and contains the number of points which fell on the preset time of a graph with consideration for the parameter "General Digitization Frequency for all Stages, Hz" from Fig. 4.51.

The "Replays" field of the group "General Calculation Parameters" allows to use the property of ergodicity of a random distribution stage that is synthesized. If the time schedule is more than an order of magnitud e greater than the inverse of the minimum frequency «f_min», then using this setting one can change the ratio between the contributions from each of the stages in a total random load.

The group "Calculated Parameters", as was already mentioned, contains resulting statistical values of a loading stage synthesized random distribution. For the synthesis of a graph and calculation of parameters one must push the button "Compute", . Unless the calculation is made, but if the dialog is closed by the button "OK", corresponding fields will not be displayed in the roster of stages from Fig.

4.51, but during the calculation of static character or forced fluctuations the synthesis of random loading will be carried forcibly.

The "dD" and "eD" field values determine an absolute and relative error in calculated dispersion of a synthesized stage where the value of variance equal to a square of a computed value of "RMS" of a RMS's setup dialog is taken as base, . The relative error is rationed to 1. If the relative error is more than 10%, it is recommended to increase the number of frequencies participating in synthesis of random effect stage in a field of "KOm", fig. 4.53.

The "STD" field corresponds to a mean square value determined by synthesized random effect in the following formulae from mathematical expectation sample values (average) and variance:

,

Where

x i

– values of random load in i

– a i-moment of time,

N are the general number of (count) points of a distribution.

The "As/As0" and "Ex/Ex0" fields are serving for evaluation of deviation measure of a synthesized loading stage from a normal distribution. On the absolute value they report the smaller values of three ones about the fact that the deviations from a normal synthesized distribution are not significant. If the received values turned higher based on the modulus than three, for reduction of these magnitudes it is recommended to increase time for a graph (the number of points of N). Formulae for a calculation of an asymmetry and excess of a random distribution, as well as quadratic means of an error of dissymmetry coefficients and excess:

163

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Field «NR» of reference character, determines a coefficient of an irregularity equal to a ratio of the number of transitions of a distribution barring zeroes to the number of extremes [4]. The closer this value is to unity, the distribution is more like a sine wave and a narrow band. Small values correspond to the composition of the complex frequency random process and meet the broadband process.

The "Cycles" field is being calculated on basis of the « falling rain» method [4]. It is bisecting to a

"Cycles" field received as a result of a calculation of a semi-cycle number for display. The resulting calculation of the number of half cycles is halved to display in the "Cycles" field.

The "NCS" field displays the resulting number of cycles with consideration for repetitions from the "Replays" field, see fig. 4.53.

The "NTS" field displays total time of a distribution (but not graphics!) with consideration for repetitions from the "Replays" field.

We will consider the final group "Graphs of the Loading Stage" from Fig. 4.53". The field

"Interval Histogram" is only used when displaying graphs of distributions the recommended N

h

value is not less than 6. The drop-down list allows to select a type of chart displayed in a separate window, Fig.

4.55.

Fig. 4.15 Drop-down dialog of "Setting of a Loading Stage" list of a group "Graphs of Loading Stage".

The selection of a chart type as "Given Loading" allows to output a graph that is synthesized in a separate window with a rationing consideration.

The type "Distribution of Given Loading" allows to output the graph of a distribution which must be like the Gaussian bell.

It allows "Equivalent Loading" to display some equivalent load when defined quantities correspond to stresses and every point is calculated as equivalent in damaged ability to symmetric

164

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

load. There is no great physical meaning in this graph, but distributions of N(S) and S(NSum) are forming on its basis. The distribution of N(S) is the number of cycles depending on load and S(NSum) is a dependence on the number of corresponding load cycles. It is on the basis of the schedule

S(NSum) an equivalent to the value of the cycles number, which impairs the damaging ability of equivalent symmetric sinusoidal load with the same half spread value as the maximum in the distribution of S (NSum) exists.

The Group "Format of Conservation" of the same group "Charts of Loading Stage" contains the buttons "Text" and "Binary» that allows to store the synthesized stage in different format. Text format to save can be used to carry out in a third-party application the calculation of the additional desired values, or to correct reporting stage steps. The further load of a corrected text file is possible only in case of creation in the dialog "Fatigue Multistage Random Loading" from Fig. 4.51 of a stage being loaded from a file. But before display of the dialog a file must be selected from the matching storage folder. File form ats are supported in the “Export/Import”:

3)

4)

PRN, where the separator is a space and/or a character of a tab;

The CSV where the separator is a comma between numbers. Attention! Invalid is the number the comma of which corresponds to a decimal point for this file format!

The appearance of a dialog for a case of loading being loaded from a stage file will be almost the same as in Fig. 4.53 as soon as the group "Parameters of Spectral Power Density" and "Frequency

Parameters" is absent. The button "Compute" and the field of "T, s" in the group "Generic Calculation

Parameters" will be unavailable; the field "dD" and "eD" will be vacuous in the group "Calculated

Parameters"; the group "Save Format" will be called "Load Format" with corresponding functionality.

We will return to the consideration of the dialog "Fatigue Multistage Random Loading" at Fig.

4.51. The group "Resulting Parameters of Multistage Loading" contains three fields which in themselves are accumulating corresponding values for included stages. But the first two are without consideration of the number of repetitions, (the number of points and time) answer for a graph itself.

And in the field "Total Time of Set Loading, s" times from each stage sum, taking into consideration the number of "Replays" from Fig. 4.53, in other words, calculated "NTS" parameters sum.

The same group "Graph of Loading" is exactly as in a dialog with Fig. 4.53, but only one type of chart

– "Total Loading", on graphs being agreed by the way of stages succession in a list with consideration for smoothing.

The group "Export" contains two buttons: "Into a Text File..." and "Into a Graph for loading".

Export of all loading stages will be carried out to the text file in a procedure of their being followed. The push on the button "Into a Graph for Loading" will lead to export of received final multistage load into a graph of load for associated loading. The name of this loading is specified in the name of a dialog, see

Fig. 4.51. If export was not made, than for loading the graph of load would remain former or, in general, it will remain not defined.

The calculation methodology

Stresses are calculated over the computed values of stresses amplitudes and their average values (3) were led to symmetric loading by (4), respective R = -1 [1,2,6,7]:

,

Where K is the coefficient of the fatigue limit reduction and coefficients of influence of an asymmetry of cycle on the amplitude limit.

After calculating the reduced values of stresses in finite elements It calculates stresses equivalent one-axial tension, using the formula:

165

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

(5),

Where x, y, z are the indexes of stresses in corresponding directions/planes

– the fatigue limit on normal stresses, the fatigue limit on tangential stresses.

As a result a distribution of stresses under the number of semi-cycles determined in the schematization stage is got. The example of a distribution of N(S) is shown in a Fig..

Fig. 4.16 the Histogram of N(S) of a probability distribution based on the stresses for

Nh = 24, where a total number of semicycles is equal to 128506.

From a distribution of the semi-cycles number from stresses (see fig. 4.56) a distribution total in the number of semi-cycles is being constructed, see fig. 4.57:

166

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.17 the Histogram of S(Nsum) of stresses from the total number of semi-cycles.

For cast of this distribution to equivalent sinusoidal stress it is selected for calculated stress

– the highest of the achieved. Then the equivalent number of cycles which at calculated stress possesses the same damaged ability as the synthesized stochastic number is being computed. For it one must use a corrected linear hypothesis of summation of fatigue damages during irregular loading

[1,6,7].

In accordance with this hypothesis fatigue damage being caused by stress of σ

i

constitutes a certain equal share of complete damage corresponded to an appearance of fatigue cracks and destruction. The value corresponds to the number of cycles designed with this stress level. Value is equal to the number of cycles which corresponds to 50% of probability of destruction of a part with the same σ

i

stress level.

Destruction on this theory comes then since the condition was satisfied:

Where

N h

– as a histogram number, – is equal to the number of the stress levels,

αe

is an experimentally determined correction in a corrected linear hypothesis.

Attention must be turned to the condition under the sum sign: only the semi-cycles for which the condition is satisfied will produce damaging effect:

From the equation of the curve endurance (1) in the multi-cycle range of ( value of the cycles number corresponding to 50% of probability of destruction is derived:

), the

(6).

167

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The received quantity of the cycles number is being substituted to an equation of a fatigue curve: from where derivation of the equivalent cycles number is carried out:

To get the reserve coefficient for the number of cycles, first the number of cycles corresponding to 50% of probability of destruction for the calculated are computed :

The value is the basic value. The maximum value of this magnitude is limited by the amount of N

G

= 2e6. Such values correspond to a case, when, case of unlimited stamina. Under high values the

what corresponds to a

base number of cycles polynomial, based on an equation of a curve of endurance (1) in multi-cycle ( ) area, decreases.

Then the coefficient of reserve in the number of cycles is determined by the formula:

The derived values of the coefficient of reserve in the number of cycles are so limited above by a quantity of N

G

= 2e6. Such a value of the coefficient of reserve can occur in two cases:

5) ;

6) .

Calculation of random fatigue on statics

Fatigue calculation based on the results of static justified use in the case, If the natural frequencies lie on the frequency axis to the right of the frequency of the driving forces.

For spending of a fatigue calculation the following order of actions must be implemented:

Create a model of calculation containing elements from the phylum plate and/or 8-nodes and the key three-dimensional finite element;

Specify random fatigue load for selected loading or combinations of loadings;

Specify necessary fatigue parameters;

Implement a static calculation;

168

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The results of this calculation will be available in the list "Choice of results" of the dialog

"Parameters of results output".

Carry out a start of a fatigue calculation for random load based on the results of statics.

Fig. 4.18 the Selection of results of the simplest fatigue calculation.

In the list for plates and three-dimensional elements a list of two rows will become available:

"NVOH" and "SAFN". Selecting the line «NAOH» from the list will lead to drawing the calculated values of the number of Wohler cycles, equivalent to the corresponding maximum load reached in the application of random load. This number of cycles corresponds to 50% of destruction probability. This value of cycles is a basis for calculation of the reserve coefficient across durability (the number of cycles). For display of estimated reserve for the number of cycles of a model a "SAFN" line must be selected in the list for plates and three-dimensional elements.

If after a static calculation passing the pattern was edited, before a fatigue calculation passing on statics a warning will be said. If after the static calculation model is edited, that prior to the calculation of static fatigue a warning will be issued.

On Fig.4.59 the results of the calculation of the safety factor for fatigue strength are presented a) and the safety factor in durability (b) for the bulk of finite elements.

а) б)

Fig. 4.19 Results map for the number of cycles on Wohler (a) and

the safety factor for fatigue durability (б).

Because the resulting quantities of a fatigue calculation are being calculated based on the results of statics, the calculation is being done consistently for all loadings for which the fatigue load is specified. Therefore, if during the calculation of stress in the node of one of the final elements the value of the limit of variability is exceeded, the warning of Fig. which

169

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

corresponds to the current loading that is calculated will be given.

Fig. 4.20 Dialog with the progress

indicator for calculating

the parameters of fatigue as a result of static

Random fatigue calculation through forced fluctuations

The following order of actions must be implemented for a calculation process:

6. Create a calculated model containing elements from the phylum plate and/or 8-node and a threedimensional finite element;

7. Create a super-element of selected elements from the phylum plate and/or 8-node and a threedimensional finite element;

8. Specify random fatigue load and export it into a graph of loading for corresponding loading or a combination of loadings;

9. Set necessary fatigue parameters;

10. Carry out a start of a fatigue calculation for random load through a calculation of forced fluctuations for corresponding loading or a combination of loadings.

The fatigue calculation is used through calculation of forced fluctuations in case of an intersection in the frequency axis of the spectrum of perturbing effect and the natural frequencies of the model.

Naturally, than more terminal cells in a calculated model, that, necessary time is of calculation of each time count.

Call the dialog "Calculation" from the main menu "Calculations -

> Calculation...» A part of a dialog is shown in Fig. 4.61. Then turn on a switch in the item "Calculation for Super Elements Only".

The switch will be unavailable until at least one FE is created. Fill out the fields "Logarithmic

Decrement of Fluctuations" and "Number of the Considered own forms". The field «Interval: 0-, is based on a specified graph of load, is filled out automatically in case of a calculation for FE. The field

"Moments of Time" contains the number of points of a specified load graph. It is not recommended to specify a more multiple automatically specified number for a curve created by connection of points by lines.

Fig. 4.21 Part of the dialog "Calculation"

After the calculation of forced fluctuations was made, call the dialog "Results of Forced Fatigue

Fluctuations", having selected an item of the main menu "Results -> Durability During Random Fatigue

Loading...". The dialog contains the list of all nodes of previously set FE.

170

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.22

the Table of a dialog «results of fatigue forced fluctuations» with final calculation values.

The columns reflect information based on the SE, KE, nodes, and surface (only for plate KE) numbers. The columns reflect the information on the numbers of SE, CE, components and surfaces

(for plate-TBE). The next columns of each node of FE from SE correspond to the found number of the semi-cycles by the "method of rain", equivalent stress (5), the equivalent number of cycles (7) in a column with a name of "N Eq".

The column of "N of 50%" corresponds to the number of cycles for a computed value of equivalent stress based on Wohler's curve. The values in a column of "50% durabilities", based on the equivalent number of cycles per a unit of time, reflect a value of a column of "N of 50%" converted by one hour. This value is being calculated as a ratio of the equivalent number of cycles to total time of loading, see fig. 4.51, the considering number of "Retries" in each stage, fig. 4.53.

The column "Reserve in Durability" is resulting reserve across durability, is calculated as a ratio of values in the column "Durability of 50%" to the value "Estimated Time of Loading Operation", see fig.

4.51, expressed in hours.

As can be seen from a final result table, Fig. 4.52, values in a "N Eq" column can be at all absent and the values in a column of "N 50%" correspond to a N

G

value specified in a dialog from Fig. 4.49. In these cases the equivalent reduced stresses do not obey an equation (6), which means satisfaction of the condition of unlimited endurance under which computation of reserve loses the sense of it.

One more of the indicators of achieved equivalent stress level is the sign of minus in values from the column "Equivalent Stress". It was done to denote those values of stresses equivalent in Mieses in a node of the finite elements which are larger than the limit of tensile strength. As has already been mentioned above by the text, in such a case a dialog with Fig. 4.42 is written after a calculation. If there was excess of the limit of yield strength, the general assumption of tensely d eformed state can’t be considered correct because the deformations ceased to be resilient and the deformations have already become plastic.

For display of a story of loading and equivalent values of stresses from time of a selected node press the "Graph of Stresses" button. The example of an effective stresses graph is given in fig. 4.63.

With red color

– a rationed value of load.

With blue color

– equivalent stresses in the node.

Fig. 4.23 the Graph of stresses of a selected node from time.

171

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The name of a graph contains indication that effective stress is displayed with a sign. The sign of effective stress corresponds to the sign of the greatest principal stress module the minus sign corresponds to a predomination of compressive stresses, plus

– of the tensile ones.

During modeling of fatigue behavior of plate final elements value «1» is specified in the "N of the

Surface" column for the upper surface of plates and in "2"

– for the bottom one. The position of the plate top is determined by the position of a local coordinate system perpendicular. If a graph of stresses is compared for nodes distinguished only by the position of the surface, the rationed values of load may differ from each other only by a sign.

Thermal analysis

We consider steady-state thermal analysis. Boundary/initial conditions for this calculation are temperature values in nodes. Temperature distribution, obtained in this calculation can be used in static analysis to include thermoelasticity effects.

Note: thermal analysis must be done before or simultaneously with static one.

Heat transfer transient analysis

The general principles of modeling and performing heat transfer transient analysis are similar to principles and stages for other calculations.

General stages of heat transfer transient analysis

1) Creation of finite-element model, definition of materials and application of thermal loads on structure;

2) Definition of calculation parameters and performance of analysis;

3) Viewing and analysis of results.

Thermal Loads toolbar

The set of thermal loads is carried out by means of Thermal Loads toolbar.

Fig. 4.24 Thermal Loads toolbar

Thermal BC and IC on Nodes command (hereinafter BC

– boundary conditions; IC – initial conditions) allows to set BC and IC on nodes. This button becomes active if at least one node of model is created.

Shortcut:

Thermal BC and IC on Rods command allows to set BC and IC on rod elements. This button becomes active if at least one rod of model is created.

Shortcut:

Thermal BC and IC on Shells command allows to set BC and IC on shell elements. This button becomes active if at least one shell of model is created.

Shortcut:

Thermal BC and IC on Solids command allows to set BC and IC on solid elements. This button becomes active if at least one solid of model is created.

Shortcut:

Thermal BC and IC on nodes, Thermal BC and IC on rods, Thermal BC and IC on shells,

Thermal BC and IC on solids

172

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Groups of active buttons on the right of Thermal Loads toolbar are various, it depends on which button (Thermal BC and IC on Nodes, Thermal BC and IC on Rods, Thermal BC and IC on Shells and Thermal BC and IC on Solids) is pressed on the left and corresponds to BC and IC for various types of finite elements (node, rod, shell or solid). Let's consider various types of BC and IC which can be set.

Initial Temperature button activates IC mode and allows to set initial temperature on finite element. This IC can be set for all types of finite elements.

Shortcut:

Temperature button activates BC mode and allows to set temperature on finite element. This BC can be set for all types of finite elements.

Shortcut:

Heat Flow button activates BC mode and allows to set heat flow on finite element. This BC can be set for all types of finite elements.

Shortcut:

Volume Heat Source button activates BC mode and allows to set heat source (power) on volume of finite element. This BC can be set for rod, shell and solid finite elements.

Shortcut:

Heat Point Mass button activates BC mode and allows to set additional heat capacity in node.

This BC can be set for nodes only.

Shortcut:

Initial Temperature on Surface button activates IC mode and allows to set initial temperature on surface of finite element. This IC can be set for rod, shell and solid finite elements.

Shortcut:

Temperature on Surface button activates BC mode and allows to set temperature on surface of finite element. This BC can be set for rod, shell and solid finite elements.

Shortcut:

Heat Flux on Surface button activates BC mode and allows to set heat flux on surface of finite element. This BC can be set for rod, shell and solid finite elements.

Shortcut:

Convection button activates BC mode and allows to set convective heat transfer on surface of finite element. This BC can be set for rod, shell and solid finite elements.

Shortcut:

Convective heat transfer on surface (in each point of surface) of finite element is described by equation:

q conv

T

T

0

,

FE; T where

– heat transfer factor in point on surface of FE; T – temperature in point on surface of

0

– ambient temperature, q

conv

– heat flow in point on surface of FE.

Radiation button activates BC mode and allows to set radiation heat transfer on surface of finite element. This BC can be set for rod, shell and solid finite elements.

Shortcut:

Radiation heat transfer on surface (in each point of surface) of finite element is described by equation:

q rad



T

4

T

0

4

,

173

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

where

– Stefan-Boltzmann constant;

– thermal emissivity factor in point on surface; T – temperature in point on surface; T

0

– ambient temperature, q

rad

– heat flow in point on surface of FE.

Modes of thermal loads application

There are some modes to apply thermal loads.

1) One or several finite elements were selected and load set mode for any FE type was activated, thus the following options are possible: a) Among the selected elements there are no elements of that type for which loads is set. To set load FE of corresponding type should be selected. b) Among the selected elements there are at least one element of that type for which load is set.

2) Load set mode for any type of FE is activated, thus one or several elements of this type should be selected.

Let's consider variants which are possible in load set mode. User can make selection as in a single selection mode (it is necessary to hold Shift key for selection of several elements), so in a select mode by frame. There are two ways to finish selection: a)

«Space» or «Enter» key; b) left button click.

Processing of the chosen set of elements is made as follows: the first created element of the corresponding type is looked for and checked.

If loads of corresponding type is set on element, there is a dialog box (work with this dialog is described below) with the BC or IC list of corresponding type which were set earlier on an element; an opposite case load set dialog appears on the screen (work with this dialog is described below).

List of BC or IC dialog

The name of this dialog changes depending on thermal load set mode.

Fig. 4.25 List of BC or IC dialog

The list consists of three columns: Load Case, Options and Value. Load Case column shows load case name in which load is placed. In Options column can be two options: Constant value and Graph which displays how thermal load was set. Value column displays user value of load if load was set as constant value or word which points to independent variable if load was set as graph.

Add button invokes load set dialog in which load can be set for selected elements.

Edit button invokes load set dialog in which selected load can be changed.

Delete button allows to delete selected load.

Load set dialog

The name of this dialog changes depending on thermal load set mode.

Dialog contains load type and type of FE to which load is applied.

Loads of all types except "Convection" and "Radiation" are defined by only one parameter, and loads of two last types are defined by two parameters: heat transfer factor for convection or thermal

174

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

emissivity factor for radiation and ambient temperature for both types. Besides loads can be set on all

FE and on FE surface (it is impossible to set these loads on nodes).

Let's consider type of dialog for load with one parameter. In the top part of dialog there are Load

Case drop-down list for saving load. With the help of radio buttons Constant Value and Graph load can be set as constant or graph. It will be necessary to choose type of independent variable from the dropdown list to set load as graph. When independent variable "X coordinate", "Y coordinate" or

"Z coordinate" is selected additional drop-down list appears where type of coordinate system must be defined. After that Edit button will be active using which graph of load can be edited.

Fig. 4.26 Dialog for setting thermal load as constant

Fig. 4.27 Dialog for setting thermal load as graph

How load is set displays in Info text field.

For loads which set on FE surface three types of dialog boxes are possible.

175

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.28 Dialog for setting thermal load on rod element surface with one parameter

Fig. 4.29 Dialog for setting thermal load on shell element surface with one parameter

176

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.30 Dialog for setting thermal load on solid element surface with one parameter

The Face Number drop-down list is added in this dialog for selection of face number on which load is set. It depends on corresponding type of FE. The selected face is highlighted by red color in drawing displayed in the right part of dialog.

For Convection and Radiation load types this dialog is presented below.

The second parameter of load Ambient Temperature is added in this dialog.

OK button creates or changes load parameters.

Cancel button allows to exit dialog without changes.

Delete button allows to delete load.

Fig. 4.31 Dialog for setting Convection and Radiation load

Filters of thermal loads toolbar

Buttons of this toolbar are used to show or hide corresponding thermal loads which are already defined.

177

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.32 Filters of thermal loads toolbar

Thermal material creation

To perform heat transfer transient analysis it is necessary to set Thermal material for all elements.

After pressing OK button the dialog box appears on the screen where material parameters should be set as constants or as graphs.

Fig. 4.33 Dialog for material type selection

In this dialog there are Anisotropic Material checkbox that allows to set additional Heat Capacity along Y and Z directions.

Fig. 4.34 Dialog for setting thermal material properties

Fig. 4.35 Dialog for setting anisotropic thermal material properties

178

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Calculation parameters

To perform heat transfer transient analysis select corresponding checkbox and required Load

Case in Calculation dialog invoked by Calculation/Calculation main menu command.

Then there will be Transient Heat Transfer dialog where you can set calculation parameters.

Viewing calculation results

Fig. 4.36 Transient Heat Transfer dialog box

Select Results/Result Map of Heat Transfer Analysis

main menu command to view calculation results and then there will be Results of Transient Heat Transfer Analysis dialog box.

Fig. 4.37 Results of Transient Heat Transfer Analysis dialog box

Fig. 4.38 Example of temperature map

179

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

In whole work with this dialog box is similar to work with the same dialog available after static calculation.

However when Vector Heat Flow option (TFLUX_X_LOC

– heat flux along X axis of LCS) or

Vector Temperature Gradient option (TGRAD_X_LOC

– temperature gradient along X axis of LCS) is selected in Result Type drop-down list the Vector Scaling feature displays in dialog that allows to set scale for vectors in relative units [1; 100].

Fig. 4.39 Vector Results of Transient Heat Transfer Analysis dialog box

To change parameters of result map select Results/Result Options of Heat Transfer

Analysis… main menu command after which activation you can change parameters of result map in the appeared dialog.

When viewing result map Results/Result Animation of Heat

Transfer Analysis… main menu command is available which allows to animate current result map. This command is available when result map is closed as well. Thus animation window will display results of the previously opened map, if the result map wasn't invoked before temperature results will be animated.

Seismic calculation

This type of calculation is performed using eigen mode shapes decomposition in Duhamel integral form according to building regulations.

Initial equation of system motion for seismic calculation:

M

 

t

C

 

K

  

0

, where: t index means the total displacement of the system.

t

   

g

- total displacement, где

g

- base displacement

Substituting expression for total displacement to the motion equation we will receive effective seismic load

P eff

(

t

)

 

M

 

g

(

t

) или

P eff

(

t

)

 

M

{cos}

g

(

t

)

, where

{cos}

- direction cosines vector of the corresponding freedom degrees with the direction of seismic load,

g

(t )

- ground acceleration.

The solution is performed by eigen shape decomposition method using Duhamel's integral.

Seismic load calculation is performed according to response spectrum dependence as well as

Russian Seismic Code - SNiP II-7-81* 2000 y. and SP 14.13330.2014.

By Russian seismic code the dynamic seismic load is replaced by effective static inertia forces

S

ik

, acting in direction of k-th DOF(mass) for i-oscillation shape.

S ik

K

1

K

Q k

A

(T i

)

 ik cos

 ok

, where

K

1

– damage factor by table 3,

K

— factor by table 6 and according to chapter 5.

Q k

–k-th mass weight;

A

– seismicity factor (relative maximum accelerations) depending on earthquake intensity. The factor value should be taken 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, respectively, for the seismicity 7, 8, 9.

180

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

– dynamic factor corresponding to the i-th tone of the natural vibrations (depending on the oscillation period of the i-th shape and soil category).

ik

– factor depending on the structure deformation shape in its natural oscillations of the i-th tone (reduced acceleration).

ok

– angle between the direction of the seismic action and the displacement of the k-th degree of freedom.

If the seismicity of 8 points or more, soil category III factor 0.7 is added to the S ik

value according to the requirements of SNIP II-7-81 * (SP 14.13330.2014).

The responses X i

for each oscillation shape are determined from inertia loads, then the maximum one X

= max i

X i

is determined and the design value is calculated:

X = [X

2

 i

 

( X i

)

2

]

1/2

.

Design calculation

After static calculation is performed, it is possible to check design elements strength and buckling according to building regulations depending on the type of cross section used and loads applied.

Number of checks by building regulations is defined by the type of section of an element and the complete set of loads acting on it.

Rods are checked on:

 strength at action of longitudinal force N;

 buckling at compression in planes XOZ and XOY;

 strength at action of bending moment M y

or M z

;

 strength at action of lateral force V z

or V y

;

 strength at joint action N, M y

and M z

;

 buckling of the flat form of a bend at action of moment M y

 maximum flexibility.

;

At check by classical methods:

1) Strength by equivalent stresses (Mises):

2

xz

2

yz

)

экв

(

x

y

)

2

(

z

y

)

2

(

x

z

)

2 use factor

,

,

k

,

экв

T

,

y

,

z

- normal and shear stresses

x y z x

T

- yield stress of rod material

2) Buckling in reciprocally perpendicular planes

6

(

2

xy i

1 , 2

I

x,

y

1 , 2

l efx

,

y

1 , 2

1 , 2

A i

1 , 2

At

1 , 2

2 .

5

1 , 2

1

( 0 .

073

5 .

53

E

T

Otherwise at

1,2

1 , 2

4 .

5

1.47 13.0

E

T

  

E

T

)

1 , 2

)

1,2

1 , 2

T

E

At

1 , 2

2

1 , 2

332

( 51

1 , 2

)

 

E

T

)

2

1,2 use factor

k

1 , 2

T

- yield stress

1 , 2

N

A

T

181

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide i

1 , 2

- radius of inertia

1 , 2

- flexibility

N - normal force

A - cross-section area

1 , 2

- downturn factor of stress

3) Maximal flexibility

See also Chapter 6, section Design elements results.

Calculation of pipeline segments

Straight elastic tube section

Fig. 4.40 Scheme of the straight segment of a pipeline

This element works in tension, compression, bending and torsion. It has 6 degrees of freedom in every of its two nods: Relocations to the direction of X, Y, and Z axes as well as turns around of X, Y, and Z axes. This element is assumed with the thin wall, it bears a ratio of D

0

/t ≥ 20.

. To a straight segment of a pipeline as by a rod finite element the following types of loads can be applied:

Concentrated and distributed (lateral and axial) forces;

Concentrated and distributed (bending and torsional) moments;

Table 4.1 The straight pipeline loads

Types of loads Distribution to a section and length

Temperature on a pipe segment

It is possible to specify values on extreme points of horizontal diameter and vertical diameter and an element by the length. There is a linear distribution in the intermediate points.

Temperature on nodes

Pressure external)

(internal and

The constant in a cross-section and linear by length.

The constant by a cross-section and length

The element mass matrix is completely similar to a mass matrix of a beam element, excluding:

- Sectional area of the tube

- Moment of inertia

182

Where: D

0

- outer diameter;

D i

- internal diameter;

C f

- flexibility t - tube wall thickness.

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

- Torsion moment of inertia

Fig. 4.41 Application of pressure and temperature load in the cross-section of a pipeline

Axial strain in a pipeline

,

Where:

is the Poisson ratio;

P i

- internal pressure on pipeline wall;

P o

- external pressure on pipeline wall;

Е -

Young's modulus of pipeline material.

Stresses Calculation

The components of stresses in a pipeline are determined by the following dependences:

- Magnitude of axial stresses;

- Stresses due to bending;

- Stress due to torsion;

- Stresses due to pressure;

- Shear stresses from the lateral force.

Where: F x

is an axial force;

183

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

a w

= A

W

– area of the pipe cross-section;

F

S

is a lateral force;

C

is a stress concentration ratio;

M b

is a bending moment;

M x

is a torque;

Curved pipe with constant radius

Fig. 4.42 The Scheme of a flat curved area of a pipeline

The following types of loads can be placed to the curved area of a pipeline:

Concentrated and distributed forces (lateral and axial);

Concentrated and distributed moments (bending and torsional);

Table 4.2

– Loads on a curved section a pipeline

Types of loads Distribution by a section and length

Temperature on pipe segment It is possible to specify values on extreme points of horizontal diameter and vertical diameter and an element by the length. There is a linear distribution in the intermediate points.

Temperature on nodes The constant in a cross-section and linear by length.

Pressure external)

(internal and The constant by a cross-section and length

Calculation of contact interaction

Calculation of contact interaction is lead within the scope of nonlinear calculation, under the assumption of small displacements and elastic strains. During calculation, the fictitious elements connecting contacting surfaces, and, depending on reciprocal displacements nodes of elements are created, at each iteration forces in contact area are specified and static calculation is performed.

Convergence criterion is the condition of the minimal interpenetration of objects.

Calculation results of contact interaction are all the components available after static calculation, and also distribution field of normal and tangential forces, interpenetration and a condition of contact elements in contact area.

184

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Design and checking of reinforced concrete elements

After static and code combination calculation it is possible to design and check reinforcing of concrete elements according to building regulations

6

.

Notes

Calculations which are not performed:

Shell elements on action of lateral forces and torsion moments.

Rod elements of round and ring sections - in a case of eccentric tension on lateral forces action, torsion moments, and also on the second group of limiting states.

Rod elements of T and I sections - on action of torsion moments.

Rod elements of rectangular, T and I sections - in case of diagonal eccentric tension with the small compressed zone (<1.5*a, where a

– concrete cover). In case of diagonal eccentric tension without the compressed zone calculation is performed in separate directions.

Design and checking of reinforced masonry elements

After static and code combination calculation it is possible to design and check reinforcing of masonry elements according to building regulations

7

.

Batch calculations

APM Structure3D allows to perform batch calculations for files of *.frm format. First it can be used if necessary to calculate some problems, which demands considerable time for calculation. And secondly it allows to use operating time rationally when necessary to perform calculations for many various files.

To perform batch calculations launch

Start / Programs / APM WinMachine … /

Batch_Structure3D. After that Batch window appears on the screen. In the files list it will be necessary to set a path to *.frm files which calculation will be started in a batch mode with the help of Add file

folder and Add file buttons.

Note: Only *.frm files containing in the specified folder will be added in the list. Entering folders will not open, as well as files of other types, being in the specified folder will be ignored.

6

SP 52-101-2003

7

SNiP II-22

–81*

185

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 4.43 Batch Structure3D window

The files added in the list are numbered as their addition and this numbering will be defining calculation order. The order of calculation procedure can be changed; drag file to the required place with holding left mouse button.

For the selected files it is necessary to choose in Calculation type frame what calculation will be performed. Calculation Options button invokes dialog box where calculation options can be specified.

Buckling, P-Delta and Prestressed Modal analyses will be performed for that load case which is active at the moment of file saving.

Settings button invokes dialog box in which all options correspond to APM Structure3D possibilities except Autosaving.

The list of files can be saved in a file with name extension *.batchfrm using Save button and with the help of Open button it can be loaded.

To perform calculations use Start button. After calculation files will be saved in the same directory with addition part of initial file name, for example *.autosave.2009.07.08.13.42.25.FRM. It is possible to stop calculation by means of Stop button.

186

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 5. Design Elements, Soil Bases and

Foundations

Design elements general information

The design element models physically homogeneous element of a design - column, girder, plate.

The design element is one or more finite elements representing the model part located between two joints (columns, girders) which is considered as a unit at calculation according to building regulations

8

.

The command Design /

Design elements invokes dialog window for editing of properties, deletion of design elements, and also viewing of calculation results.

Design element is considered as continuous chain of rod or plate elements with defined properties. If the design element cannot be created, the system displays warning. In a warning window the list of all restrictions on design element creation is presented. The reasons are checked on which the given design element cannot be created.

Fig. 5.1 Unable to create rod design element warning

System will display window and offer variants of continuation in case of model modification affecting design elements.

Fig. 5.2 Change of model elements entering into design elements

General principles of work with design elements coincide with ones of layers (see above).

8

SNiP II-23-81*, STO 36554501-002-2006, SP 52-101-2003 or SNiP II-22-81*

187

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Steel / Wood design elements

First, it is necessary to set type of design using Design / Steel/Wood elements menu command.

Further required objects are selected and added in active design element by pressing Selected

Objects to Design Element button. If there are no design elements the new design element is automatically created. After that check of bearing capacity can be performed.

Fig. 5.3 Steel Design Elements dialog box

Fig. 5.4 Wood Design Elements dialog box

188

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

In the left upper part of dialog there is a list of design elements. The rods entering into the selected element are highlighted in a current model view.

For each design element it is necessary to set its properties such as material (modulus of

elasticity, Poisson’s ratio and density), section type, and also some parameters defined in SNiP.

Table 5.1

– Design element parameters

Parameters

Design resistance

– relation of material yield stress to safety factor by material. It is inaccessible for edit.

Working condition factor

– depends on structure destination.

Length factor

– relation of effective length of design element to real length.

SNiP II-23-81*

Table 2,

Table 51

Table 6. i. 6.1-6.7,

STO 36554501-

002-2006

Table 3, 4. i. 3.2, 3.3, 3.4. i. 4.21.

Flexibility limit

5.13-5.16. i.6.15, 6.16 Table 14.

Building regulations determine various checks for various sections of steel structures, therefore for each design element it is necessary to set section type. If the section is taken from library with the predetermined type the library will be selected automatically.

Strength and buckling checking by classic methods

– check of bearing capacity will be made using classical methods without taking into account the existing building regulations, using classical formulas of strength of materials.

Flexibility into account

– this mark will add the maximum flexibility to the list of criteria for section selection.

The Initial Data group is used for initial data choice for checking bearing capacity of design elements.

Besides, it will be necessary to specify the library with the required sections if it is planned to select a section for design element. The Load library button is used for this purpose.

To edit design element properties select it the Design elements list, set required parameters and press Apply or Apply to All (it properties need to be applied for all design elements) buttons.

After any parameter modification it is necessary to confirm change by pressing Apply button or

Apply to All.

Reinforced design elements

First, it is necessary to set design element type using Design / Design Element Type /

Reinforced Elements command. Further demanded objects are selected and added in automatically created design element by Design / Selected Objects to Design Element or Design /

Selected Objects to Reinforced Masonry Design Element commands. To add object to separate design element use Design / Selected Objects to Separate Design Elements or Design /

Selected Objects to Separate Reinforced Masonry Design Elements commands. The further work with design elements is made in Design Elements dialog box which is invoked by Design /

Design

Elements command.

Calculation types

Design calculation is performed to select reinforcing for the most adverse load combination. To select reinforcing for all design elements use Calculation / Design of Reinforced Elements command.

Checking calculation is performed, as a rule, for existing structures at changing of loads, service conditions and also when detects serious structure defects.

At transition from design to checking calculation the system suggests to use results of design calculation. Thus, checking calculation can be performed on the basis of the corrected design calculation results.

189

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 5.5 Checking calculation dialog box

To check reinforcing for all design elements use Calculation / Checking of Reinforced

Elements command.

Building regulations used at calculations of design elements:

SP 51-101-03 Concrete and reinforced concrete structures without prestressed reinforcing.

SNiP 52-01-03 Concrete and reinforced concrete structures. General norms.

GOST 5781-82 Hot-rolled steel for reinforced concrete structures.

SNiP II-22-81* Stone and reinforced stone structures.

Stone and reinforced stone structures design manual (SNiP II-22-81*).

Design Elements dialog box

There is calculation type drop-down list in the left top corner of dialog box. Below it there is a list of design elements. The objects entering into the selected design element are highlighted in a current view of structure editor. To delete the selected design element from the list press DELETE key.

Fig. 5.6 Design Elements dialog box

View filters of Design Elements dialog box

View filters of this dialog are used for convenient viewing of different design elements in the list.

White color of buttons - adjustment is on, grey color - adjustment is off.

/

Show elements with negative results (reinforcing is not design or don’t meet the conditions by checking calculation) / Show all elements

/ Show elements from visible layers only / Show elements from all layers. This option is convenient for synchronization of results displaying with a reinforcing map

190

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

/

/

Show / Hide reinforced concrete elements

Show / Hide reinforced masonry elements

/ Show / Hide design elements – columns

/

/

Show / Hide design elements – girders

Show / Hide design elements

Work with group of elements

– shells

Usually single reinforcing schemes are used for groups of elements. To change parameters of several design elements it is necessary to select their elements simultaneously. It is possible to select elements both on design model, and in the list of design elements of a dialog.

1. Elements selection on model (Design Elements is closed) is convenient, for example, for floor objects selection. To select several elements use Edit /

Select Element command. To select elements group hold SHIFT key. If it is convenient to select elements with frame use Edit /

Select

Group command. The selected elements will be highlighted by red color and by grey color in Design

Elements dialog box. Further it is possible to change parameters and press Apply or Apply to all

calculation types buttons.

2. To select elements in the list of a dialog box specify interesting elements using mouse holding

CTRL key. To deselect one element it is necessary to click on it again holding CTRL key.

Design Elements dialog box buttons

Apply to all

calculation types button

Apply button saves changes for the selected design elements for all calculation types saves changes for the selected design elements for current calculation type

Calculation button

Drawing button performs calculation for selected design elements generates drawing of column or girder for selected design element

Reinforced concrete design elements (shells)

Data

Designation and color of reinforcing are presented in a legend.

There are tabs in the dialog for setting initial data: General,

Concrete, Reinforcement, Reinforcement location, Loads and

Crack growth resistance. They are described in details below.

Fig. 5.7 Legend tab

a)

191

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide d) e) b) c)

192

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide f) g) h)

Fig. 5.8 Tabs of Data group

193

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Coverage

Working condition factor

Symmetric reinforcement (for design calculation)

Design limitations accounting

Fig. 5.10 Possible variants of columns

and plates supporting Fig. 5.9 Support type image

Table 5.2

– Data group parameters

Tabs

General

Parameters

Static determinacy

Length on YZ*, mm

Length factor in YZ

Length on

ХZ*, мм

Length factor in

ХZ

Crack growth resistance calculation

Concrete class** Concrete

Load duration factor

Concreting condition influence factor

Air humidity of the environment

Reinforcement Reinforcement class

Comments

Parameter must be unchecked for statically indeterminate structures. I. 4.2.6 SP 52-101-

2003

I. 6.2.18 SP 52-101-2003 as l;

I. 6.2.18 SP 52-101-2003;

I. 6.2.18 SP 52-101-2003 as l

I. 6.2.18 SP 52-101-2003

Calculations by II group of limiting states

I. 5.1.3 SP 52-101-2003,

I. 5.1 SNiP 52-01-2003

I. 5.2 SNiP 52-01-2003,

I. 5.1.10 SP 52-101-2003

T. 5.5-5.6 SP 52-101-2003

I. 5.3 SNiP 52-01-2003,

I. 5.2.3 SP 52-101-2003,

I.1 GOST 5781-82,

T. 5.7-5.8 SP 52-101-2003.

I. 7.3.2 SNiP 52-01-2003.

I. 8.3.2 SP 52-101-2003.

I. 5.2.7 SP 52-101-2003.

Design of symmetric reinforcement (upper and bottom)

1. Concrete cover

– i.8.3.2 – >= 10 mm. or bar diameter

2. Distance between bars (longitudinal and transverse) i.8.3.3

– >=25 mm or bar diameter

3. Distance between longitudinal bars

– i.8.3.6

– if h<=150 mm – <= 150 mm, if h>150 mm

– 1.5*h or 400 mm.

4. Distance between transverse bars at punching

– i.8.3.15 – <= 1/3*h0 or <= 300 mm.

194

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Reinforcement location (for checking calculation only)

Loads

Crack growth resistance (if option is checked in

General tab)

Reinforcement pretension

Diameter, mm

Step, mm

Intensity, mm^2/mm

Reinforcement ratio, %

Code combination

Load case i.1.4 GOST 5781-82 i.1.4 GOST 5781-82

Determined automatically

Reinforcement ratio on area

Case variants

Set loads manually

Load duration factor i. 6.2.16 SP 52-101-2003

Crack growth resistance category Crack disabled or Limited width

Crack growth resistance limitation By structure safety or Penetrability condition i. 7.2.3 SP 52-101-2003.

Reinforcement diameter for auto design Reinforcement diameter for crack growth resistance calculation

(design calculation)

Electrothermal method of reinforcement pretension

Losses is not concidered

(i. 2.2.3.5 SP 52-102-2004).

Pretension influence

Temperature difference,

[°C] i. 2.1.2.3 SP 52-102-2004 i. 2.2.3.4 SP 52-102-2004

Losses of steel form deformation i. 2.2.3.5 SP 52-102-2004, losses depends on:

- number of nonsimultaneously pretensioned bars (group of bars);

- approaching of anchors along reinforcement tension line by calculation of form deformation, mm.

Reinforcement pretension, [N/m

2

] Pretension of bars (group of bars) according to i. 2.2.3.9 SP 52-102-2004

Distance between external faces of anchors, [mm]

Losses of anchors deformation i. 2.2.3.5 SP 52-102-2004 i. 2.2.3.6 SP 52-102-2004 - reduction of anchors or offsets of bars in anchors clamp,

[mm]

Notes:

* Length as overall dimension of design element by default.

** Corresponds to a plate material.

Results

There are three tabs for viewing results: Reinforcement, Use factor and Crack growth resistance.

They are described in details below.

а)

195

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide b) c)

Fig. 5.11 Tabs of Results group

Table 5.3

– Results group parameters

Tabs Parameters

Reinforcement

(for design calculation only)

Calculated intensity, mm^2/mm

Diameter, mm

Step, mm

Real intensity, mm^2/mm

Comments

Required intensity of reinforcing along direction

According to GOST 5781-82

Selects from normal dimension series

Intensity on the basis of the accepted reinforcing

Use factor

Crack growth resistance (if option is checked in

General tab)

Use factor of reinforcement

All force factors

Force factors for selected coef.

Must be in range from 0 to 1

Invokes dialog box with force factors

Invokes dialog box with force factors for selected use factor

/

Reinforcement diameter, mm

Width of short-term crack opening, mm

Width of long-term crack opening, mm

If button is pressed ( ) there are only use factors with values more than 0.01.

GOST 5781-82

Real width of crack opening

Fig. 5.12 Force factors dialog box

196

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Reinforced concrete design elements (rods)

There are two types of rod reinforced concrete design elements: girder and column. Column is a vertical element, girder - horizontal. If the element has an angle with a horizontal plane more than 45 degrees - it is considered as column.

Each element has the local coordinate system, in which the X axis is directed along a rod, and Z and Y makes right-hand system.

The designation and color of reinforcing are presented in Legend tab.

а) b)

Fig. 5.13 Legend tab for various section types

Features of rod reinforcing design

It is impossible to design reinforcing for round and ring sections of girders.

Minimum number of upper and bottom reinforcement

– 2.

Lateral reinforcement is always symmetric.

Data

There are tabs in the dialog for setting initial data: General, Concrete, Reinforcement,

Reinforcement location, Loads and Crack growth resistance. They are described in details below.

a)

b)

197

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide e) f) c) d)

198

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide g) h)

Fig. 5.14 Tabs of Data group

Table 5.4

– Data group parameters

Tabs Parameters Comments

General Static determinacy

Section type

Length factor in XY

Length factor in XZ

Crack growth resistance calculation

User defined reinforcement

Concrete class*

Parameter must be unchecked for statically indeterminate structures. I. 4.2.6 SP 52-101-2003

Determines automatically

I. 6.2.18 SP 52-101-2003

I. 6.2.18 SP 52-101-2003

Calculations by II group of limiting states

Concrete

Allows to set user defined reinforcing variant

I. 5.1.3 SP 52-101-2003;

I. 5.1 SNiP 52-01-2003

Load duration factor

Concreting condition influence factor

I. 5.2 SNiP 52-01-2003,

I. 5.1.10 SP 52-101-2003

Air humidity of the environment T 5.5-5.6 SP 52-101-2003

Reinforcement Reinforcement class I. 5.3 SNiP 52-01-2003,

I. 5.2.3 SP 52-101-2003,

I.1 GOST 5781-82,

T 5.7-5.8 SP 52-101-2003

Coverage I. 7.3.2 SNiP 52-01-2003,

I. 8.3.2 SP 52-101-2003

I. 5.2.7 SP 52-101-2003 Working condition factor

Symmetric reinforcement (for design calculation)

Design limitations accounting

Design of symmetric reinforcement (upper and bottom)

1. Concrete cover

– i.8.3.2 – >= 10 mm. or bar diameter

2. Distance between bars (longitudinal and transverse) i.8.3.3

– >=25 mm or bar diameter

3. Distance between longitudinal bars

– i.8.3.6

– if h<=150 mm – <= 150 mm, if h>150 mm

– 1.5*h or 400 mm.

199

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Reinforcement location (for checking calculation only)

Diameter, mm

Number

Intensity of transverse reinforcement

Area calculator

Design of transverse reinforcement

Variant

Diameter, mm

Longitudinal, transverse and lateral reinforcement

Intensity of transverse reinforcement along directions

Design of longitudinal reinforcement area

Design of longitudinal reinforcement intensity

Reinforcing variants (for design calculation only)

Loads

Crack growth resistance (if option is checked in

General tab)

Reinforcement pretension

Number

Code combination

Load case

Set loads manually

Load duration factor

Crack growth resistance category

Crack growth resistance limitation

Reinforcement diameter for crack growth resistance calculation (design calculation)

Electrothermal method of reinforcement pretension

Pretension influence

Temperature difference,

Losses of steel form deformation

[°C]

User defined reinforcing variants

Design reinforcing

Case variants

I. 6.2.16 SP 52-101-2003

Crack disabled or Limited width

By structure safety or Penetrability condition i. 7.2.3 SP 52-101-2003.

Reinforcement diameter for auto design

Losses is not concidered

(i. 2.2.3.5 SP 52-102-2004). i. 2.1.2.3 SP 52-102-2004 i. 2.2.3.4 SP 52-102-2004 i. 2.2.3.5 SP 52-102-2004, losses depends on:

- number of nonsimultaneously pretensioned bars

(group of bars);

- approaching of anchors along reinforcement tension line by calculation of form deformation, mm.

Reinforcement pretension,

[N/m

2

]

Distance between external faces of anchors, [mm]

Pretension of bars (group of bars) according to i. 2.2.3.9 SP 52-102-2004 i. 2.2.3.5 SP 52-102-2004

Losses of anchors deformation i. 2.2.3.6 SP 52-102-2004 - reduction of anchors or offsets of bars in anchors clamp, [mm]

Note:

* Length as overall dimension of design element by default.

200

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Area calculator is intended to design diameter and number of longitudinal reinforcement by reinforcement area or contrary. It is probably to use different diameters. The summary area of reinforcement is presented in the bottom part of dialog.

Fig. 5.15 Area calculator

Intensity and required transverse reinforcement number are calculated automatically in the

Transverse Reinforcing dialog box.

After pressing

ОК button intensity will be set in Reinforcement location tab.

Fig. 5.16 Transverse Reinforcement design

Results

There are three tabs for viewing results: Reinforcement, Use factor and Crack growth resistance.

They are described in details below.

а)

201

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide b) c)

Fig. 5.17 Tabs of Results group

Table 5.5

– Results group parameters

Tabs Parameters

Reinforcement

(for design calculation only)

Use factor

Diameter, mm

Number

Reinforcement ratio

Area calculation

Design of transverse reinforcement*

Use factor of reinforcement

All force factors

Force factors for selected coef.

Comments

According to GOST 5781-82

Natural number, >= 2

Reinforcement ratio by area

Design of longitudinal reinforcement area

Design of longitudinal reinforcement intensity either by diameter or by step

Must be in range from 0 to 1

Invokes dialog box with force factors

Invokes dialog box with force factors for selected use factor

/

If button is pressed ( ) there are only use factors with values more than 0.01.

Crack growth resistance (if option is checked in

General tab)

Width of short-term crack opening, mm

Width of long-term crack opening, mm

Real width of crack opening

Note:

* If transverse reinforcing is not required, given results are highlighted in grey color.

Калькулятор площадей (fig. 5.15) в результатах предназначен для подбора по площади

диаметра и количества продольной арматуры. Причем возможно использовать разные диаметры, например, для угловой и центральной арматуры. Подбор выбора диаметров осуществляется посредством и набора необходимого количества стержней. Суммарная площадь арматуры приведена в нижней части окна калькулятора.

Пример: Система подобрала продольную арматуру d = 40 мм, n = 4 шт. Однако пользователь хочет применить, например, арматуру d = 20 мм. Для этого, во-первых, вводим в соответствующие поля n = 4 шт., d = 40 мм и определяем потребную площадь арматуры 5026.4

202

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

мм

2

. Далее по таблице калькулятора находим площадь одного стержня арматуры d = 20 мм. Это

314.2 мм

2

. И, наконец, определяем количество стержней арматуры 5026,4 / 314,2 = 16 шт.

Набрать необходимую площадь можно также, перебирая в калькуляторе количество стержней арматуры выбранного диаметра. Такой подход наиболее эффективен, если использовать разные диаметры арматуры.

Набрать рассчитанную интенсивность поперечного армирования можно, задав диаметр или шаг. Необходимое количество стержней арматуры данного конструктивного элемента будет рассчитано автоматически в правой части диалогового окна.

Example: By results of design calculation required intensity of transverse reinforcing must be 2,31 mm2/mm. For reinforcing of column that length is 10050 mm using diameter 10 mm 402 pcs. of reinforcement with step 50 mm is required. Thus real reinforcement intensity has made 3,14 mm2/mm.

Fig. 5.18 Transverse reinforcement design

Reinforced masonry design elements

There are two types of reinforced masonry design elements: column and shell. Each element has the local coordinate system.

Data

Designations and color of reinforcing are presented in Legend tab.

Fig. 5.19 Legend tab

There are tabs in the dialog for setting initial data: General, Brickwork, Loads and Reinforcement

(for checking calculation). They are described in details below.

203

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

a)

b) c) d)

Fig. 5.20 Data group tabs

Table 5.6

– Data group parameters

Tabs

General

Parameters

Carrying element

Section type

(for rod design element only)

Length factor in

ХY

Length factor in

ХZ

Working condition factor

Commants

I. 4.9 SNiP II-22-81*

Determines automatically

I. 4.3 SNiP II-22-81*

I. 4.3 SNiP II-22-81*

I. 3.11* SNiP II-22-81*

204

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Brickwork*

Reinforcement

(for checking calculation only)

Allow pure bending and axial tension along unjoin (horizontal) section

Reinforcement class

(for design calculation only)

Durability, years

Net area factor

Brick (Stone) type

Technology

Brick (Stone) grade

Solution type

Solution grade

Reinforcement class

Checking of this option allows to calculate elements at corresponding load types. It contradicts notes to I. 4.18 and I. 4.19 SNiP

II-22-81 *

I. 2.6 SNiP II-22-81*;

T. 5.7-5.8 SP 52-101-2003

I. 5.3 SNiP II-22-81*

I. 4.19 SNiP II-22-81*

I. 3. SNiP II-22-81*

Bar diameter, mm

Bar pitch on horizontal с1, mm

Bar pitch on horizontal с2, mm

Masonwork row numbers between mesh

Masonwork row height S, mm

Reinforcement ratio, %

Design calculation status

I. 2.6 SNiP II-22-81*;

T. 5.7-5.8 SP 52-101-2003

I. 6.77 SNiP II-22-81*

Distances between bars of horizontal reinforcing mesh

I. 6.76 SNiP II-22-81*

Depends on element material

I. 4.30 SNiP II-22-81*

If design calculation results are successful required reinforcement ratio is displayed.

Load variants Loads

Code combination

Load case

Set loads manually

Load duration factor

Note:

* Depends on element material.

I. 4.30 SNiP II-22-81*

Results

There are Use factor tab for viewing calculation results.

Fig. 5.21 Use factor tab of Results group

Table 5.7

– Results group parameters

Tabs

Use factor

Parameters

Required reinforcement ratio

(for design calculation only)

Use factor

All force factors

Force factors for selected coef.

Must be in range from 0 to 1

Invokes dialog box with force factors

Invokes dialog box with force factors for selected use factor

Comments

If reinforcement is required

205

/

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

If button is pressed ( ) there are only use factors with values more than 0.01

206

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Soil bases and foundations calculation

Foundation calculation begins with a previously selection of the constructive decision and parameters, such as the base dimensions and depth of foundation.

Check of the accepted dimensions and foundation reinforcing is performed by soil strength condition. Deformation calculation of the soil bases is made by condition of structure and soil base combined action.

Calculation of soil base deformation under average pressure in foundation base, not exceeding soil base design resistance (i. 5.5.8 SP 50-101-2004) should be carried out using scheme in the form of linearly deformable half-space (i. 5.5.31) with conditional restriction on compressed soil depth (i.

5.5.41 SP 50-101-2004).

For modeling of the elastic soil base definition of proportionality constants named coefficients of soil reaction is required.

On the basis of engineering-geological researches APM Structure3D allows to set soil structure and define soil design resistance and coefficients of soil reaction.

Calculation of internal forces in "soil base-foundation-structure" system is supposed to be performed on the basis characterized by variable stiffness in the plan (coefficients of soil reaction).

Coefficients of soil reaction depend on structure and soil physical properties and also soil base loads.

These coefficients can be previously defined or by iteration procedure. Procedure includes following steps:

1) structure calculation on the rigid supports and definition of soil reaction coefficients initial distribution by soil settlement depth;

2) calculation of coupled displacements of structure, foundation and soil base with the accepted soil reaction distribution under action of the set loads;

3) definition of foundation settlements with use of the accepted soil base model and also the next iteration and recalculation of soil reaction coefficients;

4) repetition of steps 2) and 3) before convergence by control parameters (for example, coefficients of soil reaction).

To work with the elastic soil bases use Elastic Foundations toolbar commands.

Fig. 5.22 Elastic Foundations toolbar

Elastic soil base for post foundation (activates after selection of rod-column and its base node)

Elastic soil base for strip foundation (activates after selection of rod-girder)

Elastic soil base for mat foundation (activates after selection of plate object)

Elastic soil base for single pile foundation (activates after selection of rod-column and its base node)

Soils information (accessible if soils are defined)

Engineering-geological elements

Holes

Hole list

Load geological info

Save geological info

Show/Hide holes

Show/Hide hole names

Show/Hide stratification map

General principles of work with Foundation dialog box

Generally the structure can be based on foundations of various types. Uniform dialog window with the list of foundations is used for work with all bases. Tabs of this dialog depend on the selected foundation type. When foundation is selected in the dialog list corresponding element is highlighted by

207

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

red color in structure editor. And contrary, selected element on model will be highlighted in foundation list of the dialog box.

Apply button is intended to accept all changes made in dialog tabs. In case of the incorrect set of parameters the message is displayed.

Calculation of soil base for post foundation

Post foundation is set for column as a rule. Therefore for calculation of elastic base for post foundation it is necessary to create steel, reinforced concrete or reinforced masonry design element

– column.

When column and nod with the set support is selected, command

Elastic base for post

foundation becomes accessible and after its activation, there will be Foundations dialog window.

Further components of this dialog will be considered in detail.

Fig. 5.23 Foundations dialog box

Configuration tab

Foundation shape corresponds to the column form by default.

Foundation dimensions

dimensions of the foundation offset coincide with overall dimensions of column section by default. Dimensions of the foundation top edge can be increased in comparison with column dimensions. It is possible to use round foundation for rectangular section column also.

Depth of foundation top edge

depth relative to zero level. Foundation depth cannot be lower than rocky soil.

Maximum dimensional relationship B/L allows to set additional design limitations to foundation base dimensions.

Foundation base area limitation at pulling, %

restriction by triangular epure type under foundation base.

Working condition factor button (

– not defined,

– defined) – invokes dialog box for factor selection according to t. 5.2 SP 50-101-2004.

208

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

density, which are used for soil design resistance calculation.

Soil Layers tab

Only one soil can correspond to one soil base.

Fig. 5.24 Dialog box

– Table 5.2 SP 50-101-2004.

Presence of cellar checkbox allows to set cellar parameters: depth, floor thickness, floor relative

Fig. 5.25 Soil Layers tab

The soil list is presented in the left part of dialog. You can set soil structure according to engineering-geological estimation. To set soil layer it is necessary to select its type from the drop-down list. It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc. All edit fields can be changed by mouse double click after selection of predetermined variant.

First, it is necessary to choose soil type (clay or sand). Subtype drop-down list content depends on soil type. It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc. Detailed description of soil modeling is listed in this chapter below.

209

Loads and Calculation tab

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 5.26 Loads and Calculation tab

Values of loads acting on soil base can be set manually according to the scheme or can takes from results of static calculation.

Calculate button starts calculation. It is necessary to set reinforcement and concrete cover. After calculation rigid support is replaced by elastic support with stiffness which is equal to product of soil reaction coefficient and foundation base area.

Scheme tab

The scheme tab with the base geometrical dimensions and its location relative to soil layers becomes accessible after calculation.

Fig. 5.27 Scheme tab

210

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Calculation of soil base for strip foundation

The strip base represents a beam under wall or nearby columns. For elastic base calculation it is necessary to create reinforced concrete girder design element and then set supports in design element nodes.

The design elements of one section and located on one ground can enter into one foundation.

After selection of a girder or group of girders the command Elastic base for strip foundation becomes accessible which invokes Foundation dialog box.

Fig. 5.28 Foundation dialog box (Configuration tab)

Configuration tab

The foundation image corresponds to the up view. Color of the base corresponds to color of section that allows to check that one basis has been created from elements of one section.

Foundation shape corresponds to the design elements dimensions by default.

Foundation depth

depth relative to zero level. Foundation depth cannot be lower than rocky soil.

Presence of cellar checkbox allows to set cellar parameters: depth, floor thickness, floor relative density, which are used for soil design resistance calculation.

Soil Layers tab

Only one soil can correspond to one soil base.

Generally the building site can be non-uniform. In this case it is necessary to set soil for each base.

You can set soil structure according to engineering-geological estimation. To set soil layer it is necessary to select its type from the drop-down list. It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc. All edit fields can be changed by mouse double click after selection of predetermined variant.

First, it is necessary to choose soil type (clay or sand). Subtype drop-down list content depends on soil type. It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc. Detailed description of soil modeling is listed in this chapter below.

211

Loads and Calculation tab

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 5.29 Loads and Calculation tab

Values of loads acting on soil base can be set manually according to the scheme or can takes from results of static calculation.

Working condition factor button (

– not defined,

– defined) – invokes dialog box for factor selection according to t. 5.2 SP 50-101-2004.

Calculate button starts calculation. After calculation rigid support is replaced by elastic support with stiffness which is equal to product of soil reaction coefficient and foundation base area.

Further it is necessary to perform calculation of system "soil base-foundation-structure" on elastic support. After that reinforcing of foundation elements can be designed taking into account elastic base.

Calculation of soil base for mat foundation

The mat foundation represents a plate. For elastic base calculation it is necessary to create reinforced concrete shell design element and then set supports in design element nodes.

The design elements located on one ground can enter into one foundation.

After selection of a shell or group of shells the command Elastic base for mat foundation becomes accessible which invokes Foundation dialog box.

Fig. 5.30 Foundation dialog box (Configuration tab)

212

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Configuration tab

The foundation image corresponds to the up view.

Foundation shape corresponds to the design elements dimensions by default.

Foundation depth

depth relative to zero level. Foundation depth cannot be lower than rocky soil.

Soil Layers tab

Only one soil can correspond to one soil base.

Generally the building site can be non-uniform. In this case it is necessary to set soil for each base.

You can set soil structure according to engineering-geological estimation. To set soil layer it is necessary to select its type from the drop-down list. It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc. All edit fields can be changed by mouse double click after selection of predetermined variant.

First, it is necessary to choose soil type (clay or sand). Subtype drop-down list content depends on soil type. It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc. Detailed description of soil modeling is listed in this chapter below.

Loads and Calculation tab

Fig. 5.31 Loads and Calculation tab

Values of loads acting on soil base can be set manually according to the scheme or can takes from results of static calculation.

Working condition factor button (

– not defined,

– defined) – invokes dialog box for factor selection according to t. 5.2 SP 50-101-2004.

Calculate button starts calculation. After calculation rigid support is replaced by elastic support with stiffness which is equal to product of soil reaction coefficient and foundation base area.

Further it is necessary to perform calculation of system "soil base-foundation-structure" on elastic support. After that reinforcing of foundation elements can be designed taking into account elastic base.

Calculation of soil base for pile foundation

Rod selection

– steel, reinforced concrete or masonry design element – column and node with the support makes accessible command Elastic base for pile foundation. After command activation there will be Foundation dialog window. To set pile foundation it is necessary to select lowest column parts with nodes and press Elastic base for pile foundation button. Pile foundation list located in the left part of appeared dialog. Select required item in the list to set parameters. Let’s consider all tabs of this dialog in detail.

213

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 5.32 Foundation dialog box (Pile Size tab)

Select standard pile from databases using Pile base button and tab edit fields will be filled automatically. If non-standard piles are used type in required parameters manually.

Fig. 5.33 Pile database

Pile Configuration tab is intended for selection pile type and set pile parameters which depend on its type according to table 5.8.

214

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 5.34 Foundation dialog box (Pile Configuration tab)

Table 5.8

– Pile parameters

Pile type

Available parameters

Driven

Shell

In situ and boring

Support type

Ultimate strength normative value of rocky ground, kPa

External diameter of in situ, boring and shell pile sinking part, m

Ultimate strength normative value of rocky ground, kPa

Calculated depth of in situ, boring and shell pile setting to a rocky ground, m

External diameter of in situ, boring and shell pile sinking part, m

Floating driven

Floating shell

Sinking method (table 7.3 SP 50-102-2003).

Floating shell with concrete filling

Floating in situ and boring

Floating screw

Supporting on loessial/clay soil with a degree of humidity >0.9

With widening

Sinking method (table 7.5 SP 50-102-2003)

Floating bored screwed

Floating jacking

Soil parameters (table 7.8 SP 50-102-2003)

Diameter of blade

Sinking method (table 7.2.11 SP 50-102-2003)

Sinking method (table 7.3 SP 50-102-2003)

Sinking method button (

– not defined,

– defined) –- invokes dialog box for pile sinking method or soil type selection according to tables 7.3, 7.5 or 7.8 SP 50-101-2004.

Grillage tab is intended for set grillage parameters and account of cellar.

Presence of cellar checkbox allows to set cellar parameters: depth, floor thickness, floor relative density, which are used for soil design resistance calculation.

215

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 5.35 Grillage tab

Soil layers tab is accessible for floating piles only. First, it is necessary to choose soil type (clay or sand). Subtype drop-down list content depends on soil type. It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc. Detailed description of soil modeling is listed in this chapter below.

Loads tab. Values of loads acting on soil base can be set manually according to the scheme or can takes from results of static calculation. It is necessary to perform static calculation of rigid supported structure previously.

Calculate pile capacity button.

It is possible to set pile capacity manually for example, if pile strength by material will be less than pile strength by soil.

Fig. 5.36 Loads tab

In Calculation tab select calculation method of soil strength characteristics and safety factor.

Pile capacity by soil and Pile capacity on pulling by soil values is displayed after pressing

216

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 5.37 Calculation tab

Working condition factor button (

– not defined, selection according to t. 5.2 SP 50-101-2004.

– defined) – invokes dialog box for factor

Foundation calculation button starts calculation of soil punching thickness taking into account loads on the basis, coefficients of soil reaction, heeling, characteristics of pile carrying capacity by soil, required number of piles, and also for floating piles: geometrical dimensions of a grillage slab, dimensions of conditional foundation, soil design resistance under conditional foundation. If the required number of piles is more than 20

– the message is displayed.

Fig. 5.38 Message

Fig. 5.39 Message

Fig. 5.40 Scheme tab

217

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

After calculation Scheme tab becomes accessible where piles location is shown. For all pile types except bearing piles the support will be replaced with an elastic support of corresponding stiffness along Z axis. To perform calculation of «soil-foundation-structure» system it is necessary to recalculate it taking into account elastic supports of the piles.

Soil modeling. General definitions

Engineering-geological element (EGE)

the engineering-geological body presented by one rock with statistically homogeneous properties: density, angle of internal friction, relative friction, coef. of lateral strain, modulus of elasticity. Own color corresponds to each EGE for displaying stratification map and ground.

Hole is characterized by its location and EGE layers. The thickness is set for each layer. Location of a hole in a plane (coordinates X, Y) can be set using mouse or keyboard. The hole location level

(coordinate Z) is set by absolute mark. Besides building zero level can be set in addition relative to sea level. Soil stratification approximation is carried out according to holes location.

Soil is characterized by layers with thickness. Properties of each layer: density, angle of internal friction, relative friction, coef. of lateral strain, modulus of elasticity. Own color corresponds to each soil layer.

For one soil base of foundation it is possible to set only one soil. Soil characteristics can be set in a dialog window or take from soil stratification map.

Soil characteristics

There are 2 ways for setting of soil characteristics in APM Structure 3D:

1. Set the list of predetermined soils and then select sequentially one of it for soil base. Such approach is preferable if the building site is homogeneous (changes of soil characteristics or the number of soil bases are insignificant).

2. Set EGE with properties, make holes according to given engineering-geological researches, create soil stratification map. Such approach allows to receive soil characteristics in any point for a significant amount of the soil bases and non-uniform geological conditions automatically.

Let's consider each way in detail.

Work with soil list

Soil List command invokes Soil List dialog box for creation, editing and deleting of soils.

Dialog contains soil list which presented in the left part of dialog and image of the selected soil on the right.

Fig. 5.41 Soil List dialog box

Edit button invokes Soil Layers dialog box where you can change soil structure.

218

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

New button invokes Soil Name dialog box in which you can type in soil name. After pressing OK button Soil Layers dialog box appears on the screen. After new soil is created it will be accessible in

Foundation dialog box.

Delete button allows to delete soil. The soil cannot be deleted while it is used in calculation of any foundation.

Soils which were created by means of this command will be accessible to the subsequent selection in Soil Layers tab of Foundation dialog box.

Soil stratification map

Definition of soil characteristics for a non-uniform building site includes following stages:

1) Set engineering-geological elements (EGE) and their properties

.

2) Set hole location and soil layers according to EGE.

3) Approximation by available holes for creation of soil stratification map.

4) Creation of separate soils for each foundation.

Let's consider soil stratification map creation in detail.

To set hole select

Engineering-geological elements button on Elastic foundations toolbar.

To set new EGE it is necessary to choose soil type (clay or sand). It is possible to use predetermined layer types: sand, clay with known physical characteristics, and also type in soil parameters manually: thickness, density, etc.

Fig. 5.42 Soil Layers dialog box

To set holes location use Holes command. The method of holes creation should be used if there are previously created nodes in holes location for exact cursor snap. After specifying hole location there will be Engineering-geological data dialog box. That dialog can be invoked by

Engineering-geological data command also.

Area for soil stratification map in GCS - this adjustment allows to set soil stratification map area automatically according to holes location. Input of area boundary coordinates is provided also if automatic map does not cover all foundation. Last variant can be used, for example, for extended building in plane at holes location along line.

Holes List includes number, name and coordinates of holes which can be entered from the keyboard. For addition/deletion of holes the buttons located below are used.

The set of soil layers from earlier created EGE in the right part of a dialog can be assigned for each hole. Thus it is possible to set one of two parameters - thickness or level. Color of a layer corresponds to EGE color.

It is possible to display holes and their names on model using buttons: Show/Hide Holes and

Show/Hide Hole Names.

All changes in dialog box are accessible to display in model after pressing Apply button.

219

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 5.43 Engineering-geological data

Fig. 5.44 Example of soil stratification map

Set soil group buttons allow to set a soil For all foundations or For foundations with undefined

soil only. Last adjustment allows to combine both ways, for example when the building part is located on a homogeneous building site, and under other part of a building soils are non-homogeneous. After pressing one of the specified buttons soil stratification map is displayed on the basis of approximation

(Displaying is possible only if the Show/Hide Stratification Map button is pressed).

Interpolation of soil properties is based on automatic creation of new soils under each base. This operation can be followed after foundation creation. Detailed description of soil base creation for foundations are presented above.

Soil stratification map adjustment allows to set a visualization transparency.

Engineering-geological data save together with APM Structure3D model, however it is possible to save EGE and holes in a separate file (*.soildata). Save and Load buttons are used for this purpose.

220

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Рис. 5.45 Пример создания новых грунтов для свайного поля.

221

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 6. Results

This chapter gives a brief description of results of all types of calculation carried out in APM

Structure3D.

Static calculation results

Results of static calculation are:

Linear and angular node displacements

Loads at rod ends, plate and solid elements nodes

Force epures for entire structure

Force epures for entire structure

Stresses acting in rods, plates and solid elements

Stress distribution in arbitrary cross-section of any rod

Force epures for entire structure

Specified parameters for separate beam such as: bending moments, torsion moments, lateral and axial forces, bending and torsion angles, stresses and strains along beams length. All these parameters are represented in the form of graphs and plotted in local rod coordinate system. You can obtain both relational deformation (displacements comparative to the line connecting two deformed edges of rod) and deformation in global coordinate system. In case of structure consisting of only one rod comparative and total deformation are the same.

Reactions (forces and moments) acting in supports

Total construction mass

Node displacements and loads at rod ends and plate and solid nodes

Node displacements and rod end loads as well as plate and solid nodes are presented as a table.

Fig. 6.1 Displacements and Loads at Nodes dialog box

222

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Displacement values are presented in global coordinate system while loads at nodes are represented in element coordinate system (rod or plate). For solid elements, both displacements and loads are represented in global coordinate system because solid local coordinate system coincides with global one. To see these results select Results / Loads menu command that will call the window shown above.

In the upper part of the window, the current element is highlighted. To view the desired element you can select it either in the upper part of the window or in Elements list in its lower part. Show

Graphs button allows user to view design parameters of a beam along its length. These parameters are shown above in the results list as item 4. This command invokes a dialog box shown below. The box contains buttons that allow you to look through corresponding graphs. Set Show Full Deformation checkmark to plot full deformations graph or remove this checkmark to view deformation relative to the line connecting two deformed edges (i.e. without taking edge displacement into account).

Fig. 6.2 Rod Coordinate System Dialog box

Force epures for entire structure

Force epures for entire structure are plotted with the help of Results / Show Element Forces command. Epures for elements belonging to ON layers are displayed in the window; epures for OFF layers are not plotted. For each separate rod, these epures can be seen in Results / Loads menu.

An example of window representing epures on rods is shown below.

Эпюры в элементе отображаются в виде цветной карты результатов. На карте результатов возможна простановка выносок с помощью команды Выноска панели инструментов Карта результатов. Ниже показан пример окна с эпюрами на стержнях.

223

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 6.3 Window representing forces acting on rods

224

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Loads in rods, plates and solid elements

Loads in rods, plates and solid elements are displayed as stress map. Construction stress map is frame construction painted in colors according to stress values on the surface. Deformation map is a deformed construction view. Displacement values are shown scaled-up for intuitiveness. To see the map of stress and deformation select Results / Stress Map menu command.

Рис. 6.1 Карта результатов.

Fig. 6.4 Stresses on undeformed structure in 3D vizualization

Effective stress map in rod cross-section

User can see equivalent stress distribution in arbitrary section of the rod. To do that, select

Results /

Stress in cross-section menu command, which is available at viewing construction

225

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

stress map. That will switch editor into stress-in-section review mode. Place cursor near required zone of the rod and click to call window with the stress map in the selected cross-section.

Fig. 6.5 Effective stress map in cross-section

Base reactions

Base reactions are shown in global coordinate system as a table using command Results /

Base Reactions. A selected node is highlighted in the table with a different color in structure editor windows. Clicking on the column header you can sort the bearings in ascending/descending order of the reaction in the selected column of the table.

The discrepancy of forces and moments (sum of reactions and external forces) appears in the global coordinate system. You can also print this table to a printer or to a file in RTF format.

Show reaction vectors

displaying vector and response values for the selected supports .

Filters

allow you on/off supports displaying in certain directions of GCS and one-directional supports.

More button invokes dialog box with the information about the centre of gravity, total reactions in supports, etc.

226

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 6.6 Base Reactions dialog box

Fig. 6.2 Reaction vector Rz for the support selected in the table.

Buckling analysis results

Buckling results are:

Buckling safety factors.

Buckling shapes of a structure.

Results | Buckling command displays a table with the buckling factors. To view a buckling shape, select a row in the table and click "Shape".

Fig. 6.3 Buckling safety factor dialog.

227

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 6.4 1-buckling shape

Fig. 6.5 2- buckling shape

Geometrical nonlinear analysis results

Results are the same items as for linear static calculation.

Results of physically nonlinear problem

Calculation of physically nonlinear problem is possible taking into account unloading (see description of Calculation / Calculation Options command).

At calculation with unloading two load cases are created instead of one: Load Case 0 - Loading and Load Case 1 - Unloading.

Besides results of linear static calculation maps of total relative strain are accessible for

"Unloading" case and total relative strain, elastic strain and plastic strain for "Loading" case.

228

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Components correspond linear (EPSX, EPSY, EPSZ), shear (EPSXY, EPSYZ, EPSZX) and intensity (EPSINT) of relative strain.

General nonlinear analysis results

Просмотр результатов возможен для двух режимов Нагрузка и Разгрузка

General nonlinearity (geometric and physical at the same time) allows to take into account both geometrical and material nonlinearity simultaneously.

View of the results is available for two modes - Loading and Unloading.

Modal analysis results

Results for eigenfrequency calculation are:

Eigenfrequencies for the structure

Corresponding mode shapes for the structure

Modal masses and sum of modal masses corresponding to each eigenfrequency. In the seismic code of many countries (Eurocode 8, UBC-97, Russsian seismic code etc.), it is assumed that the sum of modal masses in each direction of the seismic load should be not less than the preset limit. Usually the horizontal component of the seismic action is assumed to be 85-90%, vertical - 70-90%.

Select command Results / Natural frequencies to see eigenfrequencies and mode shapes.

Eigenfrequencies are shown as a table.

Fig. 6.7 Eigenfrequency values window

Example of mode shape window is shown below.

229

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 6.8 Mode shape window

Results of forced oscillation calculation

Results of forced oscillation analysis are:

Node displacements

Stresses in rods, plates and solid elements

Base reactions

Eigenfrequencies and mode shapes

Node displacements

You can see node displacements by selecting command Results / Graph of Displacement. An example of graph is shown below.

Fig. 6.9 Graph of node displacements window

Stresses, displacements, internal loads

Stresses acting in rods, plates and solid elements as well as displacements and internal loads are shown as color maps for each calculated moment in time, forming a slide show. An example of stress map window is shown below.

230

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 6.10 Stress map animation window

To start animation, push the button Start/Pause. In an input field "Period of animation" set duration of time which the duration period of animation will last. A stress map (displacements) is drawn on a structure with a result range scale. With help of settings in the dialog window "Animation" one can view a not full oscillation period, but only some its part. After view of at least one animation loop the process itself can be written to a AVI file with help of a corresponding button.

You can also obtain graph of equivalent stress in arbitrary cross-section of any rod using command Results / Graph of Stress. Example of graph window is shown below.

Fig. 6.11 Time-variable graph of stress in arbitrary cross-section window

Base reactions

Base reactions are shown in global coordinate system as a table for every calculated moment of time with the help of Results / Base Reactions command. See description of static calculation results for more detailed description.

Eigenfrequencies

You can see eigenfrequencies and mode shapes by selecting Results / Eigenfrequencies command. See description of eigenfrequency calculation.

231

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Results of contact interaction calculation

Result of contact interaction calculation is the stress-strain state of structure (see results of static analysis), and also maps of normal and tangent forces distribution, interpenetration and condition of contact elements in contact area presented in the form of isoareas. After calculation it is possible to see condition of contact/target elements, estimate form and dimensions of contact zone by distribution of normal force, and also to check solution accuracy using interpenetration map. All results of contact interaction calculation are displayed separately from all structure, or on transparent model for viewing isoareas of contact and target elements.

Results of steel design elements

Bearing capacity calculation of metal structure rod elements

is carried out for design elements and is implemented according to building regulations in this version of APM Structure3D. Strength / buckling check of rod elements can be executed by classical methods of strength of materials as well.

To perform this calculation, preliminary static or p-delta analysis is necessary, and as well as design elements creation. Calculation is initiated by Calculation / Design menu command or the

Calculation button in dialog

Design elements. Calculation button allows to inspect bearing capacity without closing the dialog window.

When the design element does not pass all of checks, there is an opportunity to select section automatically from cross-sections library. For this purpose at installation of design element properties, it is necessary to check Select section

and to choose cross-sections library, having specified path to it.

For correct work of bearing capacity check algorithm and selection of sections, it is necessary to observe the type of the section setting to a design element. I.e. section of rods forming a design element and sections in the library chosen for selection should be of the same one type. For example, if the section of rods is the I-beam, only I-beam

sections should be in the library for selection.

Fig. 6.12 Results dialog box

Check type is listed in the first column of the table, and operating ratios are given in the second and in the third column correspondingly. So, for example, use factor will be the attitude of an operating compressing / stretching stress to maximum allowed for check «tensile / compression strength». Use factor will be less then unit if the design element meets the criteria of that check type. One can see, that some checks have not passed (they are highlighted), and during calculation the section was chosen that meets all building regulations checks.

232

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The

Change section button performs automatic replacement of rods cross-section constituting a design element with the selected one. The

Undo change button returns initial section to the rods that form a design element.

Results of reinforcing elements

Result of design calculation is definition of reinforcing intensity and selection of reinforcement diameter and step for columns, girders and plates. Result of checking calculation is the use factor which should be in range from 0 to 1.

To see reinforcing results for each design element use Design / Design Elements command. It is necessary to choose an interesting design element in the appeared dialog window in the list at the left, and reinforcing results according to the first and second groups of limiting states will be accessible for viewing in tabs of Results group. Results content will depends on type of selected design element.

Fig. 6.13 Reinforcing results

Reinforcement results presentation

For expanded visual representation of reinforcing results commands of Reinforcement Results toolbar are intended. This toolbar is accessible if the Design / Design Element Type / Reinforced

Elements option is checked. The description of commands is resulted below.

Fig. 6.14 Reinforcement Results toolbar

Show plate reinforcement

Show upper reinforcement along X axis

233

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Show bottom reinforcement along X axis

Show upper reinforcement along Y axis

Show bottom reinforcement along Y axis

Show rod reinforcement

Show rod longitudinal reinforcement

Show rod transverse reinforcement

Show post foundation

Show elements with unsuccessful calculation

234

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 7. Design of Structure Steel Joints

This chapter describes automatic creation of the drawing documentation for joints of metal constructions.

APM Structure3D allows user to create drawings of the following typical joints:

Pinned column base.

Fixed column base (2 hooks).

Concrete column base.

Beam to beam connection.

Corner of frame connection.

Column

to beam connection.

Beam to column connection (angled).

Beam to beam connection (angled).

Beam to column connection (flanged).

Beam to beam connection (flanged).

Plate-rod connection.

Plate-internal node connection.

Plate-zone node connection.

Tube connection.

For drawing creation of typical joint, it is necessary to select connected rod elements and to press the button of the corresponding joint type on Steel connection toolbar. If the selected elements cannot form a certain connection type the corresponding button becomes inactive or the warning message appears on the screen.

Fig. 7.1 Connection of steel elements toolbar

After activation of a command, a graphical editor APM Graph with a corresponding parametr шс model is run. The values of variables of a drawing model variables (type of section, geometric dimensions, material

…), correspond to a calculated model. For editing of connection parametric models the APM

Graph editor toolbar "Node model parameters" is serving. Editing of parameter models can be carried out in three ways:

– in a variable list;

– with use of dialog windows with icon dialog windows.

– printing and editing dimensions directly on the drawing.

– toolbar "Parameters" of a connection model.

– the command calls a dialog with a variable list. The variable list depends on a parametric model.

For editing a variable must be selected in a list and the button "Change" of a dialog window must be pushed.

235

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 7.2 An example of a variable edit dialog for the model "The Connection Column-Beam".

– the command calls an icon dialog window for the choice of connection parameters. General view of a dialog window and the tabs depend on a parameter model. The main dialog icon windows are presented for different connection types further.

There is editing of variables sizes and inscriptions possibly and directly on the model. The sizes and the inscriptions available for editing are selected for patterns in

blue color

and the dependent sizes not available for editing

– in black color. For editing choose the command

"Edit/

Modification" and then click size. After it one can change in the dialog box that appeared the value or the text of a variable.

Further, we shall consider each type of connection in detail.

Pinned column base

Shortcut:

Hook type:

Wedge type:

Type of strengthening:

Beam to plate connection type: welded , bolted

Number of bolts is unlimited, but distance between them is constant.

Bolts can be aligned with respect to beam axis.

236

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 7.3 Example of pinned column base

Fixed column base (2 hooks)

Shortcut:

Hook type:

Wedge type:

Type of strengthening:

Beam to plate connection type: welded

Fig. 7.4 Example of fixed column base

237

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Concrete column base

Shortcut:

Type of beam profile: I-beam, channel, L-bar, T-profile.

All profiles expect of T-profile can be rotated on 90 degree. T-profile

– 180 degree.

Fig. 7.5 Example of concrete column base

Beam to beam connection

Shortcut:

Connection of column and beam: welded, bolted.

Number of bolts is unlimited, but distance between them is constant.

Position of plate (bisector): vertical ,

Edges of rigidity: perpendicular main part

0

– edge is absent

1

– triangular edge

2

– rectangular edge

,

,

238

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 7.6 Example of beam to beam connection

Corner of frame connection

Shortcut:

Edges of rigidity: 0

– edge is absent

1- triangular edge ,

2

– rectangular edge

,

Connection type: welded, bolted.

Number of bolts is unlimited, but distance between them is constant.

Position of beams: T-shaped

Strengthening elements: ,

, angular

,

Fig. 7.7 Example of Corner of frame connection

239

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Column to beam connection

Shortcut:

See the previous type of connection.

Beam to column connection (angled)

Shortcut:

Beam profiles: , , .

Position of beam 1 - constant.

Position of beam 2 - 8 positions for L-bar and channel and 4 for I-beam.

Connection: welded, bolted.

Number of bolts is unlimited, but with sizes - 5 in lines and columns.

Fig. 7.8 Example of Beam to column connection (angled)

Beam to beam connection (angled)

Shortcut:

240

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

See the previous type of connection.

Beam to column connection (flange)

Shortcut:

See the previous type of connection.

Beam to beam connection (flange)

Shortcut:

See the previous type of connection.

Plate-rod connection

Shortcut:

Truncation of plate: truncation of one corner , truncation of corners up to beam

Type of plate corners: not truncated truncated strongly truncated

Profile position on plate: fastening by wall

Beam to plate connection: welded, bolted.

, fastening by flange

Plate connection: welded, bolted.

Number of

bolts at external connection of plate is unlimited. Distance between bolts is constant.

Maximum number of bolts at connection of beams and plate = 5. Distance between bolts is set.

All beams can join with plate from one or two sides.

Fig. 7.9 Example of plate-rod connection

241

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Plate-internal node connection

Shortcut:

Plate parameters

Plate type: tetrahedral.

Type of plate corners: not truncated

Beams parameters

Beam profiles: L-bar, channel.

Profile position on plate:

truncated strongly truncated fastening by wall fastening by flange

Number of beams: 0 - 4.

Type of beams1,3 и 2,4: all beams separately , beams 1 and 3 are jointed beams 2 и 4 are jointed

At joint of beams 1 and 3 profile type, position and connection type are set on the first beam.

At joint of beams 2 and 4 profile type, position and connection type are set on the second beam.

All beams can join with plate from one or two sides.

Parameters of connection

Beams to plate connection type: welded, bolted.

Maximal number of bolts - 5. Distance between bolts is varied.

Fig. 7.10 Example of plate-internal node connection

242

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Plate-zone node connection

Shortcut:

Plate parameters

Plate type: tetrahedral , hexahedral .

Type of plate corner: not truncated

Beams parameters

Beam profiles: L-bar, channel.

truncated strongly truncated

Profile position on plate: fastening by wall fastening by flange

Type of beams1, 2: all beams separately , beams are jointed (horizontal) .

Number of beams: 0 - 5.

At joint of beams 1 and 2 profile type, position and connection type are set on the first beam.

Parameters of connection

Beams to plate connection type: welded, bolted.

Maximum number of bolts - 5. Distance between bolts is varied.

At joint of beams 1 and 2 bolts can be aligned concerning the rotation center.

All beams can join with plate from one or two sides.

Fig. 7.11 Example of plate-zone node connection

243

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 8. Specialized Editors

Part 1. Function Editor

graphics and exact function specification. The editor includes parser for entering analytical expressions describing the functions.

Function editor APM_FNED is intended to enter and edit functions. The editor allows to use both

Function editor interface

Fig. 8.1 Function editor external interface

To manage the editor, use the toolbar buttons.

Fig. 8.2 Function editor toolbar

The status bar is the bar in the lower part of the program window where various prompt information, current measurement units and cursor coordinates are displayed.

Fig. 8.3 Status bar

244

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The user adjustments are present in function editor for convenience of work. The commands

Scale, Limits, Grid, Cursor step, Palette are used for adjustments changing. Thus, it is necessary to note, that adjustments "by default" is convenient for creation of the most widespread functions.

Toolbar command reference

OK

Cancel

Use this button to end function entering/editing, save changes and return to calling program.

Use this button to cancel function editor without saving changes.

Load Data File

To numerical data loading, it is convenient to use this command, which invokes the dialog window with support of following formats shown below. Formats (*.prn) and (*.csv) can be created in the tabulared editor, for example MS Excel.

Fig. 8.4 File types that can be opened

Save Data File

To save the graph of function, it is necessary to use this command. The system allows to save data in following formats.

Fig. 8.5 File types that can be saved

Full Scale

Use this button to set scale 1 : 1.

Zoom In Window

Use this button to enlarge selected rectangle to the whole window. Press mouse left button and drag mouse to specify enlargement rectangle. Use right mouse button to cancel operation.

Scale

Use this button to enter specific scale. In response to this button, the Scale dialog box is displayed.

245

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 8.6 Scale dialog box

Use Set Scale edit box to enter vertical scale. The buttons of Standard group allows you to set one of four often used scales. Note that can change the vertical scale for displacement graph only.

Limits

Use this button to enter graph limits. In invokes Function Limits dialog box.

Fig. 8.7 Function limits dialog box

Grid

This button invokes Grid Parameters dialog box. This command allows you to change auxiliary grid settings.

Fig. 8.8 Grid parameters dialog box

Cursor Step

This button calls Cursor Step dialog box. This command allows you to set cursor linear step

(sensitive zone).

Palette

Fig. 8.9 Cursor step dialog box

246

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

This button invokes Palette dialog box. This command allows you to change colors of function editor elements.

Fig. 8.10 Color palette dialog box

New Function

This button deletes existing graph and starts new one.

Lengthen Function

Using this button, you can lengthen function up to the right limit. The lengthening is performed by addition of horizontal line to existing graph.

Analytical Function

This button invokes Analytic Function dialog box.

Fig. 8.11 Analytic Function dialog box

In this dialog box, you can enter parameters of analytical function. You can add analytical as graphics objects to the displacement graph.

Use Formula edit box to enter expression describing analytical function.

Use To Point edit box to enter abscissa of starting point. Ordinate is determined using function expression.

Use From point edit box to enter abscissa of ending point. Ordinate is determined using function expression.

If the Convert to Spline checkbox is checked the analytical function will be converted to spline with given discretization step. In this case, the restrictions acting in the case of analytical function will be removed, but the accuracy decreases.

Using Discretization Step edit box you can enter the step used to convert analytical function to spline. Since the restriction are imposed on the number of spline points, when using too small step you get the corresponding warning message.

247

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

248

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Table

This button displays dialog box Specify Function by Table.

Fig. 8.12 Function dialog box

In this dialog box the objects are listed including their boundary coordinates.

Use Add button to select type of object to be added - line, spline, analytical function.

Use Insert button to select type of object to be inserted - line, spline, analytical function. The object is inserted before current one (highlighted by selection bar). Analytical function cannot be inserted. The object cannot be inserted if analytical function is specified.

Use Edit button to change the current object. Some restrictions are imposed to object editing if analytical function is specified.

Use Delete button to delete the current object. Some restrictions are imposed to object deletion if analytical function is specified.

If you select the object of 'line' type (when you add or insert the object), the Line dialog box is displayed.

Fig. 8.13 Line dialog box

You can enter line parameters using this dialog box.

In some modes (adding, insertion, editing) some of the edit boxes become unavailable.

If you select the object of 'spline' type (when you add or insert the object), the Spline dialog box is displayed.

Fig. 8.14 Spline dialog box

The points used to construct spline are listed in this dialog box.

Use Add button to add new point to the spline.

Use Edit button to change current point of the spline.

Use Insert button to insert new point. The point is inserted before current one (highlighted by selection bar).

Use Delete button to delete current point of the spline.

249

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Use OK button to confirm spline editing. The spline is checked for the presence of at least four points, as well as for agreement between spline end points and boundaries.

If you select the object of type 'analytical function’ the Analytical Function dialog box is displayed

(see above).

Line

Spline

This button switches the program to line drawing.

This button switches the program to spline drawing.

Add Object

This button switches the program to object adding mode.

Line drawing

To draw the line place cursor to one of it end points, press mouse left button and holding it move cursor to other end point, then release the button. Pressing of right mouse button cancels the drawing operation. If you continue the drawing, the first point will be the end point of the previous object. If the line you are drawing is the first object, the X coordinate is 0, the Y coordinate is determined by cursor position.

Spline drawing

When you draw the spline its first point is set automatically: if you continue the drawing, the first point will be the end point of the previous object, if the spline you are drawing is the first object, the X coordinate is 0, the Y coordinate is determined by cursor position. To enter the second point press mouse left button and holding it move cursor to required point, then release button. As usually mouse right button pressing cancels the operation.

To enter following points of the spline use the same actions as for line drawing. To delete existing spline point move cursor to it and press mouse right button.

Use Ctrl + mouse right button combination to cancel spline drawing.

To draw spline one should enter at least four points. The set of points used to draw spline must not contain the points with coinciding coordinates, otherwise spline drawing is canceled.

To finish spline drawing, press space bar.

Edit Function

To edit the node, located between the objects, move cursor to it and press mouse left button.

Holding left button you can move the node. If you press mouse right button at the moment, you cancel the editing. Releasing left button you set new position of the node. Now you can edit the objects, located to the left and to the right of the node. The editing performed just in the same way as the drawing does. Pressing of mouse right button (as well as combination of Ctrl + mouse right button for the spline) returns the object to initial state.

To edit the spline, move cursor to it and press mouse left button. The program will operate in editing mode. The combination Ctrl + mouse right button returns the object to initial state. To finish editing, press space bar.

To edit analytical function, move mouse cursor to it and press mouse left button. The dialog box will be displayed; using it, you can change parameters of analytical function.

Insert Object

To insert new object, move the cursor to the node that corresponds to objects you want to insert new object between. If you press mouse left button, the right object is displaced to distance that is equal to distance between last point of object to right boundary of graph. Now you can enter new object just in the same way as you do it in the drawing mode. When you finish object insertion, the drawing is displaced to the left with leveling of Y coordinate. So editing of displaced object may be required. You can not insert analytical function. In presence of analytic function, there exist some restrictions on object deletion.

250

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Delete Object

To delete object, move cursor either object or to node, the object located right of. Then press mouse left button to select object to be deleted. In this moment, pressing right button you will cancel deletion. Having release left button you delete the object. After deletion the object located to the right of deleted one moves to the left with Y coordinate leveling off. So editing of displaced object may be required. If analytic function is entered there exist some restrictions on object deletion.

Function

This button switches the program to mode of function entering.

First Derivative

This button switches the program to mode of first derivative entering.

Second Derivative

This button switches the program to mode of second derivative entering.

Help

This button displays help contents.

Part 2. A table editor

Any (for example, heat and other) kinds of loads can be specified with help of a function of several variables defined in form of a table. When you set the load necessary to select "Table", and then click "Edit".

Fig. 8.1 Setting of load with help of a table.

In the dialog window that appeared, one may create a new table or open the existing.

251

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 8.2 Creation of a new table.

During creation of a table the number of dimensions from 1 to 4 (i.e. the number of independent variables) must be specified and the number of values on each dimension must be specified. A number of values must be larger than two for each dimension. As a result a table with the mentioned parameters will be created. If one dimension is specified, a column with the mentioned number of rows vector-column will be created.

At the choice of two dimensions a rectangular matrix will be created. So the example of a matrix creation with the 2nd rows and 5 columns is given in the Fig. above.

At the number of dimensions a three-dimensional matrix containing in each plane a rectangular matrix of specified sizes is created for 3 measurement.

3-я плоскость

2-ая плоскость

1-ая плоскость

Fig. 8.3 Three-dimensional matrix.

number, and the column number. Four dimensions allow to create the 4th measuring matrix consisting of the blocks each of which contains a three-dimensional matrix.

Numbering of each 3D matrix element starts with indication of the plane number, then the row

Блок 1 Блок 2 Блок 3

Fig. 8.4 4D-matrix consisting of three blocks

252

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Numberings of four-dimensional matrix elements similar: First the block number, then the plane, the row, and the column are specified. During creation of the table the number of elements in each dimension must be not less than 2.

After creating the table needs to be filled.

Filling in of the table and table editing

In the drop-down list for each measurement (rows, columns, etc.) an independent variable must be selected from a list of available ones. After the choice of an independent variable, units of measurement for each quantity will be displayed in the cells. Further enter values of independent variables (by the rows and columns) to corresponding table cells (they are highlighted with color). In a case of planes and blocks, double click on an element or push the button "Change" and enter its value in a window that appeared.

Fig. 8.5 Definition of a multivariate function with help of the table.

After entry of independent variables values should fill values of the function (the white cells in the table). The editable cell is being selected by a frame, as well as the headers of the row and column where the cell is selected.

In a case of need one can change units of variables measurement using the button "Customize".

The new dialog where one can select necessary units of measurement for each quantity will be open.

Further select option to convert entered data into new units of measurement or leave data without change and change only units.

253

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 8.6 Setting of units of measurement.

A possibility to choose the coordinate system where the variable values are specified is provided for. When changing the coordinate system, if the variable has in its other units, warning is issued, and then the units automatically are replaced.

Fig. 8.7 Coordinate systems

The button "Save" allows to save a created table to a file with *.bctbl extension. By default the file name coinciding with the table name will be suggested.

The button "Open a session" and the button "Open" are loading a previously saved table from a file, but make it by the miscellanea.

The button "Open a session" opens an arbitrary table from a file on a disk, i.e. de facto it creates a new table with the same parameters and data as in a saved file.

The button "Open" will load a table from a file only if the number of measurements in a saved table coincides with the number of measurements in the one that is created, in the opposite case a message is given to the screen.

In APM Studio, if the function in the table is specified in a user coordinate system and such a system is absent in a current project, the necessary coordinate system will be created during opening of the table.

In APM Structure3D the user coordinate system is not created during opening of the table, but a global system of coordinates of the same type will be used.

Also the user may not create a new table, but he can use as a template the previously created tables which are available in the tab "Existing table".

254

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 8.8 Use of an existing table as a template

Addition and deletion of cells

If in the stage of a table creation the number of rows, columns, etc., is incorrectly specified, one may add or delete the necessary amount of cells in each dimension. For it one must use the available buttons "Add" and "Remove".

For addition of a row or column an arbitrary cell must be selected and the row or the column will be added after a current column or row. If there is no selected column or row, addition occurs to the first position. To remove selection, one must press ESC or click gray cells for removing in the left top corner of the table.

Fig. 8.9 The area of rows and columns deselect

Addition of planes and blocks is occurring in a similar way: The element is added after a dedicated one. For addition of an element to the first place one must remove selection having pressed

ESC.

In general, the procedure of elements deletion for each measurement is similar to the addition procedure. A necessary element in the dimension must be selected and the corresponding button

"Delete" must be pushed. If it is present in measurement of 2 elements, removal is not possible, a corresponding message about which will appear.

After data entry to the table it can be sorted (the button "Sort"). The table is sorted based on the increase of data in headers of rows, columns, etc.

The button "Clean" removes values of a function from the table, leaving values of independent variables.

Fig. 8.10 The example of the table sorting

255

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Part 3. Expression editor

Dialog of an expression definition

The editor of analytical expressions is intended for definition of source data in parameter form.

Independent variables (parameters), prevalent mathematical functions and operations, a conditional statement for determination of a function defined by different expressions at different values of an independent variable can be used in the expression.

Fig. 8.11 A dialog window of an editor of analytical expressions

1. Coordinates system

If space coordinates of «x», «y», «z» are used in the expression, a possibility to choose the coordinate system where the value of an expression will be counted is provided to the user.

Fig. 8.12 Choice of a coordinate system

2. Saved objects

Frequently for different loads one and the same expression is used. If these expressions have identical units of measurement and a set of independent variables, the expression can be used again.

It is sufficient to select it from a drop-down list. If the user for different loads selected one expression and changed it, the changes will be reflected in other loads using this object "Expression".

Fig. 8.13 The choice of an expression from a drop-down list

3. Field of an expression definition

256

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

4. Units of measurement of an expression result.

For the majority of objects units of measurement results of an expression are fixed and can’t be selected. But in a number of other cases perhaps the choice of units of measurement type must be left to the user. Also current units of measurement are shown on the right.

5. List of the independent variables (parameters) available for use that can be used in an expression.

Also units of a changed selected variable are shown on the right.

6. Button of a selected independent variable to an expression input field adding.

7. Buttons of prevalent mathematical functions to an expression input field adding.

8. A current change reset button.

9. An expression field clearance button.

Syntax of expressions

Mathematical operators

The mathematical operators in accordance with their priority are presented in the table.

Table 8.2 the Mathematical operators

A notation The name Priority

-

Of a %

^

*

An unary minus

A remainder of division

Raising to a power

Arithmetic multiplication

1

2

3

4

/

+

Arithmetic division

Arithmetic addition

4

5

-

&

|

>

<

>=

<=

!=

==

Arithmetic subtraction

Logical multiplication («и»)

Logical addition («or»)

More (comparison)

(Comparison) is smaller

(Comparison is) larger or equal

(Comparison) is smaller or equal

(Comparison) is not equal

Also (comparison)

5

6

6

7

7

7

7

7

7

The unary minus can be used for logical expressions. For it the expression necessary to bracket. An exam ple: «(x > 10 | - (y > 0 & y < 10)».

A conditional operator

The conditional «if» operator which has three parameters can be used in the expression: A condition, an expression in case of satisfaction of a condition, and an expression in case of nonsatisfaction of a condition.

The conditional operator has the following syntax: if ("condition", expression, «when a condition is satisfied», «expression, when is the condition not satisfied»).

Priority of a conditional operator is to be read off as grouping with brackets.

Brackets

The parts of an expression can group by brackets «(», «)».

A remark. Into input field of the expression will be impossibly to use characters «{», «}», «[», «], as they are using for templates in operation with units of measurement.

Functions

In the expression one can use prevalent mathematical functions introduced in the table.

Table 8.3 Mathematical functions

A notation

sin(x) cos(x) tg(x)

Description

A sine

A cosine

A tangent

A notation

pow(a, b) sqrt(x) floor(x)

Description

A «a» number to a degree of «b»

A square root of a number

Rounding in smaller direction

257

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

ctg(x) asin(x) acos(x) atan(x)

A cotangent

An arcsine

An arccosine

An arctangent exp(x)

An exponential of a x number

Examples of expressions

ceil(x) lg(x) ln(x) log(b, a) abs(x)

Rounding in large direction

A vulgar logarithm

A natural logarithm

A logarithm of a b number to an a base

A modulus of a number

1) ctg (x + 10) + sin (if (y < 0, -1, if (y > 10, 10, y * 2)

A cotangent of a sum of an independent variable of a x and 10, as well as a sum of this expression and a sine of piece-wise function are calculated in this expression. The piece-wise function receives value -1 on a segment (-

∞, 0), value 10 receives on the segment (10, +∞), the value of y * 2 receives on the segment (0, 10).

2) if (x > 0 & x < 10, 5, exp(x) )

This example is distinguished from the previous one by the fact that a compound condition of a conditional operator is used here. The piece-wise function accepts value 5 on a segment (0, 10) and a value of exp(x) at other values of an independent variable of a x.

3) if ( (x > -10 & x < 0) | (x > 0 & x < 10) , x, if (x == 0, 100, sin (x) ) )

In this example the piece-wise function receives the value of a x on segments (-10, 0 and (0,

10), in point 0 receives value 100 and sin(x)

– at other x values.

Units of measurement

Customizable measurement units are used in the APM Structure3D system. At change of units of measurement the expression is automatically converted so that it would turn identical with consideration for new measurement units.

For conversion of units of measurement «the conversion coefficient» and the «delta» are used

(it is used for temperature).

The expression field at a species template is displayed: «coefficient*» {of "expression"} is «the delta», for a variable a species template is displayed: [«Coefficient*» («variable» + «delta»)].

In a case, when at change of measurement units a coeffi cient is equal «to 1.0» or the delta – equal «to 0.0», they do not appear in an expression and the template may not be used.

A remark.

It is unlikely to remove parts of templates. So the expression outside brackets «{», «}» can't be changed in some way. For change of an expression in this case the button "Clear" must be used.

It is unlikely to change the expression inside brackets in any way «]». For deletion of a variable together with a template all the template together with brackets in this case must be selected and it must erase with "Delete" or "Backspace" keys.

An error check

If the user defined an incorrect expression, he will be notified by a message with description of an error and the cursor in an input field will be placed to the error position.

Fig. 8.14 An incorrect argument input error

258

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

259

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 9. Finite Element Analysis

Theoretical basis

The main idea of the method is to break object into areas (finite elements) and to describe object behavior in each area by a set of functions presenting stress and displacements in the given area.

Realization of finite element method for strained state of a body is based on displacement calculation method. So the displacements in arbitrary point within finite element are described by a set of some functions - usually polynomials - of point coordinates. Substitution in these functions of nodal coordinates of finite element allows to write down the displacements u(x) of any point of an element through unknown nodal displacements.

u

(

x

)

n

N

(

x

)

u

or

u

(

x

)

N

(

x

)

U i i

where

N i

( x )

i

1

- element shape function, of element shape function,

U u

i

- displacement vector of i-th node of element,

- vector of element nodal displacements.

Let’s consider element strain state

N

(x )

- matrix

Equation

D

describes relations of stresses where D

– elasticity matrix of Hooke’s law.

(x) with strains

(x) for linear-elastic material,

Strain can be expressed through nodal displacements of an element

B u

Complete potential energy of element is stated as where

p

(

e

)

1 / 2

v

T

D

dV

v

u

T

p dV

s

u

T

q dS

и

q

– vectors of volume and surface forces accordingly.

,

Substituting strain vector through nodal displacements

(

e

)

( 1 / 2

U

T

(

BN

)

T

DBN dV

)

U

v

(

v

p

T

N dV

s

q

T

N dS

)

U

Equation for potential energy can be written down as

(

e

)

1 / 2

U

T

K

U

 where:

K

(

e

)

v

(

BN

)

T

DBN dV

– element stiffness matrix;

f

T f

T

U

v

p

T

N dV

s

q

T

N dS

– vector of reduced nodal forces.

Complete potential energy of system is the total energy from all of its elements

П =

(e)

, e

Minimization of potential energy results in FEA (Finite Element Analysis) equation system

KU = F where K global stiffness matrix и F nodal force vector obtained by summation correspondent stiffness matrix

K

(e )

elements and force vectors f of single finite elements.

260

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Finite elements

The following finite elements are supported:

Rod

4-noded Plate

3-noded Plate

8-noded solid octahedron

6-noded solid triangular prism

4-noded solid tetrahedron

Элемент трубопровода;

Изогнутый элемент трубопровода;

10-noded solid tetrahedron

20-noded solid tetrahedron

Coordinate systems

Each structure element has its own local coordinate system. For convenience, all coordinate systems are right-handed. Orientation of local coordinate system for different elements is shown below.

Node coordinate system may have any orientation by its rotation. By default, it coincides with the global coordinate system. The following node attributes are specified in node coordinate system: supports, elastic supports, nodal displacements in direction of fixed degree of freedom.

Rod coordinate system is always oriented so that X axis is directed along its axis. Rod crosssection orientation is strictly attached to its coordinate system. Besides, loads on rod are also specified in rod coordinate system.

Plate coordinate system is always oriented so that Z axis is normal to the plate surface. X axis is parallel to one of the plate sides and Y axis completes the system to right-handed orientation. Plate coordinate system can be inverted (make opposite normal direction). Plate distributed load is specified in the plate coordinate system.

Solid element coordinate system coincides with global one.

Degrees of freedom. A node has six degrees of freedom. A rod has twelve degrees, a plate has

18 or 24 depending on the number of its nodes. Solid elements have 12, 18 or 24 degrees of freedom,

3 translational displacements in each node. Supports remove degrees of freedom from the system.

Degrees of freedom and local coordinate systems for different elements are shown below:

261

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

In order to create stiffness, mass and geometric matrices, we need to know shape functions for every element, allowing us to obtain displacements in every point of the element expressed in terms of node displacements. Procedures of obtaining form functions from base polynomials are discussed in books on finite element method. Base polynomials for every element are shown below.

Triangular plate element

For lateral displacements of triangular plate element, we use part of 3 rd

order polynomial in terms of L-coordinates with 9 unknowns

L1 L2 L3

2

L3

2

L3

2

L1 L2

L3

2

For displacements in plane

– 1

2 st

2

order polynomial

2

L1 L2

L3

2

2

2

L3

2

L1 L2

L3

2

262

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

( 1 x y )

For lateral displacements of quadrangular plate element

– part of 4 th

order polynomial with 12 unknowns

1 x y x

2 y

2 x

3 x

2

 y

2 y

3 x

3

 y

3

For displacements in plane

– part of 2 nd

order polynomial

( )

For lateral displacements of rod element in one plane

– part of 3 rd

order polynomial

1 x x

2 x

3

For axial and torsion displacements

– 1 st

order polynomial

( 1 x )

Working with finite elements

It is advisable to follow these rules while modeling using finite elements. The angles between adjacent edges of 4-noded plate element should be closer to 90

. The angles of the 3-noded plate should be closer to 60

. The angles should be never equal or greater than 180

which would otherwise make the element degenerate and the result

– indeterminate.

Examples of degenerate finite elements

For calculation of formulae for shell elements, thin-plate theory was used, assuming that plate thickness is 5 and several orders lower than linear dimensions of the plate.

Stresses in plate elements

We consider that the line being normal to non-deformed equilateral surface and straight, remains straight after deformation and normal to the deformed surface of the element. All stresses lying in plane of the element are considerably greater than those perpendicular. Stresses have non-uniform distribution along the element’s height.

263

Solid elements

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Glossary on Finite Element Method

Bate K., Wilson E. Numerical Methods of Analysis and Finite-Element Method.

Gallager R. Finite-Element Method. The Basics.

Darkov A., Shaposhnikov N. Structural Mechanics.

Zenkevitch O. Finite-Element Method for Technics.

Smirnov A. Analysis of Framed Structures, Plates and Shells With the Help of Computers.

Sinitzin A.. Finite-Element Method for Dynamics of Structures.

Agapov V. Finite-Element Method for Statics, Dynamics and Buckling of Spatial Thin-Walled

Supported Structures.

Ivanov B. Solving Structural Units Dynamics and Buckling Problems By Finite-Elements Method.

Hetchumov R. Application of Finite-Elements Method to Structure Calculation.

264

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Chapter 9. ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS ANALYSIS

(EMA)

1.

Overview of electromagnetic fields analysis

The tools of electromagnetic fields analysis that are implemented in the module APM Structure3D, are available starting with version 13 and can be used to study various effects of electromagnetism, such as self-induction, magnetic flux density, the distribution of the magnetic field lines, loss of electric power and other related phenomena. These tools effective in the analysis of such devices as solenoids

(inductors), magnetic starters, electric motors, sources of constant magnetic fields, transformers, electromagnets, etc. APM Structure3D has the capacity to solve problems of microwave equipment

(calculation of waveguides, resonators and antennas).

Three types of electromagnetic analysis are available:

Three-dimensional stationary electromagnetic fields;

Low frequency three-dimensional variable electromagnetic fields;

High frequency three-dimensional electromagnetic fields.

The finite-elemental formulation used in an APM Structure3D modulus of a considered type of analysis is based on Maxwell equations for electromagnetic fields. By putting of scalar or vector potential in these equations and establishment of defining relations, the user can get the equations which are convenient for finite-elemental analysis.

Analysis in the low frequency and high frequency area

Electromagnetic field analysis can be divided depending on speed of change of (induction and briskness) vectors characterizing state of field into low frequency (0 ~ 1000 Hz) and high frequency

(about 1 MHz ~ 10 GHz) area.

Problems, inter alia, represent practical interest for the calculations in the low frequency area and stationary

– (0 Hz), those related to such electrical devices: Electric motors, electromagnetic drives, transformers, etc.

During solution of tasks in the high frequency area usually wave processes of the proliferation of electromagnetic waves in the space are explored, or the electronic characteristics and SHF

– devices of such ones are investigated: antennae, resonators, waveguides, micro-strip transmission lines, etc.

Types of analysis

In the low-frequency electromagnetic fields are the following types of problems that arise, which can be solved with the help of EMA:

1) Electrostatics;

2) Electricity kinetics;

3) Magneto statics;

4) Electromagnetic transients;

Electrostatic calculation (Electrostatics)

The EMA tools used for electric field analysis affect two areas of electric phenomena: Direct current flow (conductors, electrostatics (dielectrics). They are assigned to the typical parameters representing interest: current density, electric field strength, the stress distribution, the thermal effect of current, power and strength of the electric field, electrostatic capacitance, current and voltage drop.

Three-dimensional tasks arising in development of different devices such as accumulation buses, transmission lines, high voltage insulators screening covers, capacitors, etc., can be solved.

265

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Laplace's equation is used as theoretical basis for analysis of stationary electric field in the program. Largely unknown (nodal degrees of freedom), is determined by a finite-element solutions are electric potentials (voltage). The rest of the parameters are calculated over their values.

Electrostatic field analysis is used for a calculation of electric field characteristics and a potential distribution conditioned by a system of electric charges or voltage drop. Two types of loads are allowed: A difference of potentials and charge density. It is assumed linear analysis is carried out, i.e. the parameters, characterizing electric field, linearly depend on applied voltage.

Solution consists in receipt of quantities of electric potentials in nodes, gives a possibility to find electric field intensity and current density.

Calculation of direct currents field (Electricity kinetics)

The EMA program can be used for finding current density and a distribution of electric potentials

(a voltage) arising in electric circuits in a course of direct current or at the expense of voltage drop.

Two types of loads are considered as input parameters: Current and voltage. Analysis is assumed linear, i.e. magnitude of electric current in separate sections of a circuit is proportional to input current.

The task of direct electric current flow is solved with use of a potential function and reduces to calculation of electric potentials (current or voltage density) in model nodes.

Static electromagnetic fields (Magneto statics)

Analysis of static electromagnetic field is possible for three-dimensional tasks in a linear statement. The three-dimensional task of magneto statics is a result of minimization of a magnetic energy functional associated with a three-dimensional potential vector. There is a possibility to model conductors and permanent magnets in form of sources.

The conductors are being modeled by finite elements or with help of solid-state primitives in form of a straight or circular rod and coil rings. The user has a possibility to model iron cores and nonmagnetic materials (air).

EMA program provides the user linear magnetic substances, including the values of the magnetic permeability of isotropic and orthotropic materials. .When post processing of the results it is possible to get a picture of the vector potential, magnetic flux density and magnetic field strength.

Variable stationary electromagnetic low frequency field

Electromagnetic analysis can be done for tasks in three-dimensional statement. In the analysis of non established transient potential vectors are computed, as the induction of the magnetic field flux density and intensity of the electromagnetic field.

For a solution of these equations an implicit scheme of integration by the time of Krank-Nikolson is used. The scheme of Krank- Nikolson integration is the discrete procedure with help of which the vector of field potentials is being computed in separate points of a time interval.

Analysis is carried out for electromagnetic high frequency field on the basis of a complete system of Maxwell equations i.e. with consideration for the circulation of electromagnetic waves. Such a kind of analysis is required in those cases when wavelength is comparable to determining device gauges.

It is important to understand for high frequency electromagnetic field the «edge» finite elements whose discrete connections are carried out not through the nodes, but through the edges with which the degrees of freedom are associated

– projections of electric field strength vector to an edge are applying.

For high frequency electromagnetic field modal analysis is available.

Modal analysis

Modal analysis is used for determination of the natural frequencies and forms of fluctuations for hollow resonators. Analysis must precede any dynamic calculation of a resonator because knowledge of fundamental modes of oscillations and oscillation frequencies gives a possibility to accordingly characterize transients in a system.

To solve the task of eigen values, Lanczos method is used. Modal analysis can be used for determination of a system resonant properties, inter alia, with consideration for dielectric and surface

266

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

loss. At the same time the losses are assumed small, not even having effect on the natural frequencies of a system.

Analysis in the low frequency area

An electrostatic calculation

During solution of an electrostatic task it is believed all the objects are stationary (not being changed in time) and there is no current in conductors (in other words, the conductors are found in electrostatic equilibrium state). All conductors are considered ideal and equi-potential, therefore, inside conductors electric field is absent

– the conductors can’t be calculated in this form of a calculation, a calculation, of the electrostatic task to be posted only for dielectrics. The unknown calculation value is electric scalar potential through which calculated strength and induction (offset) of the electric field are being computed.

Calculating model development

For solution of electrostatics tasks the user needs to define geometry of a calculated area, using three-dimensional finite elements of the first order

– four-node (tetrahedrons), six-node (triangular prisms), or eight-node (hexahedrons). It is required for a calculation passing that the model did not contain any other finite elements and was associated, in other words, It was a single entity and not held separately spaced nodes.

All the materials that are used in a model must have a property

– relative (relative to an electric constant



0

=8, 854187817

10

-12

[F]/[m]) dielectric permeability. Table below means of determination of this property available for a user are presented.

Table 10.1 Relative dielectric permeability

Units

Anisotropy of Measurements

Ways of definition

Available independent variables

An isotropic one,

An orthotropic one

[]

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

At setting of an orthotropic property one is to consider the direction of axes of orientation is coinciding with the local coordinate of the three-dimensional element for which this material is assigned.

Definition of loads and boundary conditions

For modeling of electrostatics tasks the following types of loads and boundary conditions are available to a user:

1) Electric charge;

2) Electric charge density;

3) Electric potential.

Information about these objects is presented in table 10.2

Table 10.2 Electrostatic loads

Name Type Units Application Ways of definition Available

267

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

of

Measurements objects independent variables

Electric charge

Electric charge density

Electric potential

Scalar one

Scalar one

Scalar one

[Cl]

[Cl]/[length*]

3

[В]

Nodes

Threedimensional elements

Nodes,

Threedimensional elements

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window

'Settings' in tab "Units".

Electric charge

Electric charge is a load for the tasks of electrostatics. At setting to a nodes group of a constant value a given value will be assigned to each node. At setting to a node group of a variable value

(graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node.

If one Loading includes several loads of this type, which contain the same node, it will be taken into account in the calculation for the node, the sum of all loads values of this type of Loading, which includes the node.

Electric charge density

Electric charge is a load for the tasks of electrostatics. At setting to a group of threedimensional elements of a constant value a certain* value will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a variable value

(graph, table, function) a certain* value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If one Loading includes several loads of this type, which contain the same three-dimensional element, it will be taken into account in the calculation for a given three-dimensional element, the sum of the values of all loads of this Loading type, which includes the three-dimensional element.

*A certain value is defined as an integral weight of a node for specified density.

Electric potential

Electric potential is the boundary condition for tasks of electrostatics. At setting to a nodes group of a constant value, a given value will be assigned to each node. At setting to a node group of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node.

At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a given value will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements. At setting to a group of threedimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned into each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

268

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

If one "Loading" includes several loads of this type, which contains one and the same node

(three-dimensional element), then the calculation will be considered for this node (three-dimensional element) value of the last created this type.

All the described types of loads can be added to a document by the choice of a corresponding shortcut menu item for node Electric loads on the Objects panel (fig. 4.64).

Fig. 10.1 Electrostatic loads

Performing calculation

To carry out the Electrostatic calculation is necessary to select in the horizontal menu

Calculate,... and then a dialog window Calculation will appear.

Fig. 10.2 Start of an electrostatic calculation

In the dialog box Calculation the user must mark the Electrostatic calculation section, in the drop-down list for loading must select Loading, for which user wants making a calculation, to select in the drop-down list Method by which the system of linear algebraic equations for a posed discrete task will calculate. After a press of an OK button the Electrostatic calculation will be made.

If the user in the Loading for the calculation of which is held, did not give any type of Electrical load capacity, which includes at least one node or three-dimensional element, than he will receive the

269

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

ambiguous decision (with precision up to a constant term). In addition, the matrix of the linear algebraic equations system for the posed discrete task soonest of all, will be ill-conditioned, which can lead to impossibility of the task solution.

Selecting a method for solving a system of linear algebraic equations for a posed discrete task must base on the following positions:

1) Sparse_LL method is intended for systems of linear algebraic equations with a symmetric positively definite matrix, based on expansion of Kholetskii.

2) Sparse_LDL method is intended for systems of linear algebraic equations with a symmetric positively indefinite matrix, based on LDL decomposition.

3) Sparse_LU method is intended for systems of linear algebraic equations with an asymmetric matrix, based on LU decomposition.

4) IterMINRES method is the iteration method intended for tasks of linear algebraic equations systems with a symmetric positively indefinite matrix, in particular, with the degenerate one.

In most cases all the electrostatics tasks are reduced to systems of linear algebraic equations by a positively definite matrix. Therefore Sparse_LL is usually more preferable, but in a number of cases

(the sufficiently small coefficients are on the main diagonal of a matrix conditioned by a crummy finiteelemental mesh or material properties), the matrix may be positively uncertain. At the same time the

Sparse_LL method may not solve the task (a message about which the user will receive), then one can choose the Sparse_LDL or Sparse_LU methods which can solve that task. The key feature of

Sparse_LL, Sparse_LDL, and Sparse_LU methods is that for their work (implementation of decomposition) the specified amount of random access memory which is increasing with dimensions of a task that is solved is necessary. In addition, «greediness» towards random access method memory is increasing in the following sequence (Sparse_LL

–>Sparse_LDL–>Sparse_LU). Therefore, such cases are possible, when for the problem is not enough RAM (a message about which the user will receive), this case, it is advisable to choose a method IterMINRES, which is much less demanding on the size of the RAM, due to the iterative nature it is slower.

View of results

After an electrostatic calculation in the bar Objects in the Results node new menu item

Electrostatic calculation will appear.

Fig. 10.3 Electrostatic calculation results

The user is available for viewing the results of five types of cards:

1) Electric potential of [V] (contoured);

2) Electric field strength [V] / [length *] (contoured);

3) Vectoral strength of electric field [V] / [length *] (vectorial);

4) Electric induction [Kl]/

2

[length*] (contoured);

5) Vector electric induction [Kl]/

2

[length*] (vectorial).

270

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window

'Settings' in tab "Units".

For details work with Cards of results see in the section "Results" in the user manual "Work with a Project Tree".

Calculation of direct currents field

During resolution of a calculation task of direct currents field it is considered that all the objects are stationary (not changed in time), the currents in conductors are compensated (in other words, the sum of all external currents is equal to zero). The dielectrics can’t be calculated in this form of such a calculation. A calculation of direct currents field hear is for conductors only. The unknown calculation value is electric scalar potential through which then strength of electric field and electric current density are being computed.

Calculating model development

For solution of a calculation of field of direct currents task the user needs to define geometry of a calculated area, using three-dimensional finite elements of the first order

– four-node (tetrahedrons), six-node (triangular prisms), or eight-node (hexahedrons). It is required for a calculation passing that the model did not contain any other finite elements and was associated, in other words, It was a single entity and not held separately spaced nodes.

All the materials that are used in the model must have a property

– specific electric conductivity.

In Table 4.2.3 means of this property available for a user are presented.

Table 10.3 is Specific electric conductivity

Units

Anisotropy of Measurements

Ways of definition

Available independent variables

Constant value,

An isotropic one,

An orthotropic one

Graph.

Table,

X coordinate

1/([ Ohm]

[length*])

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

Function

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window

'Settings' in tab "Units".

At setting of an orthotropic property one is to consider the direction of axes of orientation is coinciding with the local coordinate of the three-dimensional element for which this material is assigned.

Definition of loads and boundary conditions

For tasks modeling the calculation of direct current field the following types of loads and boundary conditions are available to a user:

1) Electric current;

2) Electric potential.

Information about these objects is presented in table 10. 4

271

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Table 10.4 Loads of direct current field

Units

Application

Name Type of objects

Measurements

Electric current Scalar one [Cl] Nodes

Nodes,

Electric potential

Scalar one

[В]

Threedimensional elements

Ways of definition

Constant value

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

Available independent variables

-

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

Electric current

Load for the field of direct currents tasks is electric current. At setting to a nodes group of a constant value, a given value will be assigned to each node. But this load is essentially points' and it is recommended to set it to one node..

If one Loading includes several loads of this type, which contain the same node, it will be taken into account in the calculation for the node, the sum of all loads values of this type of Loading, which includes the node.

Electric potential

Electric potential is the boundary condition for the tasks of direct currents field. At setting to a nodes group of a constant value, a given value will be assigned to each node. At setting to a node group of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node.

At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a given value will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements. At setting to a group of threedimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned into each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If one "Loading" includes several loads of this type, which contains one and the same node

(three-dimensional element), then the calculation will be considered for this node (three-dimensional element) value of the last created this type.

All the described types of loads can be added to a document by the selection of a corresponding shortcut menu item for the node Electric load on the panel Objects (Fig. 4.66).

Performing calculation

To carry out the Electrostatic calculation is necessary to select in the horizontal menu Calculate, and then a dialog window Calculation will appear.

272

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.4 Start of a direct currents calculation

In the dialog window Calculation the user must mark the item Calculation of direct currents, in the drop-down list for loading must select Loading, for which a user wants making a calculation, to select in the drop-down list Method the method by which the system of linear algebraic equations for a set discrete task will count. After a press of an OK button the Calculation of direct currents will be made.

If a user in the loading, for which calculation is performing, did not give any type of electrical

load capacity, where at least one node or three-dimensional element is included, the result will be ambiguous (with accuracy to a constant term). In addition, the matrix of the linear algebraic equations system for the posed discrete task soonest of all, will be ill-conditioned, which can lead to impossibility of the task solution.

About selection of a solution method for the linear algebraic equations system for a posed discrete task see point 2.1.3.

View of results

After an electrostatic calculation, in the bar Objects in the Results node new menu item

Electrostatic calculation will appear.

Fig. 10.5 - Results of direct currents fields calculation

273

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The user is available for viewing the results of five types of cards:

1) Electric potential of [V] (contoured);

2) Electric field strength [V] / [length *] (contoured);

3) Vectorial strength of electric field [V] / [length *] (vectorial);

4) [А]/

2

[length*] current density (contoured);

5) Vectorial [А]/

2

[length*] current density (vectorial).

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window

'Settings' in tab "Units".

For details work with Cards of results see in the section "Results" in the user manual "Work with a Project Tree".

Magnetostatics calculation

During resolution of a magnetostatics task it is considered that all the objects are stationary (not being changed in time). The unknown calculation value is magnetic vector potential through which then strength and induction of magnetic field are being computed.

Calculating model development

For solution of magnetostatics tasks a user needs to define geometry of a calculated area, using three-dimensional finite elements of the first order

– four-node (tetrahedrons), six-node (triangular prisms), or eight-node (hexahedrons). It is required for a calculation passing that the model did not contain any other finite elements and was associated, in other words, It was a single entity and not held separately spaced nodes.

All the materials that are used in the model must have a property

– relative (relatively to a magnetic constant of



0

=4



10

-7

[Hn]/[m]) magnetic permeability. In Table 10. 5 means of this property determination available for a user are presented.

Table 10.5 Relative magnetic permeability

Units

Anisotropy of Measurements

Ways of definition

Available independent variables

An isotropic one,

An orthotropic one

[]

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

At setting of an orthotropic property one is to consider the direction of axes of orientation is coinciding with the local coordinate of the three-dimensional element for which this material is assigned.

Definition of loads and boundary conditions

For modeling of electrostatics tasks the following types of loads and boundary conditions are available to a user:

1) Electric current density;

2) A residual magnetization vector;

274

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

3) A magnetic vectorial potential.

Information about these objects is presented in table 10.6

Table 10.6 Magnetostatics loads

Units

Name Type of

Measurements

Application objects

Ways of definition

Available independent variables

Electrical current density

A residual magnetization vector

Vectorial one

Vectorial one

[А] /[Length*] is

2

[А]/[length*]

Threedimensional elements

Threedimensional elements

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

Vectorial magnetic potential

Vectorial one

[Вб]

/[Length*]

Nodes,

Threedimensional elements

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window 'Settings' in tab "Units".

Electrical current density

Electric current density is a load for the tasks of magnetostatics, it is applying for a part of the calculated model which is a conductor with current. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a certain* value will be assigned into each node of all selected three-dimensional elements. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a certain* value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If several loads of this type entered into one loading, which held one the same threedimensional element, in the calculation for this one three-dimensional element the sum of a value from all loads of this type of this Loading in which the three-dimensional element is included, will be considered.

*A certain value is defined as an integral weight of a node for specified density.

A residual magnetization vector

The residual magnetization Vector is the load for the tasks of magnetostatics, it is applying for a part of the calculated model which is a permanent magnet. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a certain* value will be assigned into each node of all selected threedimensional elements. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a certain* value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If several loads of this type entered into one loading, which held one the same threedimensional element, in the calculation for this one three-dimensional element the sum of a value from

275

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

all loads of this type of this Loading in which the three-dimensional element is included, will be considered.

*A certain value is defined as an integral weight of a node for specified density.

Vectorial magnetic potential

Vector magnetic potential is the boundary condition for the tasks of magnetostatics, the user, for this vector load, may specify not all components of the vector. The not specified components will be computed on the input of magnetostatics calculation. At setting to a nodes group of a constant value, a given value will be assigned to each node. At setting to a node group of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node.

At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a given value will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements. At setting to a group of threedimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned into each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If one "Loading" includes several loads of this type, which contains one and the same node

(three-dimensional element), then the calculation will be considered for this node (three-dimensional element) value of the last created this type.

For correct setting of a task the tangential Vectorial Magnetic Potential on the external surfaces of a pattern components must be specified by constant value 0.

All the described types of loads may be added to a document by the choice of a corresponding shortcut menu item for the node Magnetic loads on the panel Objects.

Fig. 10.6 Magnetostatics loads

Performing calculation

After fulfillment of the Magnetostatic calculation is necessarily to select the item

Calculation.... In the horizontal menu Calculations the dialog window Calculation will appear.

276

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.7 Launch of a magnetostatics calculation

In the dialog window Calculation the user must mark the "Magnetostatics Calculation" section, in the drop-down list for loading must select "Loading", for which a user wants to fulfill a calculation, to select in the drop-down list "Method" the method by which the system of linear algebraic equations for a posed discrete task will calculate. After a press of "OK" button the

"Magnetostatics Calculation" will be made.

In a case if the user in Loading for which calculation is performed, did not specify any load of the type Vector magnetic potential, where at least one node or the three-dimensional element is turned on, he will receive an ambiguous result (with accuracy to a constant term). In addition, the matrix of the linear algebraic equations system for the posed discrete task soonest of all, will be ill-conditioned, which can lead to impossibility of the task solution.

About selection of a solution method for the linear algebraic equations system for a posed discrete task see point 2.1.3.

View of results

After an electrostatic calculation, in the bar "Objects" in the "Results" node new menu item

"Electrostatic Calculation" will appear.

Fig. 10.8 Electrostatic calculation results

277

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The user is available for viewing the results of the six types of cards:

1) Magnetic potential of [Vb]/[length*] (contoured);

2) Vector magnetic potential of [Vb]/[length*] (vectorial);

3) Magnetic induction of [Tl] (contoured);

4) Vector magnetic induction of [Tl] (vectorial);

5) Magnetic field force [А]/[length*] (contoured);

6) Vectoral magnetic field force [А]/[length*] (contoured).

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window

'Settings' in tab "Units".

For details work with Cards of results see in the section "Results" in the user manual "Work with a Project Tree".

Non stationary electromagnetic calculation

During solution of stationary problems of electromagnetic field it is considered that all the objects can change in time. In the model magnets, conductors with current density specified (familiar), conductors with unknown current density, permanent magnets can be present. The unknown of a calculation quantity is magnetic vector potential and the time integral of electric potential through which then buoyancy and induction of magnetic field, as well as voltage of electric field and electric current

(for medium with the non-zero electric conductivity) density are being computed.

Calculating model development

For a solution of stationary electromagnetic field tasks the user needs to define geometry of a calculated area, using three-dimensional finite elements of the first order

– four-node (tetrahedrons), six-node (triangular prisms), or eight-node (hexahedrons). It is required for a calculation passing that the model did not contain any other finite elements and was associated, in other words, It was a single entity and not held separately spaced nodes.

All the materials that are used in a model must have two properties:

10.5);

1) Relative (relative to a magnetic constant



0

=4



10

-7

[Hn]/[m]) magnetic permeability (table

2) Specific electric conductance (table 10.3).

Definition of loads and boundary conditions

For modeling of stationary electromagnetic field tasks the following types of loads and boundary conditions are available to a user:

1) Time integral of electric potential;

2) Input section of current;

3) Electric current density;

4) Residual magnetization vector;

5) Vectorial magnetic potential.

Information about these objects is presented in table 10.7

Table 10.7 Electrostatics loads

Units

Name Type of

Application objects

Ways of definition

Available independent

278

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Measurements variables

Time integral of electric potential**

Input section of current

Scalar one

Scalar one

[В]

[с]

[А]

Nodes,

Threedimensional elements

Nodes,

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

Constant value,

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

Time

Electrical current density

A residual magnetization vector

Vectorial one

Vectorial one

[А] /[Length*] is

2

[А]/[length*]

Threedimensional elements

Threedimensional elements

Graph.

Table,

Function

Constant value,

Graph.

Table,

Function

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

X coordinate

Y coordinate

Z coordinate

Nodes, Constant value,

Vectorial magnetic

Vectorial one

[Вб]

/[Length*]

Threedimensional

Graph.

Table,

X coordinate

Y coordinate potential Z coordinate elements Function

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window 'Settings' in tab "Units".

**The time integral of electric potential is also defined as electric potential (it is an object of the same type), there is dimension of [V] in the channel interface

Time integral of electric potential

The time Integral of electric potential is the boundary electromagnetic field condition for stationary tasks. At setting to a nodes group of a constant value, a given value will be assigned to each node. At setting to a node group of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node.

At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a given value will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements. At setting to a group of threedimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned into each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If one "Loading" includes several loads of this type, which contains one and the same node

(three-dimensional element), then the calculation will be considered for this node (three-dimensional element) value of the last created this type.

For the not conducting areas of a pattern this boundary condition must be applied with constant value 0.

279

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Input section of current

The Input section of current is load for the stationary electromagnetic field tasks, it is applying for determination of a conductor section with unknown current density, on the opposite section the time

Integral of electrical potential with constant value 0 must be specified to all nodes.

Electrical current density

Electrical Current Density is load for the stationary electromagnetic field tasks, it is applying for a part of the calculated model which is the sink explorer. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a certain* value will be assigned into each node of all selected threedimensional elements. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a certain* value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If several loads of this type entered into one loading, which held one the same threedimensional element, in the calculation for this one three-dimensional element the sum of a value from all loads of this type of this Loading in which the three-dimensional element is included, will be considered.

*A certain value is defined as an integral weight of a node for specified density.

A residual magnetization vector

The remanence vector is load for the stationary electromagnetic field tasks, it is applying for a part of the calculated model which is the permanent magnet. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a certain* value will be assigned into each node of all selected threedimensional elements. At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a certain* value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If several loads of this type entered into one loading, which held one the same threedimensional element, in the calculation for this one three-dimensional element the sum of a value from all loads of this type of this Loading in which the three-dimensional element is included, will be considered.

*A certain value is defined as an integral weight of a node for specified density.

Vectorial magnetic potential

Vectorial Magnetic Potential is the boundary condition for the stationary electromagnetic field tasks, a user

– for this vector load, may specify not all components of the vector. The not specified components will be computed on the input of magnetostatics calculation. At setting to a nodes group of a constant value, a given value will be assigned to each node. At setting to a node group of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned to each node.

At setting to a group of three-dimensional elements of a constant value a given value will be assigned to each node of all selected three-dimensional elements. At setting to a group of threedimensional elements of a variable value (graph, table, function) a value defined by coordinates of a node will be assigned into each node of all selected three-dimensional elements.

If one "Loading" includes several loads of this type, which contains one and the same node

(three-dimensional element), then the calculation will be considered for this node (three-dimensional element) value of the last created this type.

For correct setting of a task the tangential Vectoral Magnetic Potential on the external surfaces of a pattern components must be specified by constant value 0.

All the described types of loads can be added to a document by the selection of a corresponding shortcut menu item for the site the "Electrical Load" or the site "Magnetic Load" in the bar

"Objects".

280

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.9 is the Loads for stationary electromagnetic field tasks

Performing calculation

After what for the spending of the Static Electromagnetic Calculation is necessarily to select the point "Calculation..." in the horizontal menu "Calculations" the dialog window "Calculation" will appear. (Fig. 4.73).

In the dialog window "Calculation" the user must mark the Stationary electromagnetic

detachment section, in the drop-down list for loading must select "Loading" for which he wants to do a calculation to the field Interval: 0 enter the positive value which defines end time of the modeling. To the field of the "Moments of Time" the user must enter the positive integer value which determines time of how many even intervals of modeling will be divided. The field "Parameter of an Integration

Circuit of Thetha" [0; 1] the user must enter a positive value in the range of [0; 1]. After a press of an

"OK" button the Static Electromagnetic Calculation will be made.

281

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.10 Launch of the static electromagnetic calculation

The parameter of an integration circuit is, theoretically, [0; 1], defines a one-layered method of integration of equations by the time. The certainly stable schemes for the range, however, of [0.5; 1] and them at a sufficiently large pitch are possible to oscillation of a solution. Particular methods of integration are reduced below for some values of the parameter:

0 is the Euler method with a direct increment by the time (a difference ahead) (classical scheme of numerical integration of differential first order equations);

1 - Euler method with a reverse step by the time (with a difference backward);

0,5 - the method of Krank Nicholson (with the central difference);

2/3 - Galerkin method.

If there is a pattern of permanent magnets, and areas with a predetermined current density, in the first few steps of integration is possible to obtain oscillations in the solution. It's due to the fact that the problem is solved with trivial initial conditions, whereby the components of the electromagnetic field changes abruptly.

View of results

The new item after spending of an electrostatic design to appear in the bar Objects in the

Results node Stationary an electromagnetic calculation. After the calculation of the electrostatic, on the panel Objects, in the node Results the new item Non-stationary electromagnetic calculation will appear.

282

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.11 Results of a non-stationary electromagnetic calculation

For the user to view, eleven types of results card are accessibly:

1) Electric potential of [V] (contoured);

2) Electric field strength [V] / [length *] (contoured);

3) Vectorial strength of electric field [V] / [length *] (vectorial);

4) [А]/

2

[length*] current density (contoured);

5) Vectorial [А]/

2

[length*] current density (vectorial).

6) Magnetic potential of [Vb]/[length*] (contoured);

7) Vectorial magnetic potential of [Vb]/[length*] (vectorial);

8) Magnetic induction of [Tl] (contoured);

9) Vectorial magnetic induction of [Tl] (vectorial);

10) Magnetic field strength

[А]/[length*] (contoured);

11) Vectorial magnetic field strength [А]/[length*] (vectorial).

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window

'Settings' in tab "Units".

The user has a possibility to animate each type of results card.

For details work with Cards of results see in the section "Results" in the user manual "Work with a Project Tree".

Analysis in the high frequency area

High frequency modal analysis

High frequency modal analysis is intended for a calculation of the natural frequencies (cut-off frequencies) and forms of electromagnetic structures (waveguides, resonators) working at high frequencies (~ 1 MHz ~ 10 GHz).

During decision of this type tasks it is considered that there is no attenuation of wave processes.

The unknown calculation value is projection of electric field strength vector to «edges» of the grid through which strength of electric and magnetic field is being computed.

283

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Calculating model development

To meet the tasks of calculating the natural frequencies of electromagnetic structures the user must determine the geometry of the computational area, using three-dimensional finite elements of the first order are four-node (tetrahedrons), six- node (triangular prisms) or eight-node (hexahedrons). It is required for a calculation passing that the model did not contain any other finite elements and was associated, in other words, It was a single entity and not held separately spaced nodes. During resolution of the task the three-dimensional elements transform into "edged"

All the materials that are used in a model must have two properties

1) Relative (relative to an electric constant



0

=8, 854187817

10

-12

[F]/[m]) dielectric permeability

(table 4.2.1);

4.2.5).

2) Relative (relative to a magnetic constant



0=4



10-7 [Hn]/[m]) magnetic permeability (table

Definition of loads and boundary conditions

The calculation own the frequencies in total one boundary condition Perfect electric conductor is available for modeling of stationary problems to a user of electromagnetic structures.

Perfect electric conductor

This boundary condition can be set to model edges and defines an equality to a zero of the projection of the electric field strength vector on these edge. The perfect electric conductor must be set to all external borders of a pattern with an exception of planes of symmetry. In addition, in the model such "walls" may exist, which are reflecting the electromagnetic wave, for such facilities as necessary to set this boundary condition.

Above described boundary condition may be added to the document by the way of the selection the item of the corresponding shortcut menu for the node "High Frequency Loads" in the panel

"Objects"

Fig. 10.12 Loads for high frequency modal analysis

284

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Performing calculation

For fulfillment of High frequency modal analysis in the horizontal menu "Calculations" a point

"Calculation..."ought to be selected after what the dialog window "Calculation" will appear.

Fig. 10.13 Launching of high frequency modal analysis

In the dialog window "Calculation" the user must mark the point "High Frequency Modal

Analysis", to select in the drop-down list of loading "Loading" for which a user wants to make the calculation, to input into the field "Searched Frequencies Number" the positive integer value which defines the lowest natural frequency number and forms corresponding to frequencies that will be found. In the field "Lower Limit" of frequency, Hz, the user must enter the positive value which determines the frequency in Hertzes in less than its value non-search of the natural frequencies. Into the field "Number of Iterations" the user must enter the positive integer value in the range which specifies the maximally possible number of iterations in the Lantsosh method. In the field "Relative

error" a user must enter a positive lower value, less than 1, in the range, what a precision of convergence of the own vectors determinate in the Lantsosh method. After a press of an "OK" button

High frequency modal analysis will be performed.

The fields "Number of Iterations" and "Relative Error" are recommended to leave with values by default with 1000 and 0. If not all the natural frequencies (a message about which the user will receive) were found during solution, one must repeat a calculation having increased the "Iteration

-

Number" or "Relative Error". It is not recommended to enter the value of a relative error more than 10

6

.

View of results

After the high-frequency modal analysis on the panel "Objects" in the "Results" node a new menu item 3D calculation of the natural frequencies of the electromagnetic fields will appear.

285

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.14 Results of high frequency modal analysis

Four types of results cards are available to the user for view:

1) The electric field strength [V]/[length*] (contoured);

2) Vectorial strength of electric field [V]/[length*] (vectorial);

3) The magnetic field force [А]/[length*] (contoured);

4) Vectorial magnetic field force [А]/[length*] (vectorial).

*Length is determined by a value selected in the drop-down list. The length of the dialog window

'Settings' in tab "Units".

For details work with Cards of results see in the section "Results" in the user manual "Work with a Project Tree".

Brief theoretical information

Maxwell equations, describing state electromagnetic field may be written under a differential form in the following form:

 

  



 

 

 

 

 

 

J

 

0;

 

,

D

t

t

B

;

;

(10.1) where t - time [s];

D

- Electric induction vector (offset) [Tl] / [m2];

E

- The electric field vector

[B] / [m]; - electric current density [A] / [m2];

  divergence;

B

The vector of magnetic induction [Tl];

 

- The operation of the rotor.

H

- Magnetic field force vector [A] / [m];

- the volume density of electric current; -

 

 

J

- Vector

Operation of

Vectors describe the state of the electromagnetic field are related as follows:

D

 

a

E

, (10.2)

286

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Where

  

0 absolute dielectric permeability of the environment [F]/[м],

are relative dielectric (relative to vacuum) permeability of the environment [];

 dielectric permeability of vacuum) is 8, 854187817∙10

-12

[F]/[m].

0

– the dielectric constant (absolute

The expression (10.2) is true only in the isotropic electric environment, if environment is orthotropic, it must be written in appearance:

D

 

E

, (10.3) where [

] is an absolute dielectric medium permeability matrix:

 

0

0

xx

0

yy

0

0

,

0 0

zz

(10.4)

Here

 xx

,

 yy

, and

 zz

are relative dielectric permeability of environment in x, y, and corresponding z directions.

B

 

H

, (10.5)

Where

  

0

absolute magnetic permeability of the environment [Hn]/[m],

(relatively to vacuum) magnetic permeability of the environment [],

(absolute magnetic permeability of vacuum) of the 4

∙10

-7 

1, 25663706∙10

-6

Hn]/[m].

– relative

0

are a magnetic constant

The expression (10.5) is true only in isotropic magnetic medium, if medium is orthotropic, it must be written in appearance:

B

 

H

, (10.6) where [

] is the magnetic environment permeability matrix:

 

0

0

xx

0

yy

0

0

,

0 0

zz

(10.7)

Here

 xx

,

 yy

, and

 zz

are relative (relatively to vacuum) magnetic permeability of the environment in directions of x, y, and z respectively [].

In case of presence of permanent magnet the correlation (10.6) assumes appearance:

B

 

H

 

M

0 0

, (10.8)

Where

– the

M

0

vector of the own residual magnetization of permanent magnet [А/m].

Very often it is necessary to express the force of magnetic field:

H

 

B

0

 

M

0

, (10.9) where [

] is a matrix of magnetic resistance of the environment:

287

 

1

0

1

xx

0

0 0

1

yy

0 0

0

1

zz

.

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

(10.10)

An equation of inviolability of electromagnetic field follows from the first equation of the system

(10.1) after application of a divergence operation:

 

J

D t

0

. (10.11)

One is also to note electric current density is bound with electric field strength (the Ohm's law) by magnetic induction (the Amp's law):

J

 

E v B

, (10.12) where [

] is the specific electric orthotropic environment 1 conductance/([Ohm]

[m]) matrix:

 

0

xx

0

yy

0

0

, (10.13)

0 0

zz

Here

 xx

,

 yy

, and

 zz

are specific electric conductance of medium in directions of a x, y, and z respectively to 1/(the [Ohm]

[m]);

v

velocity of a conductor in magnetic field [m]/[s].

Electrostatics

Electrostatic field, if magnetic field is absent, even electric currents naturally are absent, can arise in medium when there are electric charges. In this case Maxwell (10.1)'s equations will assume an appearance:

 

 

0;



B



 

0;

 

 

0;

.

(10.14)

It follows from the second equation (10.14) that electric field is potential. Therefore, for it some scalar potential determined by a following expression exists:

E

 

, (10.15)

Where

is electric potential [V]; a gradient

 

operation.

288

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Substituting to fourth equation (10.14) for expressions (10.15) and (10.3), we get Poisson's following equation for electrostatic field:

 

 

. (10.16)

After solution of equation (10.16) of an electric field vector they are restored over expressions

(10.15) and (10.3).

Field of direct currents

If only the conductors where direct current is flowing are examined, in other words, if change in time of magnetic, as well as electric field is absent, Maxwell (10.1)'s equations will assume an appearance:

 

 

 

E

J

0;

 

 

 

0;

D

 

;

;

(10.17)

It (10.17) follows from the second equation that electric field is potential. Therefore, for it some scalar potential (10.15 ones, although also are determining from an equation, it is exists). Equation

(10.11) of continuity in this case apparently assumes an appearance:

 

 

0

. (10.18)

Given there are no mobile conductors, substituting to equation (10.18) for expressions (10.15) and (10.12), we get Laplace's following equation for a calculation of direct currents field:

 

 

0

. (10.19)

After solution of an equation (10.19) a vector of strength of electric field is restored by an expression (10.15), and a density of electric current by the expression vector is being restored are got from (10.12) taking into consideration of absence of mobile conductors:

J

 

E

. (10.20)

Magnetostatics

For a calculation of magnetic field in the absence of change in time of magnetic, as well as electric field a system (10.17) will be used and its equations on the third are going that magnetic field is solenoidal. Therefore, for it some vector potential determined by a following expression exists:

B

 

 

, (10.21)

Where

A

– vectorial magnetic potential is [Vb]/[m]

For non-ambiguity definition of vectorial magnetic potential we will introduce Coulon's calibration:

 

 

0

. (10.22)

Substituting to first equation (10.17) for expressions (10.21), (10.22) and (10.9), we get the following vector equation for a calculation of magnetic field:

289

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

  

e

 

J

0

 

M

0

,

e

is medium magnetic resistance of medium (

3

1

0

1

xx

1

yy

1

zz

)

(10.23)

Afterwards the solutions of equation (10.23) of a magnetic field vector are restored by expressions (10.21) and (10.9).

Non stationary electromagnetic field

For description of stationary electromagnetic field we will connect a vector of electric field strength with electric potential and magnetic vector potential as follows:

E

 

A t

 

. (10.24)

Substituting expressions (10.24) (10.21) (10.22), (10.12) (10.9) to first equation (10.1) and

(10.11) of the system, we will get the following equations, describing stationary electromagnetic field:

for areas with the current density distribution unknown:

 

 

  

 

A t

 

 

v

 

 

 

A

t

 

 

v

 

 

0,

0;

(10.25)

for the rest of the areas:

  

 

J

1

0

M

0

. (10.26)

After solution of equations (10.25) and (10.26) the magnetic field vectors are recovered by expressions (10.21) and (10.9), the vector of electric field strength restore by expression (10.24) and the electric current density vector, an expression (10.12).

One is to note for convenience of integration by the time it is convenient to introduce an integral of electric potential into consideration:

dt

, (10.27) then the system of equations (10.25) will assume the view:

290

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

 

 

A t

 

 



t

e

 

 

A t

 

0.



 

t

 

0;

Electromagnetic high frequency field

For high frequency electro-dynamic processes Maxwell's equations can be reduced to a

Helmholtz equation (relatively complex vector of electric field strength

 

r

1

 

 

k

0

2

 

r

E j J

0

S

,

E

[V]/[m]) of an aspect:

(10.28)

Where



]

r

- matrix of relative complex magnetic permeability of the medium []; "-1" - the operation matrix inversion; j - imaginary unit;

- operating angular frequency [Rad / s]; [

] r

- matrix of relative complex permittivity of the medium []; k

0

- wave number of the vacuum [Rad] / [m]; -

J

S

Complex vector density excitation current [A] / [m

2

].

Education examples

Calculation of a capacitor (electrostatics)

1. Create the new document where one will have to create a cube of three-dimensional elements divided into 10 parts in every of the directions, Fig. 4.78. This cube will be dielectric between plates of a capacitor. In the nodes charge on the opposite faces of the cube will be specified and these facets will represent plates of a capacitor themselves.

2. For the Steel material add the property "Relative dielectric permeability" with constant value 1.

3. Specify this material to all the model. For that all the model must be selected when the layer

"Model" is activated and in the shortcut material menu the item "Specify highlighted" must be selected.

4. Add two loads

– "Electric potential". For it in the shortcut menu of a node "Electrical loads" choose a corresponding menu item.

5. Activate only the layer "Potential 0" and for the first load specify all nodes of this layer. Leave the value of load by default (0 V).

6. For the second load activate only the layer "Potential 5" and set electric potential of the 5th

Century to all nodes of the layer.

291

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.15 Setting of electric potential

7. Further execute a calculation having selected an item of the horizontal menu

"Calculations/Calculation"... and having specified an electrostatic calculation with parameters by default. The result will appear in the tree.

Fig. 10.16 Tree with results of an electrostatic calculation.

The received results are presented in Fig.s 10.17

– 10.21.

292

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.17 Results map

– an electric potential distribution

Fig. 10.18 Results map

– intensive of electric field are a total value

Fig. 10.19

– Results map – total vectorial electric field strength

Fig. 10.20 Results map

– the total value of electric induction

Fig. 10.21 Results map

– total value of vectorial electric induction

293

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

The calculation of the magnetic circuit (magnetostatics).

Create a new file. A model of a magnetic circuit of rectangular shape consisting of several layers, is created in the file, Fig. 4.83. It is desirable to divide a three-dimensional model with the same parameters as in the Fig.. We specify the layers with the names "Steel", "Magnet", and "Air", see fig.

4.83.

Definition of materials in the model

1. Deactivate all layers except the layer "Steel".

2. Select a part of the model lying in this layer.

3. In the tree in the shortcut menu of the steel material one must select the item "Specify highlighted"

4. Add to steel material the property "Relative magnetic permeability" with constant value 2500.

5. Deactivate the layer "Steel" and turn on the layer "Magnet".

6. Add new general material with the name "Magnet" and property "Relative magnetic permeability" with constant value 1.

7. Select a visible part of the model and specify it the produced magnet material.

8. Deactivate the layer "Magnet" and turn on the "Air" layer.

9. Create the third "Air" material with parameters of the previous one.

10. Define the remainder of the material model "Air'.

The result of operations performed is presented in figure below.

Fig. 10.22 Model with specified materials.

Definition of loads in the model

All the elements on which, is necessarily to set loads, are carried out to separate layers.

1. Switch off all layers except the layer "Magnet".

294

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

2. Add the load "Residual magnetization vector".

3. Select a type of elements

– "Three-dimensional elements".

4. Push the button "Install" and select all elements of the layer.

5. Push the button "Apply". Number of elements, to which load is applied, must be equal to 150.

6. Specify an equal value of load in direction of Z to 50000 А/m, leaving zero values to the directions of X and Y.

7. Switch on all the model layers.

The result is presented in figure below.

Fig. 10.23 Definition of a residual magnetisation vector.

8. Switch off all layers and activate the layer "Normal along Z axe".

9. Add the load "Vectorial magnetic potential".

10. Select a type of elements "Nodes" and apply to nodes in this layer.

11. Remove a switch in direction of Z, leave the rest of values as zero

Fig. 10.24 Definition of vectorial magnetic potential

12. Similarly set vectoral magnetic potential to the nodes "Perpendicular to a Y axis" and

"Perpendicular to a X axis" in layers, deactivating corresponding components of a vector.

295

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

13. Final vectorial magnetic potential is applying on elements of an "Edge" layer. Values are zero in all components of a vector.

Fig. 10.25 Vectorial magnetic potential on elements of an "Edge" layer

Calculation and view of results

1. The open dialog window "Calculation" being called to remove in the menu

Calculations/Calculation... the check mark of the Linear static calculation and set the

Magnetostatic calculation. The calculation method of Sparse_LDL. Push OK.

2. After the completion of the calculation in the tree in the node "Results" will appear the subsite node "Magnetostatic calculation" containing the following results.

Fig. 10.26 Tree after a magnetostatic calculation passing

3. The results are shown in Fig. 10.27 - 10.32.

296

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.27 Map of total magnetic potential results

Fig. 10.28 Map of total magnetic vectoral potential results

Fig. 10.29 Map of magnetic induction total result Fig. 10.31 Map of total magnetic vectorial induction results

297

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.30 Map of total results of magnetic field force Fig. 10.32 Map of total vectorial magnetic field force results

Calculation of direct currents field

1. Create a cube of threedimensional elements by extent 6 х 6 х 6 which will correspond to the area of conductor where one needs to get a distribution of direct currents field.

2. Distribute nodes of this cube to different layers in accordance with fig. below.

Fig. 10.33 Different layers of a cube model with coloring in layers. On the right Layer 0 is turned off.

The Potential 0 layer

– nodes on the upper facet of the cube, Potential 5 – in the lower , the

Layers are Input current and Output current

– nodes on the front side of the cube

3. Create for the steel material the property "Specific electric conductance" with constant value

0,025 1/(the *mm Ohm).

298

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.34 Definition of specific electric conductance of material

4. Specify this material for the whole model, using the section "Assign to All" of the site "Steel" shortcut menu.

5. Deactivate all layers except the layer "Potential 5".

6. Create the electricity constant 5V value load "Electric potential", select all nodes in a visible layer and apply produced load to them.

7. Fulfill the similar acts with the layer "Potential 0". Leave the value of load by default. Result of effects is presented in fig below.

Fig. 10.35 Setting of electric potential to model nodes

1.

Create two more loads "Electric current" and place to nodes in layers "Input current" and "Output current". The value of an incoming current is 1A, the value of outgoing current is -1A.

Fig. 10.36 Setting of electric current to model nodes.

2. Carry out a calculation. Select the menu item Calculations\

Calculation… and choose

"Calculation of direct currents" with default parameters.

3. After a calculation passing a node with corresponding results will appear in the tree.

299

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.37 View results in a project tree

The received results are presented in Fig. 4.99

– 4.103.

Fig. 10.38 Map of electric potential

distribution

Fig. 10.39 Map of total strength of electric

field distribution

Fig. 10.40 Map of total strength of electric

field in vectoral representation distribution

Fig. 10.41 Map of total electric field density

distribution

300

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.42 Map of total electric field density distribution in vectorial representation

Ring conductor (Non stationary electromagnetic calculation)

1. Create a model from three-dimensional elements of a semi-ring. In the model the exterior nodes of a toroidal surface are to be placed to a separate layer.

Fig. 10.43 Model with external nodes on a toroidal surface placed to the layer "External nodes"

2. For the material "Steel" set two properties: Relative magnetic permeability with constant value

1 and specific electric conductance, a constant value of 0.25 1/Оhm*m.

Fig. 10.44 Definition of electromagnetic material properties.

3. Specify material for all the model.

4. Create the electrical load "Input section of current" with a functional dependence of view of sin

(2*pi()* time) and place it to all nodes of one the model ends. At definition of a function make sure angle is measuring in radians.

301

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.45 Definition of a functional dependence for the load "Input section of current"

Fig. 10.46 Setting of an input current section to model end nodes

5. Set electric potential 0 V to all the nodes of the opposite end of the model.

6. Leave only the layer "External nodes" activated and specify to all nodes of this layer the load

"Vectorial magnetic potential" with the zero values on all components of the vector.

Fig. 10.47 Vectorial magnetic potential applied to external model sites.

7. Deactivate the layer "External nodes" and turn on "Layer 0".

8. Create one more load "Vectorial magnetic potential" with the zero values in directions of X and Z, but the Y direction is not used (for it one needs to deactivate a corresponding switch).

9. Specify this load on nodes of both ends of the model.

302

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.48 Application of Vectorial magnetic potential on model end nodes.

10. Select "Stationary

electromagnetic

calculation" from the menus

Calculations/Calculation.... Set the interval 0 until 2 seconds, moments of time as 40 ones. Carry out a calculation.

11. After accomplishment of the calculation corresponding results will be displayed in the tree.

Fig. 10.49 Results of a stationary electromagnetic calculation in a project tree.

12. The detailed results are presented in Fig.s 10.50 -10.60. For obviousness the results are given for the last moment of time. The vector results are presented by a part of a model for bigger obviousness.

Fig. 10.50 Map of electric potential distribution Fig. 10.51 Map of total electric strength field

303

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

distribution

Fig. 10.52 Map of total electric field strength in vectoral representation

Fig. 10.53 Map of total electric current density distribution

Fig. 10.54 Map of total electric current density distribution in vectorial representation

Fig. 10.55 Map of total magnetic potential distribution

304

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.56 Map of total magnetic potential distribution in vectorial representation

Fig. 10.57 Map of a total magnetic induction distribution

Fig. 10.58 Map of a total magnetic induction distribution in vectorial representation

Fig. 10.59 Map of total magnetic field force distribution

305

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.60 Map of a total magnetic field force distribution in vector representation

A calculation of a waveguide resonator (High frequency modal analysis)

1. A model of the inner cavity of the waveguide segment from three-dimensional elements must be created, see fig. 4.123.

2. For the material "Steel", besides properties of isotropic material, add two more properties:

Relative dielectric permeability with constant value 2,05 and relative magnetic permeability with a constant value equal to 1.

Fig. 10.61 Definition of electromagnetic material properties

3. Set this material for all the model: An item of the shortcut material menu "To assign to everyone".

4. Create the load "Perfect electric conductor". For it select a corresponding menu item in the shortcut menu of the site "High frequency loads".

5. Select a type of edge elements in a "Property" panel and select all the pattern. For this type of load all the outer edges of a model will be selected.

306

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.62 Definition of the load "Perfect electric conductor" of the outer edges of the model

11.

Further select an item of the menu "Calculations/Calculation…" and specify high frequency modal analysis with parameters by default.

12. After implementation of analysis corresponding results will appear in the tree.

Fig. 10.63 Showing results in the project tree

In greater detail the results are presented in Fig. 10.64

– 10.71.

Fig. 10.64 Card of total electric field strength at

frequency of 2,83497 е+08 Hz

Fig. 10.65 Card of total electric field strength at

frequency 4, 12153е+08 Hz

307

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.66 Card of vectorial strength of total electric

field at frequency 2,83497 е+08 Hz

Fig. 10.67 Card of vectorial strength of total electric field

at frequency 4, 12153е+08, Hz

Fig. 10.68 Card of total magnetic field force at frequency 2,8349

7 е+08 Hz

Fig. 10.69 Card of total magnetic field force at frequency

4, 12153е+08, Hz

308

APM Structure 3D. User's Guide

Fig. 10.70 Card of vectorial total magnetic field force at

frequency 2,83497 е+08 Hz

Fig. 10.71 Card of vectorial total magnetic field force at

frequency 4, 12153е+08, Hz

Having pushed on the header of a table column, one can sort supports in the ascending/descending order of a reaction in a selected table column.

Non-mating by forces and moments (sum of reactions and external efforts) is derived in a global coordinate system. This table can also be routed to a printer or to a file in RTF.

The show of reactions vectors is vector map and values for the selected reactions in the table of support.

Filters

– allow incl. / off. display pillars in certain areas of GSK and unilateral pillars.

309

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents